Voluson E-Series BT15-BT18 (EC300-EC330) Service Manual - SM - 5539550APB - 6

P R E L I M I N A R Y (NOVEMBER 4, 2013)
VE6_VE8_COVER.FM
GE Healthcare
Voluson E-Series BT15 / BT16 / BT17 / BT18

Service Manual
English (English)
• Voluson E6 / Voluson E8 / Voluson E10 with Software version EC300, 15.x.x (BT15)
Document Number: 5539550APB

Revision 6
© 2014 - 2017 by General Electric
0123
Revision History
Revision Date Reason for change
1 May 2014 Preliminary Release
2 August 2014 Initial Release
3 May 2015 General Update and Improvement, new parts
4 August 2015 Implementation of EC310 (BT16)
5 July 2016 Implementation of EC320 (BT17), general update
6 August 2017 Implementation of EC330 (BT18), general update
Voluson E-Series Service Manual

i-ii 5539550APB Revision 6
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 – Introduction
1.1 Important Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.2 Legal Notes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
1.3 Purpose of this Service Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11
1.3.1 Typical Users of the "Basic" Service Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11
1.3.2 Models covered by this Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-12
1.3.3 System History - Hardware and Software Versions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-13
1.3.4 Purpose of Operator Manual(s) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-14
1.4 Important Conventions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.4.1 Conventions used in this Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.4.2 Standard Hazard Icons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.4.3 Product Labels and Icons - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-16
1.5 Safety Considerations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19
1.5.1 Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19
1.5.2 Human Safety - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19
1.5.3 Mechanical Safety - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-20
1.5.4 Electrical Safety - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-21
1.5.5 Auxiliary Devices Safety - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-21
1.5.6 Labels Locations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-23
1.5.7 Dangerous Procedure Warnings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-23
1.5.8 Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-24
1.5.9 Returning/Shipping System, Probes and Repair Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-24
1.6 EMC, EMI and ESD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-25
1.6.1 What is EMC? - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-25
1.6.2 Compliance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-25
1.6.3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-25
1.7 Customer Assistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-26
1.7.1 Contact Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-26
1.7.2 System Manufacturer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-27
Chapter 2 – Site Preparation
2.1 General Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.1.1 Environmental requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.1.2 Electrical Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.1.3 EMI Limitations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-3
2.1.4 Environmental Requirements for Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-4
2.1.5 Time and Manpower Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-4
2.1.6 System Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-5
2.2 Facility Needs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6
2.2.1 Purchaser Responsibilities - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6
2.2.2 Required Facility Needs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-7
2.2.3 Desirable Features - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8
2.2.4 Network Setup Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-8
Chapter 3 – Setup Instructions
3.1 Setup Reminders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
3.1.1 Average Installation Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
3.1.2 Installation Warnings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
3.1.3 Safety Reminders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-4
3.2 Receiving and Unpacking the System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5
3.3 Preparing for Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
3.3.1 Verify Customer Order - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
3.3.2 EMI Protection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-8
3.4 Completing the Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-9
3.4.1 Power On / Boot Up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-9
3.4.2 Power Off / Shutdown - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-12
3.4.3 Probe Connection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-13

5539550APB Revision 6 i-iii
Table of Contents
3.5 Connection of Auxiliary Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14

3.5.1 Connecting the LCD Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15
3.5.2 Connecting the OLED Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-16
3.5.3 Connecting the Black & White Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17
3.5.4 Connecting the Color Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19
3.5.5 Connecting the Network Color Laser Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-21
3.5.6 Connecting the DeskJet Color Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24
3.5.7 Connecting the Cellular Modem - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26
3.5.8 Connecting the Wireless Network Adapter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-28
3.5.9 Connecting a Secondary "Patient" Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-29
3.5.10 Connecting the Footswitch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31
3.5.11 Connecting the Barcode Scanner - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32
3.5.12 Connecting the ECG-preamplifier - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33
3.5.13 Connecting an USB Flash Memory Stick - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-34
3.5.14 Connecting an external USB Hard disk - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-34
3.5.15 General Remarks when using external USB-Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-35
3.6 Printer Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.6.1 Installing the Digital Black & White Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.6.2 Installing the Digital Color Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.6.3 Installing the DeskJet Color Printer directly via an USB-cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.6.4 Printer Installation manually - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-37
3.6.5 Adjustment of Printer Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-38
3.6.6 Remote Control Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-41
3.7 System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-42
3.7.1 Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-42
3.8 On-board optional Peripherals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49
3.9 External I/O Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-50
3.9.1 External I/O Pin Outs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-52
3.9.2 Video Specification - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-54
3.9.3 External Cables - Maximum Lengths - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-54
3.10 Available Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-54
3.11 Software/Option Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-54
3.12 Connectivity Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-55
3.12.1 Connectivity Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-55
3.13 Network Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-57
3.13.1 TCP/IP Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-58
3.13.2 Wireless Network Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-59
3.13.3 How to Setup the Cellular Modem - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-64
3.13.4 How to Setup E-mail - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-66
3.13.5 How to Setup E-mail to MMS Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-67
3.13.6 How to enter Patient's Email address and Phone number in the PID screen - - - - - 3-68
3.13.7 Map Network Drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-69
3.13.8 InSite Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-70
3.14 Connectivity Setup Worksheet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-73
3.15 Paperwork - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-75
3.15.1 Product Locater Installation Card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-75
3.15.2 User Manual(s) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-75
Chapter 4 – Functional Checks
4.1 Required Equipments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
4.2 General Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
4.2.1 Power On / Boot Up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-3
4.2.2 Power Off / Shutdown - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-4
4.2.3 System Features - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5
4.3 Functional Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-7
4.3.1 Patient Archive (Image Management) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-8
4.3.2 Erasing DVD/CD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-9
4.4 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images - - - - - - - - - - - 4-10
4.4.1 Save Small Backup (Scan Settings) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-11
4.4.2 Load Small Backup (Scan Settings) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-12

i-iv 5539550APB Revision 6
Table of Contents
4.4.3 Save Full System Configuration (Full Backup) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15

4.4.4 Load Full System Configuration (Full Backup) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-17
4.4.5 Delete Full System Configuration (Full Backup) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-19
4.4.6 Archiving Images - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-20
4.5 Software Configuration Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-23
4.5.1 Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-23
4.6 Peripheral Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-24
4.6.1 ECG Check Out - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-24
4.7 Mechanical Function Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
4.7.1 Control Console Positioning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
4.7.2 Brakes and Direction (Swivel) Locks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
4.8 Site Log - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-26
Chapter 5 – Components and Functions (Theory)
5.1 General information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
5.1.1 Description of Operating Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6
5.1.2 Block diagram Voluson E-Series - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9
5.1.3 Data Flow Control Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
5.1.4 Description of Software Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-12
5.1.5 Description of Hardware Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-21
5.1.6 Data Location - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-22
5.2 FrontEnd Processor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-23
5.2.1 RTF - Probe Control Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-24
5.2.2 RSE - Pencil Probe Board (optional) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-24
5.2.3 RFM - (RF-Interface & Beamformer) FE Mainboard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-24
5.2.4 RSX - (Beamformer Receiver/Transmitter) Extension Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-24
5.3 BackEnd Processor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-25
5.3.1 PC-Motherboard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26
5.3.2 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26
5.3.3 Graphic Card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26
5.3.4 RTV - Video Management Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26
5.3.5 RTB - Distribution Board Bottom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26
5.4 Internal I/O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-27
5.4.1 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT15): ADVANTECH + RTT/RTH6x - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-28
5.4.2 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT15 / BT16): ADVANTECH + RTH50 - - - - - - - - - - 5-29
5.4.3 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT15): KONTRON + RTT/RTH6x - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-30
5.4.4 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT15 / BT16): KONTRON + RTH50 - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31
5.4.5 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT17): ADVANTECH Micro-ATX - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-32
5.4.7 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT18): KONTRON Micro-ATX - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-34
5.5 Control Console (User Interface) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-35
5.5.1 RTH - Distribution Board USB-Hub - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-36
5.5.2 RTT - Distribution Board Top - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-36
5.5.3 Control Console (UI) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-37
5.6 Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-39
5.7 External I/O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-40
5.8 Peripherals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-42
5.8.1 Recording Tools - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-42
5.8.2 Printers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-42
5.8.3 DVD Drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-42
5.8.4 ECG-preamplifier (MAN - optional) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-43
5.8.5 Wireless Network Adapter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-43
5.8.6 Footswitch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-43
5.8.7 Cellular Modem - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-43
5.9 Power Distribution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-44
5.9.1 RSP - Power Supply Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-44
5.10 Mechanical Descriptions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-45
5.10.1 Physical Dimensions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-45
5.10.2 LCD Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-46
5.10.3 Control Console Positioning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-46

5539550APB Revision 6 i-v
Table of Contents
5.11 Air Flow Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-47

5.11.1 Air Flow Distribution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-47
5.12 Service Platform - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48
5.12.1 Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48
5.12.2 Service Platform - Access and Security - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48
5.13 Common Service Desktop (CSD) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-49
5.14 Service Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-50
5.14.1 Introduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-50
5.14.2 Service Page - Access and Security - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-50
5.14.3 Service Page Login - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-50
5.15 Boot Screen Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53
5.15.1 Voluson - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53
5.15.2 GE-Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53
5.15.3 Rollback - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53
5.15.4 Memtest (Memory Check) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-54
Chapter 6 – Service Adjustments
6.1 Regulatory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.2 LCD Monitor Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.2.1 Preparing for Transport - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-3
6.2.2 Loading the Default Monitor Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-3
6.2.3 Monitor Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-3
6.3 Control Console Positioning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
6.3.1 Translation/Rotation Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
6.3.2 Height Adjustment (Elevation) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5
6.4 Modification of Keyboard Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5
Chapter 7 – Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7.1 Collect vital System Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
7.1.1 Shortcuts List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-4
7.2 Request for Service (RFS) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
7.3 Check Point Voltages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
7.3.1 User Interface - Status LEDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
7.3.2 Power Supply (RSP) Status LEDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
7.3.3 Boot Up Diagnostic Status LEDs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-8
7.4 Screen Captures and Logs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
7.4.1 Capturing a Screen - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
7.4.2 Export Log's and System Data - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-10
7.5 Remote Access to the Service Platform - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12
7.5.1 General - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12
7.5.2 How the Customer enables/disables Disruptive Mode and VCO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-13
7.6 Common Service Desktop (CSD) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-14
7.6.1 Error Logs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-14
7.6.2 Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.6.3 Image Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.6.4 Calibration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.6.5 Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.6.6 Utilities - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
7.6.7 Replacement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
7.6.8 PM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
7.7 How to use the Auto Tester program - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-18
7.7.1 Limitation of the Auto Tester - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-19
7.8 Troubleshooting Trees, Instructions and Tech Tips - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20
7.8.1 System does not boot up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
7.8.2 Noise disturbs the Image - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-22
7.8.3 Trackball Malfunction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-25
7.8.4 Printer Malfunction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-26
7.8.5 Monitor Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-27
7.8.6 DVD/CD-Drive Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-28
7.8.7 Network Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-31

i-vi 5539550APB Revision 6
Table of Contents
7.8.8 Activate Windows - Network Connectivity Issues - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-32

7.8.9 Tech Tips - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-33
Chapter 8 – Replacement Procedures
8.1 Returning/Shipping System, Probes and Repair Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2
8.2 System Software - Installation/Upgrade procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-3
8.2.1 Before the Installation/Upgrade Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-4
8.2.2 System Software - Installation Procedure (FMI from DVD) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-6
8.2.3 Software Update Package - Download/Installation Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-10
8.3 Software and Functional Checks after Installation/Upgrade procedure - - - - - - - - - 8-14
8.4 Image Settings Only - Loading Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-15
8.5 Full Backup (Full System Configuration) - Loading Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-15
8.6 Image Archive - Loading Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-15
8.7 Replacement or Activation of Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-16
8.7.1 How to activate Options by means of a "Demo Key" or a "Permanent Key" - - - - - - - 8-16
8.8 Replacement of Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-17
8.8.1 Replacement of the Footrest Cover & Wheel Axis Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-17
8.8.2 Replacement of the Front Frame - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-18
8.8.3 Replacement of the Air Filter Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-19
8.9 Replacement of the Cable Holder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-22
8.9.1 Cable Holder - Replacement Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-22
8.10 Replacement of the Probe Holder (Kit) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-22
8.10.1 Probe Holder (Kit) - Replacement Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-22
8.11 Replacement of the Probe Holder for Endocavity probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-23
8.11.1 Probe Holder (endocavity) - Replacement Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-23
8.12 Replacement of the Trackball Ring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-23
8.12.1 Trackball Ring - Replacement Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-23
8.13 Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-24
8.13.1 Key Caps - Removal Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-24
8.13.2 Key Caps - Installation Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-24
8.14 Replacement of the Caps for Encoders and/or Joycoders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-25
8.14.1 Caps for Encoders and/or Joycoders - Replacement Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-25
8.15 Replacement of the Caps for Hardkeys - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-26
8.15.1 Replacement of Circle Key Caps only - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-26
8.16 Replacement of Fuses at Power Supply Module (RSP) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-27
8.16.1 Fuses at Power Supply Module (RSP) - Replacement Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-27
8.17 Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date - - - - - - 8-28
8.17.1 Mounting/Replacing a Secondary "Patient" Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-29
Chapter 9 – Renewal Parts
9.1 List of Abbreviations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2
9.2 Parts List Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3
9.3 Housing - Mechanical Hardware Parts & Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4
9.4 User Interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9
9.5 Monitor + Monitor Replacement Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-17
9.6 Main Power Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-20
9.7 Main Board Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-20
9.7.1 FrontEnd (US-Part) Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-21
9.7.2 BackEnd (PC-Part) Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-24
9.8 Options and Upgrades - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-28
9.9 Miscellaneous Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-30
9.10 Optional Peripherals and Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-37
9.10.1 Printers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-37
9.10.2 Drives and additional Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-39
9.10.3 Optional Equipment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-42
9.11 System Manuals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-44
9.11.1 System Manuals for EC300 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-44

5539550APB Revision 6 i-vii
Table of Contents

9.12 Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-49
9.12.1 2D-Probes - Curved Array Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-49
9.12.2 2D-Probes - Linear Array Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-51
9.12.3 2D-Probes - Phased Array Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-52
9.12.4 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-53
9.12.5 CW-Doppler - Pencil Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-56
9.13 Biopsy Needle Guides - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-57
Chapter 10 – Care and Maintenance
10.1 Why do Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2
10.1.1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2
10.1.2 Keeping Records - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2
10.1.3 Quality Assurance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2
10.2 Maintenance Task Schedule - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2
10.2.1 How often should Care and Maintenance Tasks be performed? - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2
10.3 Tools required - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-4
10.3.1 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment used for Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-4
10.4 System Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5
10.4.1 Preliminary Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5
10.4.2 Functional Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5
10.4.3 Physical Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-7
10.4.4 Cleaning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-7
10.4.5 Probe Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-8
10.5 Using a Phantom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9
10.6 Electrical Safety Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10
10.6.1 Safety Test Overview - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10
10.6.2 Leakage Current Limits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-11
10.6.3 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-12
10.6.4 Grounding Continuity - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-13
10.6.5 Chassis Leakage Current Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-14
10.6.6 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage-Lead to Ground - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-16
10.6.7 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage-Lead to Lead - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-17
10.6.8 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-18
10.6.9 Probe (Source) Leakage Current Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-19
10.7 When there's too much Leakage Current... - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-23
10.7.1 AC/DC fails - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-23
10.7.2 Chassis fails - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-23
10.7.3 Probe fails - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-23
10.7.4 Peripheral fails - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-23
10.7.5 Still fails - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-23
10.7.6 New Voluson E-Series system - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-23
10.7.7 ECG fails - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-23
10.8 Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-24

i-viii 5539550APB Revision 6
Chapter 1
Introduction
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the Voluson E-
Series (Voluson E6, Voluson E8 and/or Voluson E10) ultrasound system. The
service provider must read and understand all the information presented in this
manual before installing or servicing this system.
Content in this chapter

1.1 Important Precautions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-2
1.2 Legal Notes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-10
1.3 Purpose of this Service Manual - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-11
1.4 Important Conventions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-15
1.5 Safety Considerations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-19
1.6 EMC, EMI and ESD - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-25
1.7 Customer Assistance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1-26
Note Under consideration of general maintenance requirements a minimum lifetime of 7 years for the
equipment and 5 years for the probes may be expected. To maintain the safety and performance of
the ultrasound system, a regular check (once per year) by authorized personnel is recommended.

5539550APB Revision 6 1-1
Introduction
1.1 Important Precautions

Translation Policy

1-2 5539550APB Revision 6
Introduction

Introduction

Introduction

Introduction

Introduction

Introduction

Introduction

Introduction
Damage in transportation
All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In
Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE
representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the
carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and
containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an
inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
Certified electrical contractor statement - For USA only

All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE personnel. In performing all
electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE's electrical
work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE's field engineers, personnel of
third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing
on the equipment.
Omissions & errors

If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the GE
Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG Service Documentation group with specific information listing the system
type, manual title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details.
Mail the information to: GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG

Tiefenbach 15
A-4871 Zipf Austria - Europe
Attn.: "Service Documentation"
GE employees should use the global complaint recording tool to report service documentation issues. These
issues will then be in the internal problem reporting tool and communicated to the writer.
Service safety considerations
Danger
Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death are present in this system. Use extreme caution when
handling, testing and adjusting.
Warning
Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling
pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
1.2 Legal Notes

The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without prior
written permission of General Electric.
GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.
Trademarks
All products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
Copyrights
© 2014 - 2017 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Introduction
1.3 Purpose of this Service Manual

This Service Manual is valid for Voluson E-Series (Voluson E6, Voluson E8 and/or Voluson E10) ultrasound
systems.
Note The Voluson E6 is a “feature-reduced” version of the Voluson E8 ultrasound system. That means not all
options are available on the Voluson E6 (marked with an asterisk * in sections of this manual).
The service manual is divided into 10 chapters. In the beginning of the manual, before chapter 1, you will find
the revision overview and the Table of Contents (TOC).
The language policy for GE’s service documentation, the omission & errors and the legal information are
included in the beginning of this chapter (chapter 1).
Table 1-1 Contents in this service manual
Chapter Number and Title Description
Chapter 1 – Introduction Contains a content summary and warnings.
Chapter 2 – Site Preparation Contains pre-installation requirements.
Chapter 3 – Setup Instructions Contains setup and installation procedures.
Chapter 4 – Functional Checks Contains functional checks that are recommended as part of the
installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance.
Chapter 5 – Components and Functions Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the electronics.
(Theory)
Chapter 6 – Service Adjustments Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments.
Chapter 7 – Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related routines.
Chapter 8 – Replacement Procedures Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all
Field Replaceable Units (FRU) and Customer Replaceable Units (CRU).
Chapter 9 – Renewal Parts Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts.
Chapter 10 – Care and Maintenance Provides periodic maintenance procedures.
The screen graphics and illustrations in this Service Manual are for illustrative purposes only and may be
slightly different from what is displayed on the screen or device.
1.3.1 Typical Users of the "Basic" Service Manual
• GE service personnel (setup, maintenance, etc.)

• Hospital's service personnel
• Architectural planners/installation planners (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Site Preparation)

Introduction
1.3.2 Models covered by this Manual
Table 1-2 Voluson E6 - model designations
Part Number Description BT version
H48691RL Voluson E6 BT15
H48691XH Voluson E6 incl. CW BT15
H48691ZF Voluson E6 BT16
H48701KX Voluson E6 BT17
H48701WB Voluson E6 BT18
H48691RM Voluson E8 BT15
H48691XJ Voluson E8 incl. CW BT15
H48701AY Voluson E8 BT16
H48701JJ Voluson E8 BT17
H48701WA Voluson E8 BT18
H48691RN Voluson E10 BT15
H48691XK Voluson E10 incl. CW BT15
H48701CJ Voluson E10 BT16
H48701GT Voluson E10 BT17
H48701GU Voluson E10 with OLED Monitor BT17
H48701UY Voluson E10 BT18
H48701UZ Voluson E10 with OLED Monitor BT18

Introduction
1.3.3 System History - Hardware and Software Versions
This manual applies to:
Voluson E6 Systems
• with Serial Number E00001 - E03000 (BT15)

• with Software version EC300, Ext.x, 15.x.x (BT15)
• that were upgraded to BT16 (EC310, Ext.x, 16.x.x)
• with Serial Number E06001 - (BT17)
• systems with Serial Number E09001 - (BT18)
• systems with Software version EC330, Ext.x, 18.x.x (BT18)
• systems that were upgraded to BT18 (EC330, Ext.x, 18.x.x)
Voluson E8 Systems

Voluson E10 Systems


Introduction
1.3.3.1 How to identify the Systems

Housing, Console and Monitor are the same. Logos on the Console and on the Monitor screen identify the 3
models Voluson E6, Voluson E8 or Voluson E10.
1.3.4 Purpose of Operator Manual(s)
The operator manuals should be fully read and understood before operating the Voluson E-Series system
and also kept near the system for quick reference.
The online versions of the operator manual is available via the Help function (F1 key) on Voluson E-Series
control console.
The translated online user manuals are available on a CD ROM delivered with the system. They are also
available on OnBase and/or the Common Documentation Library (CDL) for downloading.

Introduction
1.4 Important Conventions
1.4.1 Conventions used in this Manual
MODEL DESIGNATIONS
This manual covers the Voluson E-Series ultrasound systems listed in Models covered by this Manual.
ICONS
Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and conventions
used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.
SAFETY PRECAUTION MESSAGES
Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service information.
The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary message.
Known or potential hazards to personnel are labeled in one of following ways:
• Danger
• Warning
• Caution
1.4.2 Standard Hazard Icons
Important information will usually be preceded by the exclamation point (!) contained within a triangle, as
seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be used to
make you aware of specific types of hazards that could cause harm. Even if a symbol isn't used in this
manual, it is included for your reference.
Danger
Indicates the presence of a hazard that will cause severe personal injury or death if the instructions are
ignored.
Warning
Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause severe personal injury and property damage if instructions
are ignored.
Caution
Indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury and property damage if
instructions are ignored. Equipment damage possible.
Electric Hazard
Indicates the risk of injury from electric hazards.
Bio Hazard
Indicates the risk of disease transmission or infections.
Explosion Hazard
Indicates the risk of injury from explosion hazards.
Moving Hazard
Indicates the risk of injury from moving or tipping hazards.
Mechanical Hazard
Indicates the risk of injury from mechanical/pinch hazards.
Acoustic Output Hazard

Indicates the risk of injury from acoustic output hazards.

Introduction
Laser Radiation Hazard

Indicates the risk of injury from laser radiation.
Non-ionizing Hazard
Indicates the risk of injury from non-ionizing radiation.
Operating LED
Indicates the risk of injury from light beams entering the eye. Do not stare into the light beam of the LED.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Hazard

Describes precautions necessary to avoid static electricity that will or can damage integrated circuits.
This icon is used when options or features are specific for BT-Software versions.
This icon is used for special hints, or tips that may facilitate servicing a Voluson E-Series system.
Note Notes are used to provide important information about an item or a procedure.
Be sure to read the notes; the Information contained in a note can often save you time or effort.
Standard icons that indicate that a special procedure is to be used

Other icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.
Table 1-5 Standard icons that indicates that a special procedure is to be used
Avoid Static Tag and Lock Wear Eye Wear Hand Wear Foot
Electricity Out Protection Protection Protection
1.4.3 Product Labels and Icons
The following table describes the purpose and location of labels, safety icons and other important information
provided on the equipment.
Note For more detailed description of all symbols and labels used in combination with this Voluson E-Series
ultrasound system, refer to Chapter 2 in the Basic User Manual.
Table 1-6 Product Labels and Icons
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION
Manufacturer's name and address

Identification and rear side of the system
Model and Serial numbers
Rating Plate on plug of each probe
Electrical ratings
Identification and Rating Plate

Manufacturer's name and address
(rear side of the system / on plug of each probe)

Date of manufacture

Introduction

Serial number

Brand and model (reference number)
Device Listing /
Laboratory logo or labels denoting conformance with industry
Certification rear side of the system
safety standards such as UL or IEC.
Labels
CE Conformity mark according to Medical Device Directive 93/42/ Identification and Rating Plate
EEC. 0123: Identification number of notified body TÜV Süd
Product Service. (rear side of the system / on plug of each probe)
“Tested and production monitored by TÜV Product Service NRTL

with respect to ELECTRICAL SHOCK, FIRE and MECHANICAL Identification and Rating Plate
HAZARDS only in accordance with UL2601-1 and CAN/CSA (rear side of the system)
C22.2 NO.601.1.”
Type/Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection.
degree of protection provided by enclosure per IEC 60529:

IP Code (IPX 0)
IPX 0 - no protection against ingress of water
IP Code (IPX 1) various
IPX 1 - protected against dripping water
IP Code (IPX 7)
IPX 7 - protected against the effects of immersion
Equipment Type BF (man in box, symbol IEC 60417-5333)

indicates B Type equipment having even more electrical isolation Identification and Rating Plate
than standard Type B equipment because it is intended for (rear side of the system / on plug of each probe)
intimate patient contact.
Defibrillator-proof Type CF equipment (heart in box with paddle,

symbol IEC 60417-5336) identifies a defibrillation-proof type CF front side of the ECG-preamplifier
applied part complying with IEC 60601-1.
"DANGER -
The system is not designed for use with flammable anesthetic
Risk of explosion Indicated in the Service Manual.
gases.
used in ..."
This precaution is intended to prevent injury that may result if one Used in the Service and User Manual which
person attempt to move the system considerable distances or on should be adjacent to equipment at all times for
an incline due to the weight of the system. quick reference.
Pushing prohibited.
Do not lean on the system. Tipping danger. various
Take special care when moving the system.
Loading prohibited.
Do not put any items on this shelf. Danger of breaking. at top cover of the system
Also items might be crushed when lowering the user interface.
“ATTENTION” - Read and understand all instructions for use” This

symbol advises the reader to consult the accompanying rear side of the system
documents (operator manual or other instructions).
Pinch point
Watch your hands and fingers when adjusting the monitor. Keep rear side of the Monitor
hands clear of openings.
This symbol indicates that in the United States of America, federal Identification and Rating Plate
law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician. (rear side of the system)

Introduction
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Disposal. This

symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment
must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be Identification and Rating Plate
collected separately. Please contact an authorized representative (rear side of the system / on plug of each probe)
of the manufacturer for information concerning the
decommissioning of your equipment.

This product consists of devices that may contain mercury, which (rear side of the system)
must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state, or not visible:
country laws. (Within this system, the backlight lamps in the
monitor and the Touch Panel display, contain mercury.) - below the cover on read side of Monitor
- on rear side of the Touch Panel

GOST-R label (Russia Regulatory Country Clearance)
(rear side of the system)
"CAUTION - Consult accompanying documents” This symbol is

used to advise the reader to consult accompanying documents for
various
important safety-related information such as warnings and pre-
cautions that cannot be presented on the device itself.
"CAUTION - Dangerous electric voltage" (lightning flash with

arrowhead) is used to indicate electric shock hazards. Unplug the various
main plug before opening the system!
"Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of the mains power rear of system at mains switch
switch. (on power supply RSP)
"On/Off” or “Standby"
CAUTION: System shutdown using this button DOES NOT ON/OFF Standby button on control console
disconnect the Voluson E-Series from mains voltage!
"Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of the mains power rear of system at mains switch
switch. (on power supply RSP)
"Protective Earth" Indicates the protective earth (grounding) rear of system at mains switch
terminal. (on power supply RSP)
"Equipotential" Indicates the terminal to be used for connecting rear of system at mains switch
equipotential conductors when interconnecting (grounding) with
other equipment. (on power supply RSP)
This symbol indicates that the device is equipped with hardware

rear side of the system
for using Continuous Wave Doppler.
This symbols indicate that the product contains hazardous

materials in excess of the limits established by the Chinese rear side of the system
standard GB/T 26572 Requirements of concentration limits for on the plug of each probe
certain restricted substances in electrical and electronic products.
Every system has a unique marking for identification, the Unique Identification and Rating Plate
Device Identification (UDI) Label. The UDI label consists of a (rear side of the system / on plug of each probe)
series of (alpha-) numeric characters and barcode which uniquely
identify the Voluson E-Series system as a medical device Upgraded systems
manufactured by General Electric. adjacent to the Rating Plate
The Common Mark of Products Circulation certifies that the Identification and Rating Plate
products bearing this mark, passed all conformity assessment
(approval) procedures. (rear side of the system)

Introduction
1.5 Safety Considerations
1.5.1 Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this
equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual,
violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.
1.5.2 Human Safety
• Operating personnel must not remove the system covers.

• Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only.
Only personnel who have participated a Voluson E-Series training are authorized to service the equipment.
Danger
Warning
Do not operate the system in an explosive atmosphere. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an
environment constitutes a definite safety hazard.
Warning
Because of the limited access to cabinets and equipment in the field, placing people in awkward positions,
GE has limited the lifting weight for one person in the field to 16 KG (35 LBS). Anything over 16 KG (35 LBS)
requires 2 people.
Warning
If the covers are removed from an operating Voluson E-Series, some metal surfaces may be warm enough
to pose a potential heat hazard if touched, even while in shutdown mode.
Warning
Do not substitute parts or modify the system. Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, ONLY
install GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG approved parts. DO NOT perform any unauthorized
modification of the system.
Warning: Risk of electrical shock

Beware that the main power supply, extended power shutdown and BackEnd processor may be energized
even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC outlet.
• Ensure that the system is turned off and disconnected from power source.
• Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
The amber light on the control console ON/OFF button will turn off.
Warning
Use extreme caution as long as the Voluson E-Series is un-stable, not resting on all four caster wheels.
Warning
Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling
pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
Warning
Beware of possible sharp edges on all mechanical parts. If sharp edges are encountered, the appropriate
PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.
Warning
Wear all PPE including gloves as indicated in the chemical Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
An optional veterinary/animal use kit is available.

Do not cross-use the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system between human use and veterinary use.

Introduction
1.5.3 Mechanical Safety
Moving the system on plains Moving the system on inclines
Caution
The Voluson E-Series systems weighs 150 kg or more, depending on installed peripherals, (330 lbs., or
more) when ready for use.
Be careful when moving the system. Two people are required when moving the Voluson E-Series on inclines
or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).
• Always lower and center the control console (UI) to its minimum height and lock it in its parking
(locked) position.
• Secure the monitor for transport: Lock the monitor arm and flap down the LCD monitor.
• Use the rear handle to move the system.
• Remove all obstacles.
• Move the system slowly and carefully.
• Avoid collisions with walls or door frames.
• Always place the system on horizontal ground and engage the caster brakes.
• Do not move the system when the brakes are engaged.
• Move the system forward or backward when going up or down inclines. Do not move the system
sideways or diagonally.
Failure to follow the precautions could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage.
Warning
Ultrasound systems and probes are highly sensitive medical instruments that can easily be damaged by
improper handling. Use care when handling and protect from damage also when not in use. Do not use a
damaged or defective ultrasound system or probe. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious
injury and system damage.
Warning
Never use a probe that has fallen to the floor. Even if it looks OK, it may be damaged.
Note Special care should be taken when transporting the system in a vehicle:
• Eject any DVD/CD from the drive.
• Place the probes in their carrying cases.
• DO NOT use the control console as an anchor point.
• Secure the system with straps in an upright position and lock the caster wheels (brake).
• Ensure that the Voluson E-Series system is firmly secured while inside the vehicle.
• Drive cautiously to prevent vibration damage.

Introduction
1.5.4 Electrical Safety
1.5.4.1 Safe Practices

Follow these guidelines to minimize electrical shock hazards whenever using the system:
• To minimize electrical shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground.
• The system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an
approved electrical outlet with safety ground.
• The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.
• Both the system power cable and the power connector must meet international electrical standards.
Warning
Connecting a Voluson E-Series system to the wrong voltage level will most likely destroy it.
1.5.4.2 Probes
All probes for Voluson E-Series systems are designed and manufactured to provide trouble-free, reliable
service. To ensure this, correct handling of probes is important and the following points should be noted:
• Do not drop a probe or strike it against a hard surface, as this may damage the probe elements,
acoustic lens, or housing.
• Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the housing, cable strain relief, lens,
seal, connector pins and locking mechanism.
• Do not use a cracked or damaged probe. In this event, call your field service representative
immediately to obtain a replacement.
• Avoid pulling, pinching or kinking the probe cable, since a damaged cable may compromise the
electrical safety of the probe.
• Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.
• The system has more than one type of probe port. Use the appropriate probe port designed for the
probe you are connecting.
Note For detailed information on handling probes, refer to the Voluson E-Series Basic User Manual and the care
card supplied with the probe.
1.5.5 Auxiliary Devices Safety
Caution
Power supplies for additional equipment MUST comply with IEC 60601-1.
Caution
Do not attempt to use different peripherals and accessories (brand and model; connected via USB port)
other than approved and provided by GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG! The Voluson E-Series
ultrasound system is an extremely sensitive and complex medical system. Any unauthorized peripherals may
cause system failure or damage.
Voluson E-Series systems are equipped with an isolation transformer to provide the required separation from
AC mains for both, the system and the auxiliary devices. One AC mains power outlet is located at the power
supply. It is used for connecting the threefold/fourfold splitter whose outlets are led to the shelves, intend for
auxiliary devices (e.g., printers).
The IEC60601 standard provides a guideline for safely interconnecting medical devices in systems.
“Equipment connected to the analog or digital interface must comply with the respective IEC standards (e.g.
IEC60950 for data processing equipment and IEC60601-1 for medical equipment).
Everybody who connects additional equipment to the signal input portion or signal output portion configures
a medical system, and is therefore responsible that the system complies with the requirements of the system
standard IEC60601.
1. The medical device may be connected to a single IEC XXX device (protection class I) placed in a room
which is not medically used.
2. If the device is to be connected in a medically-used room the following rule applies:

Introduction
- IEC XXX compliant devices (protection class I) may be connected with an additional safety
measure.
- IEC 60601 compliant devices may be connected as such.
For all situations 1 and 2, the additional device shall be installed outside the typical patient environment.
Possible additional safety measures are additional protective earth connection between the 2 devices, or a
safety isolation mains transformer for the other device.
Special care has to be taken, if the device is connected to computer network (e.g., Ethernet), because other
devices could be connected without any control. There could be a potential difference between the protective
earth and any line of the computer network including the shield.
In this case the only way to operate the system safely is to use an isolated signal link with minimum air
clearance and creepage distance of the isolation device in agreement with IEC60601 incl. national
deviations. For computer networks there are media converters available which convert the electrical to
optical signals. Please consider that this converter has to comply with IEC xxx standards* and is battery
operated or connected to the isolation mains output of the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system.
* IEC xxx stands for standards such as:
• IEC60601 for medical devices
• IEC60950 for information technology equipment etc.
Note The system integrator (any person connecting the medical device to other devices) is responsible that
connections are safe. If in doubt, consult the technical service department or your local representative.
Caution
The leakage current of the entire system including any / all auxiliary equipment must not exceed the limit
values as per EN60601-1-1 (IEC60601-1-1) respectively other valid national or international standards. All
equipment must comply with CSA, IEC or other relevant requirements.
Caution
Please observe that some printers may not be medical devices! If Bluetooth-, Line- or Laser Printers are no
medical devices, they have to be located outside of the typical patient environment. Examples for typical
patient environments can be found in standard IEC 60601 (see illustrations below).
Caution
Auxiliary equipment must only be connected with the special main outlet provided for the electrical safety of
the system.
Caution
Auxiliary equipment with direct main connection requires galvanic separation of the signal and/or control
leads.
Note Always observe the instructions given in the manual of the peripheral/auxiliary device.
For hardware installation procedures see: Chapter 3 – Setup Instructions
Warning
After each installation, the leakage currents have to be measured according to IEC 60601-1, IEC 62353 or
other relevant standard.
Note All peripherals mounted on the Voluson E-Series system chassis must be firmly secured in position.

Introduction
1.5.6 Labels Locations
The Voluson E-Series ultrasound system comes equipped with product labels and icons. These labels and
icons represent pertinent information regarding the operation of the system.
Note For description of all symbols and labels used in combination with this Voluson E-Series ultrasound system,
refer to Section 1.4.3 on page 1-16 and Chapter 2 in the Basic User Manual of your system.
1.5.6.1 Identification and Rating Plate

The Identification and Rating Plate is located on the rear of the Voluson E-Series system.
The layout of the Identification and Rating Plate depends on BT-version and/or date of manufacture.
Figure 1-1 Identification and Rating Plate: Examples
1 Manufacturer 7 Frequency 13 Hg label
2 Model Type 8 Safety type: Type BF 14 approx. weight of the system
3 System Voltage range 9 WEEE Disposal Icon 15 EAC label
4 Power Consumption nominal 10 TUEV NRTL Certification mark 16 UDI label (barcode and characters)
5 System Serial Number 11 CE Conformity mark 17 GOST-R label
6 Manufacturing date 12 FDA Guidance 18 Brand and model, BT version
19 Part number
1.5.7 Dangerous Procedure Warnings
Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual.
Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.
Danger
Warning
If the covers are removed from an operating Voluson E-Series, some metal surfaces may be warm enough
to pose a potential heat hazard if touched, even while in shutdown mode.
Warning
Do not operate the system in an explosive atmosphere. Operation of any electrical equipment in such an
environment constitutes a definite safety hazard.
Warning
Do not substitute parts or modify the system. Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, ONLY
install GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG approved parts. DO NOT perform any unauthorized
modification of the system.

Introduction
1.5.8 Lockout/Tagout (LOTO) Requirements
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements (USA) or local Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are
in total control of the AC power plug at all times during the service process.
To apply Lockout/Tagout (LOTO):
1. Plan and prepare for shutdown.
2. Shutdown the equipment.
3. Isolate the equipment.
4. Apply Lockout/Tagout Devices.
5. Control all stored and residual energy.
6. Verify isolation.
All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved.
Warning
Energy Control and Power Lockout for Voluson E-Series:
When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
1. Follow LOTO (Lockout/Tagout) procedures.
2. Turn off the breaker.
3. Unplug the Voluson E-Series system.
4. Maintain control of the Voluson E-Series system power plug.
5. Wait for at least 30 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
Ultrasound system components may be energized.
1.5.9 Returning/Shipping System, Probes and Repair Parts
When returning or shipping the Voluson E-Series system in the original packaging:
• system must be lowered to its minimum height with monitor flapped down
• the control console has to be centered and locked in “unextended” position
Note For control console positioning see Section 6.3 on page 6-4 .
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GE policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GE
employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly
decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids
be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or and ultrasound probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people
who will receive or open this package.
Note The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items what were saturated and/or dripping with
human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care”
are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purpose and must be transported as a hazardous material.
Note The user/service staff should dispose of all the waste properly, per federal, state, and local waste disposal
regulations.
The Voluson E-Series system is not meant to be used for long-term storage of patient data or images. The
user is responsible for the data on the system and a regular backup is highly recommended.
If the system is sent for repair, please ensure that any patient information is backed up and erased from the
system before shipping. It is always possible during system failure and repair to lose patient data. GE is not
responsible for the loss of this data.
If PHI (Patient Healthcare Information) data needs to be sent to GE employees for service purposes, GE will
ascertain agreement from the customer. Patient information shall only be transferred by approved service
processes, tools and devices restricting access, protecting or encrypting data where required, and providing
traceability in the form of paper or electronic documents at each stage of the procedure while maintaining
compliance with cross-border restrictions of patient information transfers.

Introduction
1.6 EMC, EMI and ESD
1.6.1 What is EMC?
Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic

environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other equipment,
power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility results when a
susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or when the device
produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often referred to as radio–
frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through space or conducted over
interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy, EMC also includes possible
effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and disturbances in the electrical power
supply.
For applicable standards please refer to Chapter 2 in the Basic User Manual of the Voluson E-Series
ultrasound system.
1.6.2 Compliance
The Voluson E-Series system conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to
immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line
transient requirements as mentioned in IEC60601-1-2.
Note For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in good
condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all comments noted in this
service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.
1.6.3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention
Warning: DO NOT touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking necessary ESD precautions.
1. When installing boards, ESD may cause damage to a board. ALWAYS connect yourself, via an arm-
wrist strap, to the advised ESD connection point located on the rear of the system (to the right of the
power connector).
2. Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.
Warning: Risk of electrical shock! System must be turned off.

Avoid all contact with electrical contacts, conductors and components.
Always use non-conductive handles designed for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All
parts that have the potential for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making contact.

Introduction
1.7 Customer Assistance
1.7.1 Contact Information
If the system does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the Basic User Manual, or if you require
additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as listed below.
Note Prepare vital system information (see: Section 7.1 on page 7-2 ) before you call:
• System Type
• System Serial number (also visible on label on back of the system)
• Application Software version
• Backup version
• additional information about installed software
Figure 1-2 phone numbers for customer assistance

Introduction
1.7.2 System Manufacturer
Table 1-7 system manufacturer
Manufacturer Telephone FAX
GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG Austria

GmbH & Co OG
Tiefenbach 15 +43 (0) 7682-3800-0 +43 (0) 7682-3800-47
A-4871 Zipf
Austria - Europe

Introduction
This page was intentionally left blank.

Chapter 2
Site Preparation
This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the
installation of a Voluson E-Series system. Included are descriptions of the facility
and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser.

2.1 General Requirements - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-2
2.2 Facility Needs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2-6

Site Preparation
2.1 General Requirements
2.1.1 Environmental requirements
Table 2-1 environmental requirements
Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Heat Dissipation Storage Temperature Storage Humidity
10 to 30°C 30 to 80% rH 2730 BTU/hour -10 to 40°C < 90% rH non-

(50 to 86°F) non-condensing (14 to 104°F) condensing
Caution
If the system has been in storage, has been transported or is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it
has had a chance to acclimate to its operating environment. (see: Section 3.1.2 "Installation Warnings" on
page 3-2 ).
2.1.1.1 Cooling
The cooling requirement for a Voluson E-Series system is 2730 BTU/hour. This figure does not include
cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room.
Note Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/hr demand on the cooling system.
2.1.1.2 Lighting
Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient comfort
may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting system (dim/
bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source of EMI which
could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible interference.
2.1.2 Electrical Requirements
Note GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of
its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the
system.
The Ultrasound will function on voltages from 100-240 Volts and 50 or 60 Hz. However, if using 220 volt
power in North America, then a center tapped power source is required.
Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size
ground wire from the distribution panel to the ultrasound outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral:
The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size
ground wire from the distribution panel to the ultrasound outlet.
Note Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's
incoming power source to the ultrasound system is only a conduit.
2.1.2.1 Voluson Power Requirements Voluson E-Series

Table 2-2 electrical specifications for Voluson E-Series
Voltage Tolerances Power Consumption Frequency
100 - 240 VAC ±10% 800 VA 50, 60 Hz (±2%)
AC mains power outlets (AUX) for auxiliary devices and peripherals are co-switched by the systems mains
switch. Output voltage for AUX: 115V
Caution
The maximum power consumption of equipment (inclusive color LCD monitor) connected to these outlets
must not exceed 200VA!

Site Preparation
2.1.2.2 Inrush Current

Inrush current is not a factor to consider due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power supplies.
2.1.2.3 Site Circuit Breaker

It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the system be readily accessible.
Caution: Power outage may occur.

Voluson E-Series requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and possible loss of
critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment operating on the same circuit.
2.1.2.4 Site Power Outlets

A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the system without extension cords. Other outlets
adequate for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this system must also
be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the system. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and
national electrical codes.
2.1.2.5 System Power Plug

If the Voluson E-Series arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE
dealer or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required.
2.1.3 EMI Limitations
Ultrasound systems are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic
fields, and transients in the air or wiring. They also generate EMI. The Voluson E-Series system complies
with limits as stated on the EMC label. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
Note Possible EMI sources should be identified before the system is installed.
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. Sources of
EMI include the following:
• medical lasers
• scanners
• cauterizing guns
• computers
• monitors
• fans
• gel warmers
• microwave oven
• light dimmers
• mobile phones
• in-house wireless phones (DECT phones)
• wireless computer keyboard and mouse
• air conditioning system
• High Frequency (HF) surgery equipment
• general AC/DC adapters
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.

Site Preparation
Table 2-3 EMI prevention/abatement
EMI Rule Details
Be aware of Radio Keep the system at least 5 meters (15 feet) away from other EMI sources. Special shielding may be
Frequency sources. required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video
broadcast signals.
Ground the system. Poor grounding is the most likely reason a system will have noisy images. Check grounding of the
power cord and power outlet.
Assemble all screws, Radio After you finish repairing or updating the system, assemble all covers and tighten all screws. Any
Frequency gaskets, covers cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. Install all covers. Loose or
and cores. missing covers or Radio Frequency gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound
signals.
Replace broken Radio If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an Radio Frequency gasket are broken, replace the
Frequency gaskets. gasket. Do not turn ON the system until any loose metallic part is removed.
Do not place labels where Never place a label where Radio Frequency gaskets meet the system. Otherwise, the gap created
Radio Frequency gaskets will permit Radio Frequency leakage. In case a label has been found in such a position, move it to
touch metal. another more suitable location.
Use GE- specified harnesses The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, cable
and peripherals. length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified.
Take care with cellular Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could causes image artifacts.
phones.
Properly route peripheral Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card rack or hang out of the peripheral bays. Loop the
cables. excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables to the
frame.
2.1.4 Environmental Requirements for Probes
Probes can be used in clinical environment.

Ensure that the probe face temperature does not exceed the normal operation temperature range.
Probes must be operated, stored, or transported within the parameters outlined below.
Operational Storage Transport
+18º to +30º C -10º to +50º C -10º to +50º C

Temperature
(+64.4°F to +86°F) (+14°F to +122°F) (+14°F to +122°F)
30% to 75% RH non- 10% to 85% RH non- 10% to 85% RH non-

Humidity
condensing condensing condensing
700hPa (3000m) to 700hPa (3000m) to 700hPa (3000m) to

Pressure
1060hPa 1060hPa 1060hPa
2.1.5 Time and Manpower Requirements
Site preparation takes time. Begin site preparation checks as soon as possible. If possible, six weeks before
delivery, to allow enough time to make any changes.
Warning
Have two people available to deliver and unpack the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system.
Attempts to move the system considerable distances (or on an incline) by one person alone, could result in
personal injury and/or damage to the system.

Site Preparation
2.1.6 System Specifications
2.1.6.1 Physical Dimensions of Voluson E-Series

Physical dimensions and weight (without peripherals) of the Voluson E-Series system are summarized in
Table 2-4.
Note Physical dimensions (especially height and depth) depend on control console and monitor positioning.
For more details see Section 5.10.3 "Control Console Positioning" on page 5-46 .
Table 2-4 physical dimensions and weight (without monitor and peripherals)
Height Width Depth Weight
1533 mm / 60.4 inch * 582 mm / 22.9 inch 1168 mm / 46.0 inch * 150 kg / 330 lbs.
1333 mm / 52.5 inch ** 968 mm / 38.1 inch **
* maximum at “normal” monitor position (control console is lifted and moved forwards to the maximum)
** minimum at “normal” monitor position (no control console lifted or forwards movement)
2.1.6.2 Acoustic Noise Output

max. 60 dB(A)
2.1.6.3 Electrical Specifications

Refer to: Section 2.1.2.1 "Voluson Power Requirements Voluson E-Series" on page 2-2 .

Site Preparation
2.2 Facility Needs
2.2.1 Purchaser Responsibilities
The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay, confusion,
and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre-installation work before delivery.
Use the Pre-installation checklist (provided in Table 2-5) to verify that all needed steps have been taken.
Table 2-5 Voluson E-Series pre-installation checklist
Action Yes No
Schedule at least 3 hours for installation of the system.
Notify installation team of the existence of any variances from the basic installation.
Make sure system and probes have been subject to acclimation period.
Environmental cooling is sufficient.
Lighting is adjustable to adapt to varying operational conditions of the system.
Electrical facilities meet system requirements.
EMI precautions have been taken and all possible sources of interference have been removed.
Mandatory site requirements have been met.
If a network is used, IP address has been set for the system and a dedicated network outlet is available.
Purchaser responsibility includes:

• Procuring the materials required.
• Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system.
• Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.
Note All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the
equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of
electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The products
involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering
competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of
applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform
electrical servicing on the equipment.
The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further from the
system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid delays during
installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing the installation at
the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).
The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended because it
collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference) should also be
investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.

Site Preparation
2.2.2 Required Facility Needs
• dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage (see: Table 2-2 on page 2-2 ), meeting all
local and national codes, which is located less than 2.5 m (8.2 ft. / 98.4 in.) from the system's proposed
location.; see Section 2.1.2 "Electrical Requirements" on page 2-2 .
• door opening is at least 76 cm (2.5 ft./ 30 in.) wide
• proposed location for the system is at least 0.5 m (1.6 ft. / 19.6 in.) from the wall for cooling
• power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft. / 78.7 in.) of each other with
peripheral within 1 m of the system to connect cables.
• power outlets for other medical equipment
• power outlets for test equipment within 1 m (3.2 ft. / 39.4 in.) of system
• clean and protected space to store probes (in their cases or on a rack)
• material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal)
Note The Voluson E-Series has four outlets inside. One for the monitor and three for on board peripherals.
In case of network option:
• An active network outlet in the vicinity of the ultrasound system.
• A network cable of appropriate length (regular Pin-to-Pin network cable).
• An IT administrator who will assist in configuring the system to work with your local network. A fixed IP
address is required. Refer to the form provided in Figure 3-65 for network details that are required.
Note All relevant preliminary network port installations at the prepared site must be performed by authorized
contractors. The purchaser of GE equipment must utilize only qualified personnel to perform servicing on the
equipment.
Figure 2-1 recommended Floor Plan 4.3 m x 5.2 m (14 by 17 foot)
1 door – at least 76 cm (2.5 foot / 30 inches) 8 stool
2 film viewer 9 ultrasound system
3 counter top, sink with hot and cold water, supplies storage 10 external peripherals
4 linen supply 11 dedicated power outlet - circuit breaker protected and

easily accessible
5 probes/supplies 12 network interface
6 examination table 13 distance from wall or objects
7 footswitch 14 cabinet for software and manuals

Site Preparation
2.2.3 Desirable Features
• door is at least 92 cm (3 ft. / 36 in.) wide

• circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible
• sink with hot and cold water
• receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths
• emergency oxygen supply
• storage for linens and equipment
• nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room
• dual level lighting (bright and dim)
• lockable cabinet for software and manuals
2.2.4 Network Setup Requirements
2.2.4.1 Stand-alone System (without Network Connection)

None
2.2.4.2 System connected to Hospital's Network

Supported networks:
• Ethernet network connection
• Wireless LAN (option)
2.2.4.3 Purpose of the DICOM Network Function

1
DICOM® (Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine) services provide the operator with clinically
useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM
services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers.
As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals,
enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and
retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost.
2.2.4.4 DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements

To configure the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system to work with other network connections, the network
administrator must provide some necessary information.
Use the Figure 3-64 on page 3-73 to record required information that must include:
• Voluson E-Series Details: DICOM network details for the Voluson E-Series system, including the
host name, local port, IP address, AE title and net mask.
• Routing Information: IP addresses for default gateway and other routers in use at site.
• DICOM Application Details of DICOM devices in use at the site, including the DICOM host
Information: name, AE title, DICOM port number and IP addresses.
Note For further details refer to the Voluson E-Series Basic User Manual.
1 DICOM is the registered trademark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association for its standards publications relating to digital communications
of medical information.

Chapter 3
Setup Instructions
This chapter contains information needed to setup the Voluson E-Series

ultrasound system. Included are procedures to receive, unpack and configure the
equipment. A worksheet is provided (see: Section 3.14 on page 3-73 ) to help
ensure that all the required information is available, prior to setup the system.

3.1 Setup Reminders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-2
3.2 Receiving and Unpacking the System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-5
3.3 Preparing for Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-7
3.4 Completing the Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-9
3.5 Connection of Auxiliary Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14
3.6 Printer Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.7 System Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-42
3.8 On-board optional Peripherals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-49
3.9 External I/O Connectors - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-50
3.10 Available Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-54
3.11 Software/Option Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-54
3.12 Connectivity Setup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-55
3.13 Network Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-57
3.14 Connectivity Setup Worksheet - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-73
3.15 Paperwork - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-75

Setup Instructions
3.1 Setup Reminders
3.1.1 Average Installation Time
Once the site has been prepared, the average installation time required is shown in Table 3-1 below.
Table 3-1 average installation time
Description Average Installation Time Comments
Unpacking the system 0.5 hours
Installing the system / options / printers 0.5 to 1.5 hours depends on required configuration
DICOM Option (connectivity) 0.5 to 1.5 hours depends on configuration amount
Install InSite 0.5 hours
3.1.2 Installation Warnings
Caution
Since the Voluson E-Series weighs approximately 150 kg (330 lbs.) without peripherals, two people are
required to unpack it.
Warning
There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or panels.
Should problems or malfunctions occur, unplug the power cord.
Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting.
3.1.2.1 Moving/Lifting the System

Note For important safety considerations see Section 1.5.3 "Mechanical Safety" on page 1-20 .
How to lift the system:

1 Preparation
• Disconnect all probes and transport them separately.
• Disconnect the ECG cable (if applicable) and transport it separately.
• Ensure all peripheral devices (printer, ...) are firmly fixed within the system.
2 Remove the footrest/wheel axis cover on the front side of the system: Turn the 4 quick release devices below the footrest 90°
(see: Figure 8-21 on page 8-17 ).
3 Pass a strap through the openings in the metal sheet.
4 Lift the system by the straps and the rear handle.
Caution
• Do not pull or lift the system with the front handle of the user interface (control console).
• Always use a strap to lift the system. Do not grasp the metal sheet with your hands.
• Move the system forward or backward when going up or down inclines. Do not move the system
sideways or diagonally.

Setup Instructions
3.1.2.2 System Acclimation Time

After being transported, the Voluson E-Series system may be very cold or hot. It requires one hour for each
2.5°C increment if it's temperature is below 10°C or above 40°C.
Caution
Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site may cause the
system to be damaged.
Table 3-2 Acclimation Time
°C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
°F 140 131 122 113 104 96 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40
hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
3.1.2.3 Control Console Positioning

If weight is placed on the control console (UI) in it's extended position the system could tip over.
Caution
The system should not be moved with the control console (UI) extended. Move the control console to it's
centered and locked position for transport.
Caution
Monitor mounting mechanism may break if not properly supported (e.g., with packing foam) during
transportation.
3.1.2.4 Brake Pedal Operation

Caution
If the wheel brakes are engaged, release brake pedals (brakes on wheels under the foot rest) to disengage
the lock, for transportation.

Setup Instructions
3.1.3 Safety Reminders
Danger
When using any test instrument that is capable of opening the AC ground line (i.e., meter's ground switch is
OPEN), DO NOT touch the system!
Caution
To prevent electrical shock, connect the system to a properly grounded power outlet. DO NOT use a three to
two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.
Caution
When connecting the optional PE (potential equalization) and/or the optional additional GND (ground cable)
it is mandatory to also use the Power Filter (H48701EL).
Caution: The Voluson E-Series requires all covers!

Do not operate this system unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place, to ensure optimal
system performance and cooling. (When covers are removed, EMI may be present).
Caution
Two people should unpack the system because of its weight. Two people are required whenever a part
weighing 16kg (35 lb.) or more must be lifted.
Caution:
Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is present.
Caution
If the system is very cold or hot, do NOT turn on its power until it has had sufficient time to acclimate to its
operating environment.
Caution: Operator Manual(s)

The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the Voluson E-Series. Keep
manuals near the system for reference.
Caution: Acoustic Output hazard

Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system is within FDA
limitations, avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage.
Table 3-3 Environmental Labels

Setup Instructions
3.2 Receiving and Unpacking the System

Note Please read this section carefully before unpacking the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system and its
(optional) peripherals.
The Voluson E-Series ultrasound system, together with peripherals, probes and accessories are shipped
from the factory in a single durable shipping cardboard which is mounted on a raised wooden platform base.
Caution
Transport only with forklift or stacker truck. During transport pay attention to the point of gravity (“tilt and
drop” indicator)!
Warning
Have two people available to deliver and unpack the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system.
Attempts to move the system considerable distances (or on an incline) by one person alone, could result in
personal injury and/or damage to the system.
Table 3-4 shipping cardboard -dimensions and weight
Description Height Width Depth Weight*
Voluson E-Series incl. peripherals 1369 mm / 54 inch 780 mm / 30.7 inch 1086 mm / 42.8 inch 190 kg / 419 lbs.
and accessories
* Weight is approximate and will vary depending upon the supplied peripherals
Before unpacking the system
• Inspect the cardboard for visible damage.

• Inspect the drop and tilt indicator (1) for evidence of accidental shock or tilting during transit.
The tilt indicator must not turn red.
• Verify delivery address and remove the packing slip and invoice from the envelope (2) that is located
on the front panel of the cardboard.
• Remove the unpacking instruction (3) that is located on the side panel of the cardboard.
Figure 3-1 shipping cardboard

Setup Instructions
Note The device must only be transported in the original packaging cardboard!
It is recommended to keep and store the shipping cardboard and all other packing materials (including the
support foams, anti-static plastic cover, etc.), in case the system has to be moved to a different location.
Unpack the system such a way that packaging can be reused. For warranty purposes, storage of the above
is required for one year from date of purchase.
Note If the shipping cardboard is damaged, please inform the GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG sales
representative immediately.
Unpacking procedure
Unpack the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system and its (optional) peripherals and accessories according to
the provided unpacking instruction.

Setup Instructions
3.3 Preparing for Setup
3.3.1 Verify Customer Order
1. After unpacking, it is important to verify that all items ordered by the customer have been received.
Compare all items listed on the packing slip (delivery note) with those received.
Note It is recommended to keep and store the shipping cardboard and all other packing materials (including the
support foams, anti-static plastic cover, etc.), in case the system has to be moved to a different location.
Unpack the system such a way that packaging can be reused. For warranty purposes, storage of the above
is required for one year from date of purchase.
2. Visually inspect the system components using the following checklist.
Table 3-5 Damage Inspection Checklist - Voluson E-Series system
✓ Step Item Recommended Procedure
1 Rating Plate Enter Serial Number: _________________________ (printed on rating plate, see: Figure 1-1 on page 1-23 )
2 System Verify that the Voluson E-Series system is switched OFF and unplugged. Clean the system.
3 Control Physically inspect the control console for missing or damaged items. After switching on the system, verify
Console the proper illumination of all the control console buttons.
4 Probes Check all probes for wear and tear on the lens, cable, and connector. Look for bent or damaged pins on
the connector and in the connector socket on the system. Verify that the EMI fingers around the probe
connector socket housing are intact. Check the probe locking mechanism and probe switch.
5 LCD Display Clean the LCD display by gently wiping with a dry, soft, lint-free non-abrasive folded cloth. Inspect the
monitor for scratches and raster burn.
6 Fans Verify that the system's cooling fans and peripheral fans are operating.
7 Rear Panel Check the rear panel connectors for bent pins, loose connections and loose or missing hardware. Screw
all the cable connectors tightly to the connector sockets on the panel. Verify that the labeling is in good
condition.
8 Covers Check that all screws are tightly secured in place, that there are no dents or scratches and that no internal
parts are exposed.
9 Peripherals Check and clean the peripherals in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. To prevent EMI or
system overheating, dress the peripheral cables inside the peripheral cover.
10 Power Cord Check the power cord for cuts, loose hardware, tire marks, exposed insulation, or any deterioration. Verify
continuity. Replace the power cord, as required.
Note Report any items that are missing, back-ordered, or damaged, to your GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co
OG sales representative. The contact address is shown in "Contact Information" on page 1-26 .

Setup Instructions
3.3.2 EMI Protection
This system has been designed to minimize the effects of Electo-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the
covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this
interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before
the system is put into operation.
Ensure that the system is protected from electromagnetic interference (EMI), as follows:
• Operate the system at least 15 feet away from equipment that emits strong electromagnetic radiation.
• Operate the system in an area enclosed by walls, floors and ceilings comprised of wood, plaster or
concrete, which help prevent EMI.
• Shield the system when operating it in the vicinity of radio broadcast equipment, if necessary.
• Do not operate mobile phones or other EMI emitting devices in the ultrasound room.
• Verify that all EMI rules listed are followed.
The Voluson E-Series system is approved for use in hospitals, clinics and other environmentally qualified
facilities, in terms of the prevention of radio wave interference. Operation of the ultrasound system in an
inappropriate environment can cause electronic interference to radios and television sets situated near the
medical equipment.
For further details and EMI Prevention/Abatement refer to Section 2.1.3 "EMI Limitations" on page 2-3 .

Setup Instructions
3.4 Completing the Setup

Connecting the System to a Power Source
Caution
Prior to connecting the Voluson E-Series system to a power source, verify compliance with all electrical and
safety requirements. Check the power cord to verify that it is intact and of hospital-grade. Products equipped
with a power source (wall outlet) plug should be connected to the fixed power socket that has a protective
grounding conductor. Never use an adapter or converter to connect with a power source plug (for example, a
three-prong to two-prong converter).
Warning
The system's power must be supplied from a separate, properly rated outlet to avoid risk of fire. Refer to
Section 2.1.2.1 "Voluson Power Requirements Voluson E-Series" on page 2-2 for rating information. The
power cord should not, under any circumstances, be altered to a configuration rated less than that specified
for the current.
Note Use only the power cords, cables and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare Austria GmbH &
Co OG to connect the system to the power source.
Caution
Whenever disconnecting the Voluson E-Series system from the electrical outlet, always observe the safety
precautions. First unplug the main power cable from the wall outlet socket, then from the system itself.
Remove by pulling on the cable connector - Do not pull on the cable.
Caution: The Voluson E-Series requires all covers!

Do not operate this system unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place, to ensure optimal
system performance and cooling. (When covers are removed, EMI may be present).
3.4.1 Power On / Boot Up
System Power On / BackEnd Processor Boot Up

1. Connect the main power cable to the back of the system.
2. If not already done, screw on the pull-out protection of the mains power cable with the 2 screws.
3. Connect the main power cable to a hospital grade power outlet with the proper rated voltage. Never
use an adapter that would defeat the safety ground.
4. Switch ON the circuit breaker at the rear of the system.
1 circuit breaker
2 fuses (2x T10A H/250V)
3 connector for main power cable
Figure 3-2 Circuit Breaker at rear of system
Note When AC power is applied to the system, the ON/OFF standby button on the control console illuminates
amber, indicating that the system (including the Back-end Processor) is in standby mode.

Setup Instructions
5. Hold down the ON/OFF standby button (see: Figure 3-3 below) on the control console for ~3 seconds.
Note The mains outlet of the system for peripheral auxiliary equipment are commonly switched with the ON/OFF
standby button. The power switch of any attached printer(s) needs to be in ON position before starting the
system. However, be aware some auxiliary equipment may switch itself to standby mode (e.g., Color video
printer) and must therefore be switched on separately.
When the ON/OFF standby button on the control console is pressed, the system (including the Back-
end Processor) starts and the operating system is loaded which then leads to activate the application
software.
The system automatically performs an initialization sequence which includes the following:
- Loading the operating system.
- Running a quick diagnostic check of the system.
- Detecting connected probes
Figure 3-3 ON/OFF standby button

As soon as the software has been loaded, the system enters 2D-Mode with the probe and application
that were used before the system shutdown.
Note Total time used for start-up is about 2 minutes.

6. Adjust height and position of the control console as described in Section 6.3 "Control Console
Positioning" on page 6-4 .

Setup Instructions
3.4.1.1 During a normal boot, you may observe

1. Power is distributed to peripherals, control console, monitor, FrontEnd and BackEnd processor.
2. The BackEnd processor and rest of the system starts with the sequence listed in following steps:
a. First of all, the BIOS version is shown on the monitor.
b. Afterward the “Boot Screen” is displayed. (Voluson is highlighted).
Figure 3-4 Boot screen
3. BackEnd processor is turned ON and starts to load the software.

4. The start screen is displayed on the monitor.
5. Start-up progress bars indicating software loading procedures, are displayed on the monitor.
Figure 3-5 start-up screen
6. The software initiates and sets up the FrontEnd electronics and the rest of the system (incl. clicking
sound of relays on RTF board).
7. The keyboard backlight is lit.
8. As soon as the software has been loaded, the 2D screen is displayed on the monitor.
EC320/EC330 (BT17/BT18) only:

1. If patient data stored on the internal HDDs D:\ partition are encrypted (protected), the system has to be
unlocked by Password, Recovery key or USB device with unlock key.
For further details refer to Section 3.7.1.13.2 "Unlock an encrypted Disk" on page 3-47 .
2. If Activate User Login is check marked in the Setup - General Settings - Authentication page, a system
login window appears. Please enter the proper User Name and Password and then click Login.

Setup Instructions
3.4.2 Power Off / Shutdown
Note After turning off a system, wait at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to
boot if power is recycled too quickly.
1. If not already in read mode, freeze the image.
2. Press the ON/OFF Standby button on the control console. Following dialog appears.
Figure 3-6 Shutdown dialog
3. Select Shutdown. The system performs an automatic full shutdown sequence.

4. Switch OFF the circuit breaker at the rear of the system.
Note A full shutdown is also performed when pressing the ON/OFF standby button on the control console twice.
standby button. So the auxiliary equipment need not to be switched ON/OFF separately.
Warning
Disconnection of the main power cable is necessary!
5. After complete power down, unscrew the 2 screws and remove the pull-out protection to disconnect the
main power cable from the system or unplug it from the AC wall outlet socket.
1 circuit breaker
6. Press on the brakes to block the front caster wheels.

7. Disconnect probes. (Turn the probe locking handle counterclockwise and then pull the connector
straight out of the probe port.)
Caution
Do not disconnect a probe while running (Live Scan “Write” mode)! A software error may occur. In this case
switch the system OFF (perform a reset).

Setup Instructions
3.4.3 Probe Connection
Note When the probe is connected, it is automatically activated. Once connected, probes can be selected for
different applications.
Connect a probe to one of the three rightmost probe receptacle as follows:
1. Inspect the probe and probe socket to verify that it is free of debris.
2. Ensure that the probe locking lever is at horizontal position.
3. Insert the connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle mating surface.
4. Twist the probe locking lever clockwise (to vertical position) to lock it in place.
5. Open the side door, lay the cable into the intended cable holder and close the door.
6. Carefully position the probe cord so that it is free to move and is not resting on the floor.
Figure 3-8 probe connection
1 probe unlocked (locking lever is in horizontal position)
2 probe locked (locking lever is in vertical position)
Caution
• Do not bend the probe cable acutely. Fault conditions can result in electric shock hazard.
• Do not touch the surface of probe connectors which are exposed when the probe is removed.
• Do not touch the patient when connecting or disconnecting a probe.
Note Prior to connecting or disconnecting a probe, freeze the image. It is not necessary to turn OFF power to
connect or disconnect a probe.

Setup Instructions
3.5 Connection of Auxiliary Devices

Content in this section
3.5.1 Connecting the LCD Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-15
3.5.2 Connecting the OLED Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-16
3.5.3 Connecting the Black & White Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-17
3.5.4 Connecting the Color Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-19
3.5.5 Connecting the Network Color Laser Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-21
3.5.6 Connecting the DeskJet Color Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-24
3.5.7 Connecting the Cellular Modem - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-26
3.5.8 Connecting the Wireless Network Adapter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-28
3.5.9 Connecting a Secondary "Patient" Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-29
3.5.10 Connecting the Footswitch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-31
3.5.11 Connecting the Barcode Scanner - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-32
3.5.12 Connecting the ECG-preamplifier - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-33
3.5.13 Connecting an USB Flash Memory Stick - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-34
3.5.14 Connecting an external USB Hard disk - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-34
3.5.15 General Remarks when using external USB-Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-35
Note Always observe the instructions given in the manual of the peripheral/auxiliary device.
Warning
Caution
Please observe that some printers may not be medical devices! If Bluetooth-, Line- or Laser Printers are no
medical devices, they have to be located outside of the typical patient environment. Examples for typical
patient environments can be found in standard IEC 60601 (see illustrations below).
Note For more detailed Safety Considerations when connecting auxiliary devices to the Voluson E-Series system,
please review: Section 1.5.5 "Auxiliary Devices Safety" on page 1-21 .

Setup Instructions
3.5.1 Connecting the LCD Monitor
Note The LCD Monitor comes pre-installed with the system.
Figure 3-9 Connection Scheme - LCD Monitor

Setup Instructions
3.5.2 Connecting the OLED Monitor
Note The OLED Monitor is only available for BT17 (EC320) and BT18 (EC330) Voluson E10 systems. Usually it
comes pre-installed with the system.
Figure 3-10 Connection Scheme - OLED Monitor

Setup Instructions
3.5.3 Connecting the Black & White Printer
1. Power Off/Shutdown the system as described in Section 4.2.2 on page 4-4 .

2. If your printer is UP-D898MD:
2
a. Connect your printer to any power source.

Note: If you connect the printer directly to an AC mains power outlet for auxiliary devices
(provided by the Voluson E-Series system), DO NOT yet connect the USB cable!
b. Press the Power ON button (1) on the printer.
c. Enter the Menu by pushing the Joystick key (2).
d. Display "Digital" by shifting the Joystick key up or down.
e. Push the Joystick key to enter the sub menu.
f. Display "Driver" by shifting up or down.
g. Push the Joystick key to enter the sub menu.
h. Display "DRV:897" by shifting up or down.
i. Push the Joystick key again to confirm selection. The printer is now set-up with the driver of UP-
D897.
j. Proceed installation procedure as described below.
3. Connect the Black & White printer according to connection scheme, see: Figure 3-11 on page 3-18 .
4. When all cables are connected, press the Power ON button on the printer.
5. Power ON/Boot up the Voluson E-Series system as described in Section 3.4.1 on page 3-9 .
All software drivers are pre-installed for the designated printer only.
6. After physical connection to the Voluson E-Series system, assign the printer to a remote key (P1, P2,
P3, P4, P5 and/or P6) as described in Section 3.6.6 "Remote Control Selection" on page 3-41 .
7. Verify correct printer settings; see Section 3.6.5 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-38 .
Note The B&W printer should be connected to USB port C on the RTB Distribution Board Bottom.
Warning
2 The UP-D898MD features a legacy mode driver mode. In this mode the printer identifies itself as UP-D897 via the USB interface. This enables
the use of the printer with the driver of UP-D897. Through this feature the new medical printer UP-D898MD can be used to easily replace an
existing UP-D897 unit in the field.

Setup Instructions
3.5.3.1 Connection Scheme: B&W Printer
Figure 3-11 Connection Scheme - B&W Printer

Setup Instructions
3.5.4 Connecting the Color Printer

2. Connect the Color printer according to connection scheme, see: Figure 3-12 on page 3-20 .
Note The Color printer should be connected to USB port D on the RTB Distribution Board Bottom.
Warning

Setup Instructions
3.5.4.1 Connection Scheme: Color Printer
Figure 3-12 Connection Scheme - Color Printer

Setup Instructions
3.5.5 Connecting the Network Color Laser Printer
Caution
Please observe that the complete Printer Assembly has to be located outside of the patient environment
(according to IEC 60601-1).
Caution
The printer being used may not be a medical device. The (Bluetooth) Printer Set and the Power Supply is
also not a medical device. The equipment meets the requirements of the EN 60950 Standard.
Note It does not matter, whether an Ethernet crossover cable or a patch cable (straight through cable) is used.
The Network Color Laser Printer automatically reconfigures signals to yield expected results.
Note The Network Color Laser printer MUST NOT be installed by the user! For installation please contact your
local distributor or GE service representative.
Connection directly to the Voluson E-Series

Physical connection:
1. Connect the Color Laser Printer.
- Connect the network cable to the Ethernet LAN connector on the Voluson E-Series system. The
other end connect to the Ethernet connector of the Color Laser Printer.
- Connect the power cable of the printer to an external, non-isolated power source.
Figure 3-13 Connection Scheme - Color Laser Printer (directly via network cable)

Setup Instructions
Connection to work within the Network Environment

The Color Laser Printer can be connected to work within the network environment. Usually this will be the
hospital network.
Two network cables are needed.
1. Connect the Color Laser Printer.
- Connect the first network cable to the Ethernet LAN connector on the Voluson E-Series system.
The other end connect to a hospital network wall outlet.
- Connect the second network cable to the Ethernet connector of the Color Laser Printer. The other
end connect to a hospital network wall outlet.
- Connect the power cable of the printer to an external, non-isolated power source.
Figure 3-14 Connection Scheme - Color Laser Printer (within Network Environment)

Setup Instructions
Connection for Wi-Fi Direct Communication

Note Wi-Fi Direct Communication is only possible with printer type HP LaserJet M452nw, see Table 9-10.
A WLAN network adapter is required.
1. Connect the power cable of the printer to an external, non-isolated power source.
2. Plug the proper WLAN adapter into an accessible USB port of the Voluson E-Series system.
Figure 3-15 Connection Scheme - Color Laser Printer (Wi-Fi Direct Communication)

Setup Instructions
3.5.6 Connecting the DeskJet Color Printer
Caution
Please observe that the complete Printer Assembly has to be located outside of the patient environment
(according to IEC 60601-1).
Caution
The printer being used may not be a medical device. The (Bluetooth) Printer Set and the Power Supply is
also not a medical device. The equipment meets the requirements of the EN 60950 Standard.
Connection via Bluetooth Adapter

The DeskJet Color Printer can be connected to an external, non-isolated power source. The Bluetooth
Adapter should be directly connected to any accessible USB port.
Note Please use the proper Bluetooth Printer Connection set; see: Section 9.10.1 "Printers" on page 9-37 .
Figure 3-16 Connection Scheme - DeskJet Color Printer (via Bluetooth Adapter)

Setup Instructions
Connection directly to the Voluson E-Series

The DeskJet Color Printer can be directly connected to any accessible USB port or the indicated USB port E
on the RTB Distribution Board Bottom via an USB cable.
Note If a DeskJet printer (e.g., HP Officejet 100) is connected directly via an USB-cable, use the AC mains power
outlet provided by the Voluson E-Series system (auxiliary output). This ensures medical grade separation
from AC mains.
Figure 3-17 Connection Scheme - DeskJet Color Printer (directly via USB cable)

Setup Instructions
3.5.7 Connecting the Cellular Modem

2. Insert a Standard SIM card from your local provider.
a. Slide up the upper cover of the Cellular Modem Module to get access to the SIM card holder.
Figure 3-18 open the Cellular Modem cover
b. Insert the SIM card (see images below), fix it with the mounted clips and return the upper cover.
Figure 3-19 insert SIM card
SIM card requirements:

- Data capable
- Standard size
- prepaid or post paid
Note Since the Voluson E-Series does not enable browser access, the service provider needs to enable the
Internet access on the SIM card before installation in the Cellular Modem. Please ensure from the service
provider, that there is no browser registration necessary when using the SIM card.
3. Connect the Cellular Modem according to connection scheme, see: Figure 3-20 on page 3-27 .
5. After physical connection of the Cellular Modem to the Voluson E-Series system, perform Modem
Configuration as described in Section 3.13.3 "How to Setup the Cellular Modem" on page 3-64 .
6. Click the signal strength icon in the status bar and select Connect for connection to the service
provider.
7. If it is desired to send E-mails, perform configuration as described in Section 3.13.4 on page 3-66 .
8. If it is desired to use also MMS, adjust settings as described in Section 3.13.5 on page 3-67 .
9. Assign the Modem to a remote key (P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 and/or P6) as described in Section 3.6.6
"Remote Control Selection" on page 3-41 and adjust the Email settings.
10. Individually enter Patient's Email address and Phone number in the PID screen and adjust Email
and/or MMS options as described in Section 3.13.6 on page 3-68 .
Note The Cellular Modem should be connected to the USB port B on the RTB Distribution Board Bottom.
Warning

Setup Instructions
3.5.7.1 Connection Scheme: Cellular Modem
Figure 3-20 Connection Scheme - Cellular Modem
Note Connection is always the same (no differences between PC-Motherboard version of the Voluson E-Series
system).

Setup Instructions
3.5.8 Connecting the Wireless Network Adapter
1. Turn ON the power of the system and wait till the system has booted.
2. Plug the Wireless Network adapter into an accessible USB port of the Voluson E-Series. All software
drivers are pre-installed for the designated Wireless Network adapter only.
The Wireless Network Adapter can be connected to any accessible USB port.
Figure 3-21 Connection Scheme - Wireless (USB) Network Adapter
system).
Note After physical connection of the WLAN adapter to the Voluson E-Series system, follow the procedure
described in Section 3.13.2 "Wireless Network Configuration" on page 3-59 .

Setup Instructions
3.5.9 Connecting a Secondary "Patient" Monitor
Caution
A Secondary "Patient" Monitor MUST NEVER be connected to the Voluson E-Series systems mains supply
directly! Always connect it to an appropriate Isolation Transformer (see Section 9.10.3 on page 9-42 ).
Caution
The secondary monitor is the only item to be connected to the isolation transformer.
Note A Secondary Monitor is NOT intended for diagnostic use. It is an additional device used to allow the patient
to watch the proceedings.
Note Take your time to think about the best position of the monitor in your facilities. Patients should be able to
view the monitor easily and without having to bend or turn around.

2. Connect the Secondary Monitor according to connection scheme, see: Figure 3-22 on page 3-30 .
3. After physical connection to the Voluson E-Series system check, and if necessary change the Ext.
Monitor Output setting, see: Section 3.7.1.7 on page 3-45 .
system).

Setup Instructions
3.5.9.1 Connection Scheme: Secondary "Patient" Monitor
Figure 3-22 Connection Scheme - Secondary Monitor

Setup Instructions
3.5.10 Connecting the Footswitch
The Footswitch should be directly connected to any accessible USB-port on the Voluson E-Series (e.g., on
rear of the system).
system).
After physical connection, adjust the Footswitch as described in Section 3.7.1.8 on page 3-45 .
Figure 3-23 Connection Scheme - Footswitch

Setup Instructions
3.5.11 Connecting the Barcode Scanner
The Barcode Scanner should be directly connected to any accessible USB-port on the Voluson E-Series
(e.g., next to DVD drive).
system).
Figure 3-24 Connection Scheme - Barcode Scanner

Setup Instructions
3.5.12 Connecting the ECG-preamplifier
system).
Figure 3-25 Connection Scheme - ECG-preamplifier

Setup Instructions
3.5.13 Connecting an USB Flash Memory Stick
Note Before connecting an USB device, please read Section 3.5.15 "General Remarks when using external USB-
Devices" on page 3-35 .
An USB Flash Memory Stick may be connected to an accessible USB port of the Voluson E-Series system
(e.g., on back of control console).
An external USB Flash Memory Stick can be connected once the system is powered ON, or after shutdown.
The Voluson E-Series, Windows detects the device and automatically installs a driver. During this process
several dialogs may pop up, starting with the „Found New Hardware” dialog.
Note Memory drives or sticks may be sensitive to EMC interference. This may affect system performance and/or
image quality.
Note Before disconnecting an external USB-device (e.g., USB Stick), the system has to be informed about the
removal of the device! For this purpose press the Eject key on the keyboard.
For further details see Section 3.5.15.2 "External USB-Devices - Disconnection" on page 3-35 .
3.5.14 Connecting an external USB Hard disk
Note Before connecting an USB device, please read Section 3.5.15 "General Remarks when using external USB-
Devices" on page 3-35 .
An external HDD may be connected to an accessible USB port of the Voluson E-Series system (e.g., on
back of control console).
An external USB Hard Disk Drive can be connected once the system is powered ON, or after shutdown. The
Voluson E-Series, Windows detects the device and automatically installs a driver. During this process
several dialogs may pop up, starting with the „Found New Hardware” dialog.
Note Memory drives or sticks may be sensitive to EMC interference. This may affect system performance and/or
image quality.
Note Before disconnecting an external USB-device (e.g., USB Stick), the system has to be informed about the
For further details see Section 3.5.15.2 "External USB-Devices - Disconnection" on page 3-35 .

Setup Instructions
3.5.15 General Remarks when using external USB-Devices
Caution
Do not connect or disconnect any external USB-devices to or from the system while scanning a patient! The
appearing dialogs could distract you from the scan!
3.5.15.1 External USB-Devices - Connection

When an external USB-storage device (such as an USB-memory stick or an external hard disk) is connected
to the Voluson E-Series, Windows detects the device and automatically installs a driver. During this process,
several dialogs may pop up, starting with the “Found New Hardware“ dialog.
The device is then accessible using the drive letter the system assigned to it.
Note If an external drive was not recognized automatically after connecting it, click Rescan Drive.
Note When connecting external USB devices, be sure to execute Safety Directions found in the Voluson E-Series
Basic User Manual.
3.5.15.2 External USB-Devices - Disconnection
Before an external USB-device (e.g., USB-memory stick) can be disconnected, the system has to be informed about the
Caution
Unplugging or ejecting USB devices without first stopping them can cause the system to crash and possibly
result in loss of valuable data.
By pressing the Eject key on the keyboard, a dialog window (see: Figure 3-26 below) is displayed. The
“Connect USB and Network Drives” window shows all USB and Network drives connected to the system.
Using this dialog, the USB-devices can be stopped before they are physically disconnected.
Figure 3-26 Connect USB and Network Drives
To stop the external device, select it and then click the Stop Device button.
Figure 3-27 Device can now be safely removed
Confirm the "‘Stop Device" dialog with OK and Close the "Connect USB and Network Drives" window.

Setup Instructions
3.6 Printer Installation

Note For connection schemes see Section 3.5 "Connection of Auxiliary Devices" on page 3-14 .

3.6.1 Installing the Digital Black & White Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.6.2 Installing the Digital Color Printer - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.6.3 Installing the DeskJet Color Printer directly via an USB-cable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-36
3.6.4 Printer Installation manually - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-37
3.6.5 Adjustment of Printer Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-38
3.6.6 Remote Control Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-41
Note The Network Color Laser printer and the Bluetooth printer connection set MUST NOT be installed by the
user! For installation please contact your local distributor or GE service representative.
If a DeskJet printer (e.g., HP Officejet 100) is connected directly via an USB-cable, use the AC mains power
outlet provided by the Voluson E-Series system (auxiliary output). This ensures medical grade separation
from AC mains.
Warning
EC330 (BT18) only:

If the Whitelisting option is available and activated in System Setup - Administration, a password login
window might appear during the installation procedure.
3.6.1 Installing the Digital Black & White Printer

2. Connect and install the printer as described in Section 3.5.3 on page 3-17 .
4. Assign the printer to the remote keys P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 and/or P6; see Section 3.6.6 "Remote Control
Selection" on page 3-41 .
3.6.2 Installing the Digital Color Printer

2. Connect and install the printer as described in Section 3.5.4 on page 3-19 .
3.6.3 Installing the DeskJet Color Printer directly via an USB-cable

2. Connect the printer according to connection scheme Figure 3-17 on page 3-25 .
7. Assign the printer as Report Printer, see Section 3.6.6.1 "Report Printer Selection" on page 3-41 .

Setup Instructions
3.6.4 Printer Installation manually
EC330 (BT18) only:

If the Whitelisting option is available and activated in System Setup - Administration, a password login
window might appear during the installation procedure.
1. Press the Utilities key on the control console.

2. In the “Utilities” menu touch the Setup button to invoke the setup desktop on the screen.
3. On the right side of the screen select Connectivity and then click the Peripherals tab.
Figure 3-28 Setup - Connectivity - PERIPHERALS page
A External Monitor Output selection 1 Add Printer button
B Video Norm selection 2 Footswitch Remote Control
3 Report Printer selection
4. Click the Add Printer button.

Please read the displayed message carefully and click Yes if you have skills to do this.
5. Click the Next button to start the Add Printer Wizard.
6. After installation, close all open windows, select Save & Exit and restart the system (turn off and on the
system).

Setup Instructions
3.6.5 Adjustment of Printer Settings
After system restart:

4. Select the desired printer from the Printer Settings pull-down menu and click the Edit button.
Figure 3-29 select desired printer
• "UP-D897 / UP-D898MD Printer - Settings" on page 3-38

• "UP-D25MD Printer Settings" on page 3-39
Warning
3.6.5.1 UP-D897 / UP-D898MD Printer - Settings

1. Call up the "Printer Preferences"; see Section 3.6.5 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-38 .
2. Select the Layout page and select:
- Paper: 960x1280
- Orientation: Portrait
- Interpolation Method: Bilinear
Figure 3-30 Layout / Density Adjust page
3. Select the Density Adjust page and select:

- Gamma: TONE2
- Advanced = 0, Dark = 0, Light = 0, Sharpness = 2
4. Save the adjusted printer settings with Apply and OK. Close window and exit System Setup.

Setup Instructions
3.6.5.2 UP-D25MD Printer Settings

1. Call up the "Printer Preferences"; see Section 3.6.5 "Adjustment of Printer Settings" on page 3-38 .
2. Select the Paper page and select:
- Paper: UPC-...L (large) / UPC-...S (small)
- Orientation: Landscape (recommended when using large paper size)
- High Speed (check mark on)
Note Settings for paper size must match with the used paper (large/small) and also the right color ink cartridge
has to be used. Otherwise you will get an error message at printing.
3. Select the Graphics page. From the "Color Adjust" pull-down menu select:
4. Color Balance: Cyan = 0, Magenta = 0, Yellow = 0
Figure 3-31 Paper / Graphics page

Setup Instructions
5. Lightness: Sharpness = 7, Dark = 0, Gamma = -6, Light = 2, Gamma Curve = Curve 1

6. Color Correction: check mark Printer Hardware Color Correction
Figure 3-32 Graphic page (Lightness / Color Correction)
7. Gray Balance: X = 50, Y = 50

8. Adjustment by Color: Color (region) = Magenta Red
Figure 3-33 Graphic page (Gray Balance / Adjustment by Color)
9. Save the adjusted printer settings with Apply and OK. Close window and exit System Setup.

Setup Instructions
3.6.6 Remote Control Selection
To assign an auxiliary device (e.g., printer) to the remote keys P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 and/or P6:
3. On the right side of the screen select Connectivity and then click the Button Configuration tab.
Figure 3-34 Setup - Connectivity - BUTTON CONFIGURATION page (Overview)
1 Overview 2 Detailed Setup
1a Configure buttons
1b Select Printer
1c Recorder Control
1d Select P? key to send Email
1. Overview tab:
a. Configure “Remote” Buttons: Select the desired remote control button.
b. Select Printer: Check mark and select the desired Printer for the remote control button.
c. Recorder Control: Check mark this item to use the selected P? key for Recorder Control.
d. Check mark "Use P? key to send Email", and adjust Settings.
Note Optionally the Printer Remote Control can be done by the Foot switch; see Figure 3-28 on page 3-37 .
2. Detailed Setup tab:
a. If it is desired, check mark "Use Report Printer for Reports"
3.6.6.1 Report Printer Selection

1. Click on the Peripherals tab; see Figure 3-28 on page 3-37 .
2. Select the desired Report Printer from the pull-down menu.
Note The selected Report Printer is usually used for printing reports and images from the Archive.

Setup Instructions
3.7 System Configuration
3.7.1 Setup

Modifications of system setup parameters and settings are supported by 7 major groups. Each major group
contains diverse dialog pages and sub windows.
Please observe that the displayed screens may slightly differ from images shown in this manual. The
availability of some functions or features depend on the BT-version of your Voluson E-Series system.
• General: Date, Time, Clinic Name, (EUM) Language, Screen saver, etc.
• Authentication: access setting (password protection) to authentication functions
• Details: Doppler 2D Refresh, Zoom options, Menu Brightness, Trackball Speed, etc.
• Annotation: adjustment of different Annotation presets (e.g. Home position, etc.)
• Clipboard: adjustment of Clipboard display and functions
• Patient Info Display: Drop Down Management, Title Bar Settings, Capitalize Letter in Patient Names, etc.
• Scan Assistant: Scan Assistant List/Item Settings, etc.
• Service: enter the password to get access to the Service Tools functions
• System Info: shows which Software/Hardware version is installed in the system
• Options: shows which options are installed in the system. For information on configuring software options
refer to: Section 8.7 on page 8-16 .
• Disk Encryption: enables an encryption to secure all Patient Data, Patient Images and corresponding
measurements
• Whitelisting: prevents the system from installing unwanted software
• Peripherals: Video Norm selection, Foot switch assignment, Add Printer, Edit Printer settings, etc.
• Device Setup: to set up all DICOM, Archive and Network configuration nodes (e.g, TCP/IP, WLAN, EMAIL,
etc.)
• Button Configuration: adjust assignment of Remote keys P1, P2, P3, ... (e.g, Printer selection)
• Drives: USB and Network drives: stop devices, map network drive, erase CD
• System Configuration: Save/Load Scan Settings (Small Backup), Save/Load/Delete Full System
Configuration
• Image Archive: Save/Load Image Archive
• Presets: to save User Folders/Presets and 3D/4D Presets, Logo display, etc.
• Global Parameters: adjustment of different parameters for specific or all applications
• Menu to program Biopsy Lines
• Measure & Calc: shows all settings, which are used for generic measurements as well as calculations in
different applications
• Application Parameters: to adjust Status on Freeze for different modes, Manual Trace method, Calculation
Ratio, etc.
• Global Parameters: to select cursor type and size, font size and color of measure results, position of results
for different modes, etc.
• Report: adjustment and setup of Report display
• Result Window: adjustment of Result and OB Graph display
• Button Configuration: adjust assignment of buttons
• SonoAVC: adjustment of follicle parameters

Setup Instructions

3.7.1.1 How to invoke Setup Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-43
3.7.1.2 How to display System Manuals (eDOC) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-43
3.7.1.3 How to enter Date and Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-44
3.7.1.4 How to enter Clinic Name - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-44
3.7.1.5 How to change Language and/or EUM Language - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-44
3.7.1.6 How to change Video Norm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-45
3.7.1.7 How to change Ext. Monitor Output Settings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-45
3.7.1.8 How to adjust function of the Footswitch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-45
3.7.1.9 How to change the Keyboard Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-45
3.7.1.10 How to configure InSite - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-45
3.7.1.11 How to execute Additional Software Installation (ASI) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-45
3.7.1.12 How to activate User Login Authentication - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-46
3.7.1.13 How to perform Full Disk Encryption - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-46
3.7.1.14 How to protect the system by Whitelisting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-48
3.7.1.1 How to invoke Setup Procedure

3. Select the corresponding major group from the rightside of the screen and then click the desired tab.
Note In general operations are done with the trackball and the trackball keys (mouse emulation).
Trackball (mouse position):

positions the pointing device (arrow) on the desktop
left / right trackball key (left mouse button):

sets, fixates markers and activates pages/buttons etc. marked by the pointing device
upper / lower trackball key (upper trackball key = right mouse button):
no function in system desktop
3.7.1.2 How to display System Manuals (eDOC)
1. Insert the eDOC DVD into the drive.

3. In the "Utilities" menu touch the eDOC button to open the index file from the DVD.
Note If the eDOC DVD is not inserted, a message to insert the DVD appears.

Setup Instructions
3.7.1.3 How to enter Date and Time

1. Invoke System Setup as described in Section 3.7.1.1 on page 3-43 .
2. On the right side of the screen select General Settings and then click the General tab.
Figure 3-35 Setup - General Settings - GENERAL page
1 Date and Time 6 Display options
2 change date and time 7 Diverse options
3 Date Format 8 change System Language
4 Time Format 9 change EUM Language
5 Clinic Name 10 Screensaver Text
3. Click the button to activate a sub dialog window to enter date, time and time zone.
4. Select the “Date Format” (only one can be active).
5. Select the “Time Format” (only one can be active).
6. Close the Service page with Save&Exit.
3.7.1.4 How to enter Clinic Name

3. Select the text box to enter a new "Clinic Name" with the keyboard.
4. Close the Service page with Save&Exit.
The clinic name will be copied into the Clinic Name (ID) field of the information header.
3.7.1.5 How to change Language and/or EUM Language

3. Select the desired language from the pull-down menu.
4. Close the Service page with Save&Exit and restart the system.
Note After changing the language the Voluson E-Series has to reboot.

Setup Instructions
3.7.1.6 How to change Video Norm

3. Click the proper field: PAL (50Hz) or NTSC (60Hz); see Figure 3-28 on page 3-37 .
3.7.1.7 How to change Ext. Monitor Output Settings

3. If not currently selected, click the proper field; see Figure 3-28 on page 3-37 .
3.7.1.8 How to adjust function of the Footswitch

3. Select desired function of the Footswitch. Refer to Figure 3-28 on page 3-37 .
3.7.1.9 How to change the Keyboard Layout

see Section 6.4 "Modification of Keyboard Layout" on page 6-5
3.7.1.10 How to configure InSite

see Section 3.13.8 "InSite Configuration" on page 3-70
3.7.1.11 How to execute Additional Software Installation (ASI)

2. On the right side of the screen select Administration and then click the Service tab.
3. Enter the password « she » and click Accept.
Entering a password is no more required at systems with software version EC330 (BT18).
4. Click the ASI button.

The software parts to be installed depend on the contents of the System DVD that is used.

Setup Instructions
3.7.1.12 How to activate User Login Authentication

2. On the right side of the screen select General Settings and then click the Authentication tab.
3. Check mark Activate User Login.
Figure 3-36 System Setup - Administration - Authentication
a. Click Add User. A dialog appears.

b. Enter the User Name, the First Name and the Last Name.
c. Enter a Password and Confirm Password.
Note A valid password must be at least 6 characters long and has a maximum length of 80 characters. The
password must contain at least 2 non-letter characters, 0...9 or !@#$%^*().
d. Select a Group the user belong to.
e. Confirm with OK to save User Login Authentication.
The system login window appears as soon as the system is started or a current user logs off. The correct
User Name and Password has to be entered to login. If the correct password/user name combination is
entered, it is also possible to change the password. The Emergency button enables emergency mode with
restricted access.
3.7.1.13 How to perform Full Disk Encryption

Disk Encryption enables an encryption to secure all Patient Data, Patient Images and corresponding
measurements.
Caution
Without the Encryption Password or Recovery Key it will not be possible to access the Ultrasound device
including emergency mode, scanning, patient information, images, or local archive. GE has no access to this
information or the ability to undo encryption in the event that the Encryption Password and Recovery Key are
lost. The security and safety of the Encryption Password and Recovery Key is solely the user's responsibility.
Note Disk Encryption is an option and might not be available in all countries. If the option is not set, the tab Disk
Encryption is not available in System Setup - Administration.
3.7.1.13.1 Disk Encryption Workflow - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-47
3.7.1.13.2 Unlock an encrypted Disk - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-47
3.7.1.13.3 Decrypt Disk - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-48

Setup Instructions
3.7.1.13.1 Disk Encryption Workflow

2. On the right side of the screen select Administration and then click the Disk Encryption tab.
Figure 3-37 System Setup - Administration - Disk Encryption
3. Start Encryption.
a. Set unlock password and Retype password.
Note The entered password is not visible and has a minimum of 8 characters.
b. Click Create unlock keys.
Identifier and Recovery key as well as an USB unlock key is automatically created by the system.
c. Save recovery key to an external or network device.
d. Choose connected printer from the pull down-menu and click Print recovery key.
e. If desired, click the Save to USB button to save the USB unlock key to a connected USB device.
f. Click the Start encryption button.
Note The process of enabling encryption of the patient data will take a considerable amount of time (one to
several hours).
g. Confirm the dialogs with Yes and OK to start encryption.
A progress bar is displayed during disk encryption process.
Note The system should not be used while encryption process in ongoing.
3.7.1.13.2 Unlock an encrypted Disk

If patient data stored on the internal HDDs D:\ partition are encrypted (protected), following dialog window
appears as soon as the system is started.
Figure 3-38 unlock screen at encrypted disk

Setup Instructions
The system has to be unlocked by one of the following possibilities:

• Enter the previously defined user Password (minimum of 8 characters) and click Unlock.
• Click the Recovery key button, enter the key into the displayed dialog and click Unlock.
• Connect the USB device with unlock key and click Unlock.
If the USB device with unlock key is connected to your Voluson E-Series, the system is automatically
unlocked during boot up.
3.7.1.13.3 Decrypt Disk

4. Click the Decrypt Disk button.
Note Security of patient data on the system will be reduced when encryption is turned off. Decryption will take a
considerable amount of time (one to several hours).
5. Confirm the dialogs with Yes and OK to start encryption.
A progress bar is displayed during decryption process.
Note The system should not be used while decryption process in ongoing.
3.7.1.14 How to protect the system by Whitelisting

Note Whitelisting is an option and might not be available in all countries. If the option "Advanced Security
Features" is not set, the tab Whitelisting is not available in System Setup - Administration.
2. On the right side of the screen select Administration and then click the Whitelisting tab.
Figure 3-39 System Setup - Administration - Whitelisting
3. Enter Password and Verify Password.
Note The entered password is not visible and has a minimum of 8 characters.
4. Click Activate.

Setup Instructions
3.8 On-board optional Peripherals

AC mains power outlets (AUX) for auxiliary devices and peripherals are co-switched by the systems mains
switch. Output voltage for AUX: 115V
Caution
The maximum power consumption of equipment (inclusive color LCD monitor) connected to these outlets
must not exceed 200VA!
Table 3-6 Approved Peripherals
Device Manufacturer Model Connection Comment
Digital B/W Video Printer SONY UP-D897 USB-Port Table 9-10
UP-D898MD
Digital Color Printer SONY UP-D25MD USB-Port Table 9-10
Color Deskjet Printer Hewlett Packard (HP) HP Officejet 100 USB-Port or Table 9-10
Bluetooth
Color Laser Printer (Network) Hewlett Packard (HP) HP LaserJet M451 USB-Port Table 9-10
HP LaserJet M452dn
HP LaserJet M452nw USB-Port or Wi-Fi

Direct
Bluetooth Adapter Delock Delock USB-Port Table 9-10
ECG Preamplifier NORAV MAN30 USB-Port Table 9-11
USB Flash Memory device SanDisk Cruzer Micro USB-Port Table 9-11
Gigabit Network Isolator Baaske Medical MI 1005 Medical Isolator USB-Port Table 9-11
Cellular Modem CEP AG HT910-G USB-Port Table 9-11
Wireless Adapter (WLAN) Netgear WG111v3 (obsolete) USB-Port Table 9-11
A6210
Barcode Scanner Honeywell Eclipse 5145 USB-Port Table 9-11
Footswitch Whanam FSU3000G USB-Port Table 9-12
Isolation Transformer Noratel IMED, 300WR 3rd Edition - Table 9-12
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) Tripp Lite SMART1200XLHG

3 - Table 9-12
SMX1200XLHG
4 -
Power Filter TNC - - Table 9-12
32" Secondary Patient Monitor (USA NEC MultiSync V323-2 HDMI / VGA -
and EU)
32" Secondary Patient Monitor (US SONY KDL-32EX523 HDMI / VGA obsolete
version)
40" Secondary Patient Monitor SONY FWD-40W600P HDMI / VGA obsolete

(European version)
It might be possible that some probes, options or features are NOT available
• in some countries.
• at the time of release of this Service Manual.
3 for 100-130V AC countries

4 for 220-240V AC countries

Setup Instructions
3.9 External I/O Connectors
Figure 3-40 External I/O connectors - on rear of system (GES)
Item Connector Name Table Number Description
1 HDMI OUT Table 3-7 Connector for external monitor
2 VGA OUT Table 3-8 Connector for external monitor
3 Network Table 3-9 GES30: DICOM input/output, twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabit/s
GES35: DICOM input/output, twisted pair RJ-45 10/100/1000 megabit/s
4 USB Table 3-11 USB 3.0 port
5 USB Table 3-10 USB 2.0 port (GES30 only)
6 S-Video OUT Table 3-12 S-Video OUT connector, PAL/NTSC (depending on system setup)
Figure 3-41 External I/O connectors - next to DVD drive
1 Table 3-10 USB 2.0 port (RTT/RTH6x)

USB
2 Table 3-11 USB 3.0 port (RTH50)
How to identify User Interface components RTH6x and RTH50

The color of the USB ports for external use (beside the DVD drive) enable quick differentiation between
RTH6x and RTH50.
Figure 3-42 RTH6x => "white" USB2.0 ports / RTH50 => "blue" USB3.0 ports

Setup Instructions
Figure 3-43 External I/O connectors - on the left/right side of the Monitor
1
USB Table 3-11 USB 3.0 port
2

Setup Instructions
3.9.1 External I/O Pin Outs
Table 3-7 HDMI OUT connector
Pin No Signal Pin No Signal
1 TDMS Data2+ 11 TMDS Clock Shield
2 TDMS Data2 Shield 12 TMDS Clock-
3 TDMS Data2- 13 CEC
4 TDMS Data1+ 14 Reserved/HEC Data-
5 TDMS Data1 Shield 15 SCL (Serial Clock for DDC)
6 TMDS Data1- 16 SDA (Serial Data Line for DDC)
7 TMDS Data0+ 17 DDC/HEC/CEC Ground
8 TMDS Data0 Shield 18 +5V Power
9 TDMS Data0- 19 Hot Plug Detect/HEC Data+
10 TMDS Clock+
Table 3-8 VGA OUT connector, Sub-D (15 pin)
Pin No Output Signal Description
1 VGA OUT1 R Red
2 VGA OUT1 G Green
3 VGA OUT1 B Blue
4, 9, 11, 12, 15 N/C N/C
5, 6, 7, 8, 10 GND GND
13 VGA OUT1 HS H Sync
14 VGA OUT1 VS V Sync
Table 3-9 Network connector, RJ45 Modular (8 pin)
1 ETHER TD Ethernet RD +
2 ETHER TD Ethernet RD -
3 ETHER RD Ethernet TD +
6 ETHER RD Ethernet TD -
others NC no connection
Table 3-10 USB 2.0 connectors
1 VCC USB Power Supply
2 - Data USB Data (-)
3 + Data USB Data (+)
4 GND USB Power Ground

Setup Instructions
Table 3-11 USB 3.0 connectors
1 VBus +5V Power
2 USB D- USB 2.0 Data (-)
3 USB D+ USB 2.0 Data (+)
4 GND Ground for power return
5 StdA_SSRX- SuperSpeed receiver
6 StdA_SSRX+ SuperSpeed receiver
7 GND_DRAIN Ground for signal return
8 StdA_SSTX- SuperSpeed transmitter
9 StdA_SSTX+ SuperSpeed transmitter
Table 3-12 S-Video OUT connector (4 pin)
1 SVIDEO OUT/IN YG Y (Luma) GND
2 SVIDEO OUT/IN CG C (Chroma) GND
3 SVIDEO OUT/IN Y Y (Luma) Signal
4 SVIDEO OUT/IN C C (Chroma) Signal
Table 3-13 Monitor Power connector (16 pin)
Pin No Description
2, 3, 7, 10, 15 12V
1, 5, 8, 9, 1116 GND
6 / 14 USB 1- / USB 1+
4, 12, 13 NC (no connection)
Table 3-14 DVI OUT connector
Pin No Description Pin No Description
1 TDMS data 2- 13 TDMS data 3+
2 TDMS data 2+ 14 +5 Volt
3 TDMS data 2, 4 shielding 15 ground for +5 Volt
4 TDMS data 4- 16 Hotplug-Detect
5 TDMS data 4+ 17 TDMS data 0-
6 DDC clock 18 TDMS data 0+
7 DDC data 19 TDMS data 0, 5 shielding
8 Analog: V-Sync 20 TDMS data 5-
9 TDMS data 1- 21 TDMS data 5+
10 TDMS data 1+ 22 TDMS meter shielding
11 TMDS data 1, 3 shielding 23 TDMS clock +
12 TDMS data 3- 24 TDMS clock -

Setup Instructions
3.9.2 Video Specification
Video specifications may be needed to be able to connect laser cameras or other devices to the Voluson E-
Series system.
DVI-D/VGA-connector:
• visible resolution ... 1280 x 1024
• screen refresh rate ... 60Hz
S-Video connector:
• Type: separate Video (Y/C)
• Video modes: PAL (50Hz), NTSC (60Hz)
3.9.3 External Cables - Maximum Lengths
Table below shows maximum permitted cable length of external cables, according to IEC60601-1-2.
Table 3-15 maximum cable lengths
Description Maximum Cable Length Type
Probe cable 2.5 m shielded
USB cable (port 2.0) 5m shielded; USB2.0 or higher
USB cable (port 3.0) 2m shielded; USB3.0 or higher
LAN cable 80 m shielded; Cat5e or higher
VGA cable 15 m shielded
S-Video cable 5m shielded
HDMI cable 10 m shielded
ECG cable 4m shielded
Power cable 4m unshielded
PE cable 10 m unshielded
3.10 Available Probes

See Section 9.12 "Probes" on page 9-49 , for part numbers to be used when ordering new or replacement
service probes.
3.11 Software/Option Configuration

For description refer to:
• Section 3.7.1 "Setup" on page 3-42

Setup Instructions
3.12 Connectivity Setup

The Voluson E-Series ultrasound system can be connected to various connectivity devices. The following
sections describe how to connect the system to a remote archive/work station or a DICOM service, using a
TCP/IP connection.
3.12.1 Connectivity Introduction
This section describes communication and connection options between the Voluson E-Series ultrasound
system and other devices in the hospital information system.
The following scenarios are covered:
• stand-alone Voluson E-Series system; see Section 3.12.1.3 on page 3-57 .
• Voluson E-Series and one or several PC workstations - with Software 4D View installed - within a
“Sneaker Net” environment. (“Sneaker Net” means that you use a DVD/CD to move data because no
network is available); see Section 3.12.1.4 on page 3-57 .
• Voluson E-Series and DICOM server in a network; see Section 3.12.1.5 on page 3-57 .
3.12.1.1 Dataflow Concept

Communication between the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system and other information providers on the
network takes the form of data flows. Each dataflow defines the transfer of patient information from either an
input source to the system, or from the system to an output source (see examples in Section 3.12.1.2 on
page 3-56 ).
Patient information can include demographic data and images, as well as reports and Measurement and
Analysis (M&A) data. A dataflow is a set of pre-configured services. Selecting a dataflow will automatically
customize the ultrasound system to work according to the services associated with this dataflow.
By utilizing data flows, the user can configure the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system to optimally meet the
needs of the facility, while keeping the user interface unchanged. Once the dataflow is selected, the actual
location of the database is entirely transparent.

Setup Instructions
3.12.1.2 Dataflow Examples
The local database is used for patient archiving.

Images are stored to internal hard drive.
The local database is used for patient archiving.

Afterwards images are stored to a DVD/CD or
external USB device, etc.
A remote database is used for patient archiving.

Images are also stored to a remote archive.
Search in the DICOM Modality Worklist, the patient

found is copied into local database. The patient
information and the examination results are stored to
the local database. Images are stored to a DICOM
server and to an image network volume on the local
hard drive.

Setup Instructions
3.12.1.3 Stand-alone Voluson E-Series

If digital images or 3D/4D data sets are stored, they should be saved in the Archive (Image Management
System software).
Note To avoid loss of essential data, it is highly recommended to export/backup patient data as well as
measurements at least once a month.
Physical Connection:
No network connection needed.
3.12.1.4 Voluson E-Series + PC (with 4D View Software) within a "Sneaker Net"

A PC (one or several with 4D View software installed) is used for review and work on studies acquired on
one or more Voluson E-Series system without being connected in a network.
The images are first stored on the Voluson E-Series system's hard drive (Archive) and then exported from
the system's hard drive to a sneaker device (e.g., DVD/CD), and finally imported from the sneaker device to
the “4D View” PC's internal hard drive.
Note To avoid loss of essential data, it is highly recommended to export/backup patient data as well as
measurements at least once a month.
No network connection needed.
3.12.1.5 Connection between Voluson E-Series and DICOM Server

In this configuration, the Voluson E-Series is configured to work with a DICOM server in a network
environment. Usually, this will be the hospital network. Images are first saved on the local image buffer on
the system. At the end of the examination, the images are sent to the DICOM server via a DICOM spooler.
This scenario requires that the system is configured to be connected to the DICOM server.
You will need one network cable.
1. Connect one end of the cable to the Ethernet connector on the Voluson E-Series.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the wall outlet.
Note If a Peer-to-Peer Network is connected to the hospital's network, you may connect the Voluson E-Series to
the Peer-to-Peer Network.
3.13 Network Configuration

3.13.1 TCP/IP Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-58
3.13.2 Wireless Network Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-59
3.13.3 How to Setup the Cellular Modem - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-64
3.13.4 How to Setup E-mail - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-66
3.13.5 How to Setup E-mail to MMS Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-67
3.13.6 How to enter Patient's Email address and Phone number in the PID screen - - - - 3-68
3.13.7 Map Network Drive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-69
3.13.8 InSite Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-70

Setup Instructions
3.13.1 TCP/IP Configuration
Note Following information must be provided by the customer or hospital engineer before you can start: Station
name, AE Title, IP address and Port Number for the Voluson E-Series. The IP addresses for the default
gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING INFORMATION. Only if necessary (e.g. for Internet
access).
3. On the right side of the screen select Connectivity and then click the Device Setup tab.
4. Click the button, read the message and confirm with Yes.
Figure 3-44 Configuration
5. The "Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties" dialog page appears.
Note This example shows fictional numbers!
Figure 3-45 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
1 You can get IP and DNS settings assigned automatically, if your network supports this capability.
2 If fixed IP address is required, ask your network administrator for the appropriate settings.
Type in:
- IP address
- Subnet mask
- Default gateway
- DNS server

Setup Instructions
3.13.2 Wireless Network Configuration
Note To configure the Voluson E-Series system to work with WLAN, the hospital’s network administrator has to
provide the required information.
3.13.2.1 Connecting to the WLAN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-59
3.13.2.2 Disconnecting from the WLAN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-59
3.13.2.3 Adding a WLAN Profile - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60
3.13.2.4 Refreshing a WLAN Network - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60
3.13.2.5 Setting a WLAN Network as Non-Preferable - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-60
3.13.2.6 Removing a WLAN Profile - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-61
3.13.2.7 Customizing an existing WLAN Profile - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-61
3.13.2.8 Available WLAN Channels - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-62
3.13.2.9 Monitoring the WLAN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-62
3.13.2.10 WLAN Diagnostic - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-63
3.13.2.11 Repairing the WLAN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-63
3.13.2.1 Connecting to the WLAN

1. Connect the Wireless Network adapter as described in Section 3.5.8 on page 3-28 .
5. Click the WLAN Configuration button; see Figure 3-44 on page 3-58 .
6. The Wireless Network Configuration tool with available Wireless Networks appear.
Figure 3-46 Wireless Networks - Connect
7. Check box "Enable Wireless Connection".

8. Highlight the wireless network you want to use and then click Connect.
Note If the WLAN fails to connect, review and/or recreate the Wireless connection in the Security tab.
3.13.2.2 Disconnecting from the WLAN

5. Select the WLAN you are connected to and then click Disconnect.

Setup Instructions
3.13.2.3 Adding a WLAN Profile

5. Select the Security tab and then click Add.
Figure 3-47 Security - Add
6. Add the following information to the Wireless Network Properties page:

- Network Name (SSID)
- Check box "Connect even if Network is not Broadcasting its Name (SSID)"
- Network Authentication (Open, Shared Key, WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK)
5
- Data Encryption
- Network Key
- Key Index
7. After you have filled in all the required information, click OK.
3.13.2.4 Refreshing a WLAN Network

5. Click Refresh.
3.13.2.5 Setting a WLAN Network as Non-Preferable

When you make a WLAN non-preferable, you disconnect the network from the system and delete all
connection settings from the system. Afterwards the system WILL NOT try to reconnect to this WLAN
automatically. And if you want to reconnect, you will need to re-add this WLAN.
5. Highlight the wireless network you want to set as non-preferred.
6. Click Make Non-Preferable and confirm the message box.
5 WPA(2) PSK = WiFi Protected Access using one Pre-Shared Key Note: PSK is also referred to as "Personal" encryption standard.

Setup Instructions
3.13.2.6 Removing a WLAN Profile

5. Select the Security tab and then click Remove.
3.13.2.7 Customizing an existing WLAN Profile

5. Select the Security tab and then click Customize.
Figure 3-48 Security - Customize
6. Customize the following information:

- Network Name (SSID)
- Check box "Connect even if Network is not Broadcasting its Name (SSID)"
- Network Authentication (Open, Shared Key, WPA PSK or WPA2 PSK)
6
- Data Encryption
- Network Key
- Key Index
7. After you have filled in all the required information, click OK.
6 WPA(2) PSK = WiFi Protected Access using one Pre-Shared Key Note: PSK is also referred to as "Personal" encryption standard.

Setup Instructions
3.13.2.8 Available WLAN Channels

The available WLAN channels show availability of wireless connect point that the system can talk to. Each
channel supports a finite number of users and has limited signal strength. This may effect the ability to
connect, the throughput and the connection dropping out.
5. Select the Properties tab.
Figure 3-49 Properties
6. Click Available Channels.
3.13.2.9 Monitoring the WLAN

If there are wireless network communication issues, you can monitor the wireless connection to see if it is
dropping out and recovering periodically. This can effect throughput.
5. Select the Monitor tab.
Figure 3-50 Monitor

Setup Instructions
3.13.2.10 WLAN Diagnostic

Running diagnostics is good if you think the adapter might be bad. Diagnostics also tell you if the connection
is behaving properly. Sometimes the system connects by accident to the DVR or another internal device
which uses the TCP/IP protocol. The diagnostics would show if there are errors when performing the full two-
way communication. For example, if the IP address starts with 197 or 169 (loopback addresses), then
something is wrong.
5. Select the Diagnostics tab and then click Run Diagnostics.
Figure 3-51 Run Diagnostics
3.13.2.11 Repairing the WLAN

Occasionally you may need to repair a WLAN that has lost its connection to the Voluson E-Series.
5. Select the Diagnostics tab and then click Repair.
Note DO NOT cancel the Repair operation after you have selected to repair the Wireless LAN connection.

Setup Instructions
3.13.3 How to Setup the Cellular Modem
By means of the Cellular Modem, it is possible to connect the Voluson E-Series to the Internet by using a
SIM card.
When to use the Cellular Modem

The Cellular Modem is useful if no Internet connection is available via LAN or WIFI. Connecting the Voluson
E-Series to the Internet allows the user to send images via e-mail and/or MMS to patients or physicians.
Note MMS are sent by e-mail to a 3rd party provider (e.g. SMSglobal). This service needs to be ordered by a 3rd
party provider.
Note Please check with a Smartphone located near the Voluson E-Series, if network coverage is available. Used
SIM card in the Smartphone should use same provider as SIM card for Cellular Modem.
Hardware Setup: To use the feature the peripheral Cellular Modem needs to be installed and a SIM card from
your local service provider needs to be ordered.
SIM card requirements: • Data capable

• Standard size
• prepaid or post paid
Note Since the Voluson E-Series does not enable browser access, the service provider needs to enable the
Internet access on the SIM card before installation in the Cellular Modem. Please ensure from the service
provider, that there is no browser registration necessary when using the SIM card.
Necessary SIM card information provided by the SIM card provider
APN (Access Point Name) e.g., a1.net
User Name for APN e.g., ppp@A1plus.a
Password for APN ***
SIM card Pin ****
Dial in Phone Number e.g., *99# - if not explicitly stated by the provider, use *99#
Please ensure that the SIM card information is available before setting up the Voluson E-Series.

Setup Instructions
Modem Configuration
2. Insert the SIM card into the Cellular Modem.
3. Connect the Cellular Modem as described in Section 3.5.7 on page 3-26 .
7. Click the Modem Configuration button; see Figure 3-44 on page 3-58 .
The Modem Configuration screen appear.
Figure 3-52 Modem Configuration
8. Enter all the required information.
Note Please keep the Dial information as *99#. Only in seldom cases different Dial information is needed.
9. Check box "Connect automatically".
10. Click OK.
11. Click the signal strength icon in the status bar.
Select Connect for connection to the service provider.
12. Please wait while busy symbol is on screen.
If the connection is established: Tooltip of the status icon provides signal strength in percentage.
If the connection is not established: Tooltip of the status icon provides an error message.
13. Depending on the region and/or provider it might be possible that you need one time registration of
your SIM card, therefore:
a. Open Windows Start Menu - All Programs - Internet Explorer.
b. Internet connection OK: close all open windows.
c. Internet connection fail: enter registration key or voucher code, then close all open windows.
14. If it is desired to send E-mails, perform configuration as described in Section 3.13.4 on page 3-66 .
16. Assign the Modem to a remote key (P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 and/or P6) as described in Section 3.6.6
"Remote Control Selection" on page 3-41 and adjust the Email settings.

Setup Instructions
3.13.4 How to Setup E-mail
If Internet access is available via LAN, Wi-Fi or Cellular modem, it is possible to send images/cines via E-
Mail to patients or physicians.
Necessary information provided by the E-mail provider (SMTP settings)

To enable E-mail, the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) settings from your provider are needed.
Note The Voluson E-Series is only supporting E-mail send; no e-mail receive is possible. To receive reply E-mails,
the same E-mail account needs to be installed on an Office-PC.
SMTP server name (Outgoing Messages) e.g., smtp.gmail.com
SMTP authentication (Outgoing Messages) e.g., SSL
SMTP port (Outgoing Messages) e.g., 465
Note Maybe the information above needs to be searched in the Internet from your e-mail provider and is the same
for all e-mail users.
Email Configuration
4. Click the Email Configuration button; see Figure 3-44 on page 3-58 .
The Email Configuration screen appear.
Figure 3-53 Email Configuration
5. Enter Your name and Email Address in the Identity group. As an option you can enter a different Reply
to Address and a Signature Text.
6. To verify E-mail configuration click on Send Test Email. An E-mail is sent to the entered E-mail address
followed by a message box where either a success message or an error message is shown.
7. Store your configuration with click on OK.

Setup Instructions
3.13.5 How to Setup E-mail to MMS Service
If the Voluson E-Series is connected to the Internet (via LAN, Wi-Fi or Cellular modem) and E-mail service is
configured properly, it is possible to send images as an MMS.
Note MMS are sent by e-mail to a 3rd party provider (e.g. SMSglobal). This service needs to be ordered by a 3rd
party provider.
Registration of MMS Service

To use the MMS feature you need to contract with a 3rd party provider which offers E-mail to MMS service
(e.g. SMSglobal). Please contact the service provider!
How this feature works

Voluson E-Series sends an E-mail with an attached image to the E-mail to MMS service. The MMS phone
number is encapsulated in the recipient E-mail address
MMS Options
4. Click the Email Configuration button; see Figure 3-44 on page 3-58 .
5. In the Email Configuration screen check box "Use Email to MMS Service" and then click on Settings.
Figure 3-54 check box
The Email to MMS Service Settings window appear.
Figure 3-55 Email to MMS Service Settings
Note The configuration above works with SMSglobal.

6. Enter the Domain Name from 3rd party E-mail to MMS service.
Note: An E-mail to phone number@Domain Name for MMS Email is sent!
7. Store your configuration with click on OK.

Setup Instructions
3.13.6 How to enter Patient's Email address and Phone number in the PID screen
1. Enter the “Patient ID” screen by pressing the Patient ID key on the control console.
2. Click the @ icon (1).
The Patient´s Email address and Phone number window appear.
Figure 3-56 Patient ID screen
3. Enter patient's information and adjust Email/MMS Options (2).

4. Store your configuration with click on OK (3).
Note Since the E-mail to MMS service provider is maybe not located in the same area as your MMS receptions,
you need to add the area code (e.g. +49 or 0049 for Germany) to the used phone numbers in the Patient's
E-mail address and Phone number dialog.
Example: local phone number 069913800000 is +49 69913800000 or 0049 69913800000 for Germany

Setup Instructions
3.13.7 Map Network Drive

3. On the right side of the screen select Connectivity and then click the Drives tab.
Figure 3-57 Setup - Connectivity - DRIVES page
4. Click the Map Network Drive button to open a dialog where the system can be connected to a shared
network drive of another server.
Figure 3-58 Map Network Drive
5. Enter the name of the shared network folder in the „Network Folder Name” field.
6. Supply a valid user name and a password for this folder.
Note If you check the „Automatic Reconnect“ box, the system tries to establish the connection again when starting
up. Otherwise, the connection must be re-established manually after a shutdown or reboot.
7. Select the Connect button to establish the connection to the remote system. If successful, the
Disconnect button becomes active.
Note The Map Network Drive button is also accessible in the “Connect USB and Network Drives” dialog window
that appears when pressing the Eject key on the alphanumeric keyboard.
Note If there is an error during the connection, a warning message appears inside the dialog. In this case, please
verify the data in the dialog.
Note If there already is a connection to the remote server, the Connect button is grayed. To change the existing
connection, first click on Disconnect and then enter the new settings.
Warning
Please make sure that the server you are connecting to is trustworthy and reliable. For details, contact your
local system administrator.
If you backup archive data to this server, all the patients demographic data will be copied to this server!

Setup Instructions
3.13.8 InSite Configuration
Prerequisites for InSite Setup

If not already available, collect the following information from the hospital network administrator:
1. Proxy Server, if necessary
__________ / __________ / __________ / __________ and Port ________
2. Proxy Authentication, if necessary
User ____________________________________ and Password
_________________________________________
Configuration Steps
At EC330 (BT18) systems the trackball functions are displayed in the trackball status area of the screen.
For fast access to the Configuration page move the cursor to

the InSite link (GE icon at the right bottom of the display screen)
and then press the upper trackball key.
1. Enter the Common Service Desktop (CSD).
Note There are different possibilities to access the Common Service Desktop and its available features; see
Section 5.12.2 "Service Platform - Access and Security" on page 5-48 .
2. Select the Configuration page, then double-click InSite ExC Agent Configuration (A).
Note This example shows fictional numbers!
Figure 3-59 Common Service Desktop - Configuration
3. Fill out at least all bold stated mandatory fields in the Agent Configuration section (B).
- The Device Name (pre-populated) and the CRM field have to be prefix KE6 or KE8 + systems
serial number without prefix letter; e.g. KE810026.
- Select Continent and Country from the pull-down menu.

Setup Instructions
- Enter City, State, Postal Code and Institution where the system resides.
4. Check settings in the Advanced Configuration section (C).
- Enterprise Server - PRODUCT
- Service Center - EURO
- Log Level - WARN
Further fields should be pre-populated and should not be modified. However, please ensure correct
setting.
- Enterprise Server URL - pre-populated URL
- Enterprise Tunnel URL - pre-populated URL
- File Repository - This path is set by engineering and must not be changed!
- File Watcher - Should always be Enabled!
- Dir - D:\export
- Filter - ensure that this field has the entry "*.zip"
5. Enter Proxy Configuration (D).
a. If the customer site does not require a Proxy server, select Disable from the Proxy pull-down
menu and continue with step 7.
b. If a Proxy server is available, select Enable from the Proxy pull-down menu, enter a valid Proxy
IP Address and Port number.
Note The information MUST be properly entered, otherwise remote control does not work. There is no possibility
to detect proxy server information automatically.
6. Click the Submit Changes button (E) and then close the page.
7. Reboot the system.
8. Reenter the Common Service Desktop (CSD).
9. Confirm that Service Connectivity is "Configured" and "Checked Out" in the Home page.
If the system indicates "Checked Out" you can be confident that the system has registered correctly. If
required, verify further connectivity (e.g., remote connectivity using your account) .
10. Close the page and check/create InSite permanent user setting; see Section 3.13.8.1 on page 3-71 .
3.13.8.1 How to create an InSite permanent User

An InSite permanent user is required for automatic system error reporting to the digital service network.
1.
Move the cursor to the InSite link (GE icon) at the right bottom of the display screen and press the left trackball
key (= left-click). The “Contact GE” form is displayed.
2. Ensure that Connection is "Checked Out" (1).
Figure 3-60 Contact GE
3. Select Users on the top menu (2).

Setup Instructions
4. In the next screen click Add User (3).
Figure 3-61 Add User
5. Fill in the required information and confirm with Add User (4).
Figure 3-62 confirm with Add User
6. Check mark the appropriate user and then click Set Default Machine Contact (5).
Figure 3-63 set User as Default
Color of the selected user turns from BLACK to RED (6). The permanent user is created.
7. Close the window.

Setup Instructions
3.14 Connectivity Setup Worksheet
Figure 3-64 Site System Information

Setup Instructions
Figure 3-65 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information

Setup Instructions
3.15 Paperwork
Note During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manual, Installation Manual,...) for the peripherals
must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user
information is available during the operation and service of the complete system.
3.15.1 Product Locater Installation Card
Note The provided Product Locater Installation Card may not be the same as shown in the Figure below.
Figure 3-66 Product Locater Installation Card
3.15.2 User Manual(s)
Check that the correct User Manual(s) for the system and software revision, is included with the installation.
Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available. Check with your GE Sales
Representative for availability.

Setup Instructions

Chapter 4
Functional Checks
This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of Voluson
E-Series system diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power
supply adjustments.

4.1 Required Equipments - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
4.2 General Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-2
4.3 Functional Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-7
4.4 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images - - - - - - - 4-10
4.5 Software Configuration Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-23
4.6 Peripheral Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-24
4.7 Mechanical Function Checks - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-25
4.8 Site Log - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-26
Note Most of the information pertaining to this Functional Checks chapter is found in the Voluson E-
Series Basic User Manual; see: Section 9.11 "System Manuals" on page 9-44 .

Functional Checks
4.1 Required Equipments

• An empty (blank) DVD/CD+R/RW and/or external USB device (stick or hard disk drive).
• At least one probe; see Section 9.12 "Probes" on page 9-49 for an overview. Usually you should
check all the probes used on the system
4.2 General Procedure

Caution
The system requires all covers. Do not operate the Voluson E-Series system unless all board covers and
frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance
and cooling purposes. When covers are removed, EMI may be present.
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA only).

Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the Power
Cable on the system.

Functional Checks
4.2.1 Power On / Boot Up
2. If not already done, screw on the pull-out protection of the mains power cable with the 2 screws.
3. Connect the main power cable to a hospital grade power outlet with the proper rated voltage. Never
use an adapter that would defeat the safety ground.
4. Switch ON the circuit breaker at the rear of the system.
1 circuit breaker
Note When AC power is applied to the system, the ON/OFF standby button on the control console illuminates
amber, indicating that the system (including the Back-end Processor) is in standby mode.
5. Hold down the ON/OFF standby button (see: Figure 4-2 below) on the control console for ~3 seconds.
standby button. The power switch of any attached printer(s) needs to be in ON position before starting the
system. However, be aware some auxiliary equipment may switch itself to standby mode (e.g., Color video
printer) and must therefore be switched on separately.
Figure 4-2 ON/OFF standby button
As soon as the software has been loaded, the system enters 2D-Mode with the probe and application that
were used before the system shutdown. Total time used for start-up is about 2 minutes.

Functional Checks
4.2.2 Power Off / Shutdown
1. If not already in read mode, freeze the image.
2. Press the ON/OFF Standby button on the control console. Following dialog appears.
Figure 4-3 Shutdown dialog
3. Select Shutdown. The system performs an automatic full shutdown sequence.

4. Switch OFF the circuit breaker at the rear of the system.
Note A full shutdown is also performed when pressing the ON/OFF standby button on the control console twice.
Warning
Disconnection of the main power cable is necessary!
5. After complete power down, unscrew the 2 screws and remove the pull-out protection to disconnect the
main power cable from the system or unplug it from the AC wall outlet socket.
1 circuit breaker
6. Press on the brakes to block the front caster wheels.

7. Disconnect probes. (Turn the probe locking handle counterclockwise and then pull the connector
straight out of the probe port.)
Caution
Do not disconnect a probe while running (Live Scan “Write” mode)! A software error may occur. In this case
switch the system OFF (perform a reset).

Functional Checks
4.2.3 System Features
4.2.3.1 Control Console
Figure 4-5 Control Console Tour
1 Touch Panel screen 8 Trackball and Trackball keys
2 Touch Panel rotary/push/flip controls 9 lamp on/off
3 Mode keys on/off (push), Gain (rotate) 10 button for control console rotation
X,Y,Z rotary controls in 3D/4D Volume Mode
4 Foc.Depth (flip), B-Image Angle (rotate), Foc.Zones (push) 11 buttons for control console height adjustment
5 Zoom Box on/off (push), Zoom Size (rotate), B-Image Depth 12 Voluson Logo
(flip)
6 Remote control P-keys (programmable) 13 alphanumeric keyboard and F1 key (to invoke EUM)
7 Freeze / Run key 14 ON/OFF Standby power button

Functional Checks
4.2.3.2 Touch Panel
Figure 4-6 Touch Panel - Main Menu
1 Main, Sub and Cine menu of the selected mode.
2 Shows all presets for the active application; the active one is highlighted.
3 Functions and display options supported by the selected Mode.
4 Settings which can be adjusted by the combination rotary/push/flip controls adjacent to the Touch Panel.
The functionality of these controls changes, depending upon the currently displayed menu.
5 Additional Operating Modes and applications such as TGC Sliders, etc.
Note Different menus are displayed depending on which Touch Panel Menu and which Mode is selected.

Functional Checks
4.3 Functional Checks

For basic functional checks of different modes, measurements, calculations etc. refer to the Voluson E-
Series Basic User Manual.
Note Some software may be considered standard depending upon system configuration. If any Modes or Options
are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted.
Note Different menus are displayed depending on which Touch Panel Menu and which Mode is selected.
Note Some function keys only appear on the Touch Panel if they are available for the selected probe.

Functional Checks
4.3.1 Patient Archive (Image Management)
The Voluson E-Series provides an Patient/Image Management System that allows fast and extremely easy
patient, exam and image management.
Current Patient:
The entered patient data will be used in calculations, patient worksheets, DICOM settings and is displayed
on the screen to identify images.
Archive:
The patient archive database is used for searching a particular exam and/or patient. Via the Data Transfer
button, it is possible to send images over the DICOM network, print exams/images, export exams/images,
import exams/images, etc.
Image History:
Image History gives you access to all the US pictures and exams of a particular patient.
Exam Review:
Exam Review allows you to view all exams of a particular patient. Additionally it is possible to view image
properties, input comments and voice annotations, etc.
Note Images can also be backed up and restored by means of the Image Archive function in the System Setup.
Operation see Section 4.4.6 on page 4-20 .

Functional Checks
4.3.2 Erasing DVD/CD

3. On the right side of the screen select Connectivity and then click the Drives tab.
Figure 4-7 Setup - Connectivity - DRIVES page

4. Click the Erase CD button to displays the “Erase DVD/CD” window.
Figure 4-8 Erase DVD/CD Window

5. Click the OK button to start the process.
6. When erasing is finished, select Exit to return to scan mode.

Functional Checks
4.4 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images

Note It is highly recommended to Backup the Full System Configuration (Section 4.4.3 on page 4-15 ) and the
Image Archive (Section 4.4.6 on page 4-20 ) once a week.
3. On the right side of the screen select Backup and then click the System Configuration tab.
Figure 4-9 Setup - Backup - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION page
1 Full System Configuration
2 Small Backup (Scan Settings)
The System Configuration page is subdivided in 2 main groups:

1. Small Backup (Scan Settings)
- "Save Small Backup (Scan Settings)" on page 4-11
- "Load Small Backup (Scan Settings)" on page 4-12
2. Full System Configuration
- "Save Full System Configuration (Full Backup)" on page 4-15
- "Load Full System Configuration (Full Backup)" on page 4-17
- "Delete Full System Configuration (Full Backup)" on page 4-19
Settings and/or Full System Configuration can be saved to the following destinations:
• D: partition of internal hard disk
• DVD/CD+R/RW
• Mapped Network Drive, see: Section 3.13.7 on page 3-69 .
• Any other drive connected to the system (e.g.; USB-Stick or external hard disk drive)
Note: This function is only available in the Full Backup utility. For further details review: Section 3.5.15
"General Remarks when using external USB-Devices" on page 3-35 .

Functional Checks
4.4.1 Save Small Backup (Scan Settings)
The Image/Scan Settings contain:

• 2D Factory and 2D User Presets
• 3D/4D Factory and 3D/4D User Presets
• Annotation Presets
• Scan Assistant Configuration
• Measure Configuration
• Biopsy Lines
1. Insert a DVD/CD+R/RW into the drive or connect an external USB device.
5. Click the Save button (1) of the "Small Backup (Scan Settings)" group.
Figure 4-10 Save window
6. Choose the media (2) and click the Save button (3).
7. Select the New File... key and enter a file name (without extension).
8. Click the OK key to start the process. When the saving has been completed, click OK.

Functional Checks
4.4.2 Load Small Backup (Scan Settings)
The loading procedure overwrites existing image/scan settings on the local hard drive.
Make sure to insert the correct System DVD. Additionally you can load the image settings from “D:
\UserSettings”.
4.4.2.1 Preparations
1. Insert a DVD/CD+R/RW into the drive or connect an external USB device.
5. Click the Load button (1) of the "Small Backup (Scan Settings)" group.
Figure 4-11 Load window
6. Choose the media (2) and click the Load button (3).
Note If it is desired to load settings from media Internal HDD, click on the Change folder button, browse for the
folder on “D:\usersettings” and then click the Load button.
7. Select the appropriate file and click OK.
8. Select the desired loading procedure:
- "Load "Complete Backup"" on page 4-13
- "Load only parts of the "Complete Backup"" on page 4-14

Functional Checks
4.4.2.2 Load "Complete Backup"

Note The "Complete Backup" contains factory default settings that are adapted for the installed Application
Software version.
1. Perform "Preparations" on page 4-12 .
2. Select the "Complete Backup" (1) (see figure below) and click the [>>] button (2) to copy it into the
Load Data field.
Figure 4-12 Load Backup Data
3. Click the Load button (3) to start the loading procedure of the complete backup into the system.
The US Application Software restarts.

Functional Checks
4.4.2.3 Load only parts of the "Complete Backup"

Note Following procedure should be used, if the user has saved own 2D/3D/4D Presets or Annotation entries, but
new settings (presets) have to be added to match the installed Application Software version (e.g., 2D/3D/4D
Factory Presets for new probe, etc.).
1. Perform "Preparations" on page 4-12 .
2. Click the [+] sign next to “Complete Backup” (1) to open the content tree.
Figure 4-13 Load settings
3. For example: Click the [+] sign and copy the desired content by clicking the [>>] button; and so on ....
Note To return selected items from the “Load Data” field to “Backup Data” field select the [<<] button.
4. Confirm selection with the Load button (3).
Settings will be loaded and the US Application Software restarts.

Functional Checks
4.4.3 Save Full System Configuration (Full Backup)
A backup of the Full System Configuration always contains the following data
• User Settings (databases and files containing User Programs, 2D/3D/4D Presets, gray curves etc.)
• System Settings (general "Setup" settings such as Language, Time/Date format, Button configuration,
Annotation settings, Biopsy lines, Peripheral data, Video Norm, Archive configuration, etc.)
• Measure Configuration (user specific measure setup settings)
• User Authentication Data (User Authentication Configuration (user names, group names), LDAP
configuration, audit trail configuration,...)
• Patient Archive (database containing patient demographic exam data and measurements) - no images
• V830 Settings (Options resp. Permanent Key that is specific for enabled software options and Demo
Key)
• Image Transfer Configuration (DICOM configuration e.g., DICOM servers, AE Title, Station Name, etc.)
• Network Configuration (Network settings: IP address, Network Profiles, e-mail configuration, network
printer, network drives, computer name)
• Service Platform (state of the Service Software)
Note It is recommended to “Full Backup” system configuration data before upgrading the software and/or image
settings (presets). This ensures that if settings need to be reloaded, will be the same ones the customer was
using prior to service.
4. Click the Save button of the "Full System Configuration" group.
5. Choose the destination (1).
Figure 4-14 System Configuration Save
6. Enter the description of the Full Backup (2).
Note Image data will not be backed up! To backup the Image Archive, refer to Section 4.4.6 on page 4-20 .
7. Click the Next button (3).
8. To start the backup process click Yes.
After copying the data, the Voluson E-Series reboots and the application starts again.
When the “Full Backup” is saved on a network drive it may be desirable to move the data (e.g., for backup or
maintenance). To map a network drive see Section 3.13.7 on page 3-69 .
The backups reside in sub folders of the main “fullbackup” -folder found at the root of the drive.
For Example: Backups on the mapped Network Drive are below path Z:\fullbackup.
The directory structure of the full backup data is as follows:

Functional Checks
The sub folders have the names fbX where X is a number (e.g.,
Z:\fullbackup\fb1).
The data resides within a directory structure within these sub
folders. It is possible to move the fbX sub folders, even leaving
gaps in the numeration sequence.
However, NO change MUST be made to the contents of the fbX
folders itself, otherwise the backup data cannot be restored!
If the destination „Other drive“ is selected, the available drives (e.g., external
USB-memory stick) can be chosen from the pull-down menu.
Note When the backup is saved to an external USB-device, the system has to be informed about the removal of
the hardware. For this purpose every last dialog of "Full Backup Save" and "Full Backup Delete" has a Stop
USB Devices button.
Figure 4-15 Please stop USB Devices before unplugging!
For further details see Section 3.5.15 "General Remarks when using external USB-Devices" on page 3-35 .

Functional Checks
4.4.4 Load Full System Configuration (Full Backup)
Caution
It is recommended to backup data before an upgrade; see Section 4.4.3 on page 4-15 .
The “Full Backup” loading procedure replaces (overwrites) ALL existing data (except Application Settings
adapted for the used system software version) on the local hard drive of the Voluson E-Series system!
Note It is neither required nor advisable to reload a previously stored “Full Backup” after a software upgrade that
was performed by means of the FMI from DVD button!
Note There are circumstances where it is not possible to load (restore) all the data. The following rules specify
these restrictions:
1. Generally, only restoring data from an older to a newer software version is possible. Loading a backup
into a system that has a lower software version than the system the backup was created on is
prohibited.
2. Options can only be restored on the same Voluson E-Series system within the same major software
version.
3. When loading a backup into a system with a software version that has a higher major number (e.g.,
15.x.x -> 16.x.x -> 17.x.x), the following items will not be restored:
- Options
- State of the Service Platform
4. The user is only allowed to restore data to a different system if and only if the software version on this
system is the same as in the backup.
5. The user is not allowed to restore the following items to a different system:
- Windows Network Settings
- Options
- DICOM AE Title and DICOM Station Name
- State of the Service Platform
Operation
4. Click the Load button of the "Full System Configuration" group.
Figure 4-16 System Configuration Load

Functional Checks
6. Click on the backup to be restored (2). Additional information is displayed in the table.
7. Select the Next button (3).
The following window will be displayed.
Figure 4-17 Select data to be restored
8. Select the data to be restored to the Voluson E-Series system.
Note For description of the check box names see Section 4.4.3 on page 4-15 .
Note When User Authentication Data is checked, a dialog asking for the system administration password appears.
Enter the correct password and click OK. Select Cancel to close the dialog. (The User Authentication Data
check box becomes unchecked.)
9. Click the Next button and then select Yes to start, or No to cancel the restore procedure.
Caution
When clicking Yes, the current data on the system will be permanently replaced by the data of the backup
and can not be restored!
Figure 4-18 Start Restore Backup now?
After restoring the data, the Voluson E-Series reboots and the application starts again.

Functional Checks
4.4.5 Delete Full System Configuration (Full Backup)

4. Click the Delete button of the "Full System Configuration" group.
Figure 4-19 System Configuration Delete
6. Click on the backup to be deleted (2). Additional information is displayed in the table.
7. Select the Delete button (3).
Caution
There is no "Undo" function for this action!!!

Functional Checks
4.4.6 Archiving Images
Note It is highly recommended to Backup the Full System Configuration (Section 4.4.3 on page 4-15 ) and the
Image Archive (Section 4.4.6 on page 4-20 ) once a week.
4.4.6.1 Save Image Archive

Note A backup of the Image Archive always contains the Patient Archive (database containing patient
demographic data and measurements) + images of the selected exams.
3. On the right side of the screen select Backup and then click the Image Archive tab.
Figure 4-20 Setup - Backup - IMAGE ARCHIVE page
4. Click the Save button (2).
Figure 4-21 Image Archive Save - preparations
5. Choose archiving span time from the pull-down menu (2).
Note If for example “All images older than” 1 Day is chosen (see: Figure 4-21 on page 4-20 ), images of the
current day will not be archived! However, if you click the [Advanced] button you can put this right.
6. If desired, check mark “Remove Local Images after Backup” (3).
7. Click the Advanced button (1) if it is desired to adapt archive data.

Functional Checks
Figure 4-22 Image Archive Save - choose destination

10. Enter the description of the backup (6).
Note Voluson E-Series presets, configurations and image settings will not be backed up! To Backup the Full
System Configuration see Section 4.4.3 on page 4-15 .
12. To start the backup process click Yes.

Functional Checks
4.4.6.2 Load Image Archive

3. On the right side of the screen select Backup and then click the Image Archive tab.
4. Click the Load button.
Figure 4-23 Image Archive Load - choose destination

6. Click on the backup to be restored (2). Additional information is displayed in the table.
7. Select the Next button (3). The following window will be displayed.
Figure 4-24 select image archive data to be restored
8. Select (check mark) the image archive data to be restored to the Voluson E-Series system (4).
9. Select the Next button (5) and then select Yes to start, or No to cancel the restore procedure.

Functional Checks
4.5 Software Configuration Checks
4.5.1 Setup

3. On the right side of the screen select the desired major group.
Each major group contains different pages to check.
Note Almost all settings have to be assigned as desired and required by the customer. After completion, return the
equipment to the customer and ensure acceptance.
General Settings
Step Page + Task Expected Result(s)
1 General: Check Date and Time setting Date and Time are correct
2 General: Check that Clinic Name is correct Clinic Name (location) is correct
3 General: Check Language settings desired System / EUM Language is displayed
Assign all (further) settings as desired and required by the customer.
Administration
1 Options: Check that all options are set up correct D = Demo , I = Inactive , P = Permanent
Connectivity
1 Peripherals: Check the Video Norm standard as setting assigned as required for the country
described in Section 3.7.1.6 on page 3-45 .
2 Device Setup: Check DICOM, Archive and Network settings assigned as desired and required by the
configuration nodes (e.g., TCP/IP, WLAN, EMAIL, etc.) customer
Backup
not applicable
Imaging Pesets
Biopsy
not applicable
Measure

Functional Checks
4.6 Peripheral Checks

Check that peripherals work as described below:
Table 4-1 Peripheral Checks
1 Press the Freeze key. Stop image acquisition.
2 Press the remote key (P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 or P6), The image displayed on the screen is printed on the
which is assigned to the BW printer. Black & White printer.
3 Press the remote key (P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 or P6), The image displayed on the screen is printed on the
which is assigned to the color printer. Color printer.
4 Press the remote key (P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 or P6), Recording starts/stops.
which is assigned to recorder control.
Verify basic operations of further auxiliary devices.
4.6.1 ECG Check Out
Connect the ECG preamplifier and check:
Table 4-2 Peripheral Checks
1 Press the Utilities key on the control console and then It will display a curve along the bottom edge of the
touch the ECG button to display the “ECG” menu. image sector.

Functional Checks
4.7 Mechanical Function Checks
4.7.1 Control Console Positioning
The control console can be rotated, translated and adjusted in height (electronically only).
Note For further details refer to Section 5.10.3 on page 5-46 and/or Section 6.3 on page 6-4 .
4.7.2 Brakes and Direction (Swivel) Locks
Check the brakes and swivel locks function as described below.
Table 4-3 Brakes and Direction (Swivel) Lock
Step Task Expected Result(s)
Caster "Steinco" Caster universal "Tente"
1 swivel lock engaged
brakes and swivel lock

2
released
brakes and swivel lock

3
engaged (=full lock)

Functional Checks
4.8 Site Log

Table 4-4 Voluson E-Series - Site Log (Paper Documentation)
Date Service Person Problem Comments

Chapter 5
Components and Functions (Theory)
This chapter explains Voluson E-Series system concepts, component

arrangement, and subsystem function. It also describes the Power Distribution
System (PDS) and probes.

5.1 General information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-2
5.2 FrontEnd Processor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-23
5.3 BackEnd Processor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-25
5.4 Internal I/O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-27
5.5 Control Console (User Interface) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-35
5.6 Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-39
5.7 External I/O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-40
5.8 Peripherals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-42
5.9 Power Distribution - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-44
5.10 Mechanical Descriptions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-45
5.11 Air Flow Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-47
5.12 Service Platform - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-48
5.13 Common Service Desktop (CSD) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-49
5.14 Service Page - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-50
5.15 Boot Screen Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53

5.1 General information

Voluson E-Series is a digital beamforming curved-, linear- and phased array ultrasound imaging system. It
has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and Phono.
• EC300/EC310 (BT15/BT16): any 3 probes may be connected at the same time (+ 1 pencil CW probe)
• EC320/EC330 (BT17/BT18): any 4 probes may be connected at the same time
5.1.1 Description of Operating Modes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-6
5.1.2 Block diagram Voluson E-Series - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-9
5.1.3 Data Flow Control Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-10
5.1.4 Description of Software Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-12
5.1.5 Description of Hardware Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-21
5.1.6 Data Location - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-22
Figure 5-1 Voluson E-Series - Major Components
1 Monitor arm (fully adjustable) 8 12.1“ Touch Panel display
2 DVD+(R)W drive 9 Control Console incl. Alphanumeric keyboard,

Hardkeys and Encoders/Joycoders
3 ON/OFF Standby button 10 Control Console Movement buttons
4 holder for Endocavity probe 11 Front Handle
5 Probe cable holder 12 Place for peripherals (e.g., ECG, printer,...)
6 Probe connectors incl. CW and probe storage connector (left 13 Footrest

- not active for scanning)
7 23“ Widescreen LED Monitor 14 Front Caster wheels (lockable)

The system can be used for:

• 2D Mode Imaging and additional Operating Modes (B-Flow, XTD-View, Contrast Imaging, etc.)
• Color Doppler Imaging (CFM, PD, TD and HD-Flow)
• M Mode + MCFM Imaging
• Doppler (PW, CW)
• 3D Mode and Real Time 4D Imaging
• Different combinations of the above modes
Among other significant features of the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system are the following:
• Integrated FrontEnd (uses advanced ASIC and FGPA technologies)
• Open connectivity using USB ports
• Bluetooth - wireless connectivity
• high-resolution 23" LCD Flat panel monitor with LED display
• Low profile, backlit Keyboard
Voluson E-Series has a digital beam forming system (incorporated in the FrontEnd) which can handle up to
256 element probes by use of multiplexing.
Signal flow from the Probe Connector Panel, to the FrontEnd (FE) Electronics, to the BackEnd Processor
(BEP), and finally is displayed on the LCD monitor and peripherals.
Voluson E-Series internal electronics are divided into three:
• FrontEnd (FE)
• BackEnd Processor (BEP)
• Power Supply Unit
Interconnecting signals from FrontEnd, BackEnd, keyboard, monitor, and power distribution sub-systems are
routed internally.
Major System Components
• FrontEnd processor: Section 5.2 on page 5-23

• BackEnd processor: Section 5.3 on page 5-25
• Control Console (User interface); System I/O with hard keys, Touch Panel and EL-Display: Section 5.5
on page 5-35
• Monitor: Section 5.6 on page 5-39
• External I/O: Section 5.7 on page 5-40
• Peripherals: Section 5.8 on page 5-42
• Power supply and Isolation transformer for the peripherals, Section 5.9 on page 5-44
• System mechanical chassis: trolley to keep all major components, Section 5.10 on page 5-45

Figure 5-2 Basic Block diagram of Voluson E-Series
Note *) there are 2 variants: RTT/RTH6x (2 boards) or RTH50 only (1 board)

**) there are 2 variants: GES30/RTV30 (2 boards) or GES35 only (1 board)
***) EC320 (BT17) and EC330 (BT18) do not have RSX Extension board

The Voluson E-Series used digital beamforming technology which provides high resolution and high
penetration performance. It is a general purpose, mobile, software controlled diagnostic ultrasound system.
Its function is to acquire ultrasound data and to display the data of different modes gives the operator the
ability to measure anatomical structures and offers analysis packages that provide information that is used to
make a diagnosis by competent health care professionals.
The Calculation and Report function supports following application packages:
• Abdominal (ABD)
• Obstetrical and Fetal Echo (OB)
• Gynecological (GYN)
• Small Parts and Breast (SM P)
• Vascular (VAS)
• Pediatrics (PED)
• Transrectal (TR)
• Cardiology (CARD)
• Cephalic (CEPH)
• Musculoskeletal (MSK)
The Voluson E-Series supports a variety of linear-, curved-, phased array and pencil CW probes for various
clinical applications.
Any 3 probes may be connected at the same time (+ 1 pencil CW probe).
Medical application fields include:
• Obstetrics
• Gynecology and Fertility
• Radiology
• Internal Medicine
• Neurology
• Cardiology
• Oncology
• Urology
• Orthopedics
• Pediatrics
The system is designed for follow-up expansion.
In addition to the initial operational settings for each probe preprogrammed in the system, user-customized
parameter settings for each probe may be inserted by the operator and stored for recall as needed via the
system control console. System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is
loaded from the hard drive on power up.
Biopsy guidelines are provided on screen to assist in the collection of tissue samples, using biopsy guide
adapters offered as an optional accessory.
The system provides the ability to perform remote viewing of images without compression, via DICOM 3.0
compatible output. Management of patient history is possible by image-filing function. High-resolution images
are provided by utilizing a technology called digital dynamic receive focusing.
For more detailed explanations of functions and controls refer to the Voluson E-Series Basic User Manual.

5.1.1 Description of Operating Modes
5.1.1.1 B-Mode or 2D-Mode

B-Mode or 2D-mode is a two-dimensional image of the amplitude of the echo signal. It is used for location
and measurement of anatomical structures and for spatial orientation during operation of other modes. In
2D-mode, a two-dimensional cross-section of a three-dimensional soft tissue structure such as the heart is
displayed in real time. Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale or color
values in the display. The outline of the 2D cross-section may be a rectangle, parallelogram, sector or 360-
degree circle, depending on the transducer used. 2D-mode can be used in combination with any other mode.
5.1.1.1.1 Coded Harmonic Imaging (HI)

In Harmonic Imaging, acoustic aberrations due to tissue are minimized by receiving and processing the
second harmonic signal that is generated within the insonified tissue. Voluson E-Series high performance HI
provides superb detail resolution and penetration, outstanding contrast resolution, excellent acoustic clutter
rejection and an easy to operate user interface. Coded Harmonics enhances near field resolution for
improved small parts imaging as well as far field penetration. It diminishes low frequency amplitude noise
and improves imaging technically difficult patients. It may be especially beneficial when imaging isoechoic
lesions in shallow-depth anatomy in the breast, liver and hard-to-visualize fetal anatomy. Coded Harmonics
may improve the B-Mode image quality without introducing a contrast agent.
5.1.1.1.2 XTD-View
XTD-View (Extended View) provides the ability to construct and view a static 2D image which is wider than
the field of view of a given probe. This feature allows viewing and measurement of anatomy that is larger
than what would fit in a single image. XTD-View constructs the extended image from individual image frames
as the operator slides the probe along the surface of the skin in direction of the scan plane. Examples
include scanning of vascular structures and connective tissues in the arms and legs.
5.1.1.1.3 B-Flow
B-Flow is especially intuitive when viewing blood flow, for acute thrombosis, parenchymal flow and jets. It
helps to visualize complex hemodynamics and highlights moving blood in tissue. B-Flow is less angle
dependent, no velocity aliasing artifacts, displays a full field of view and provides better resolution when
compared with Color-Doppler Mode. It is therefore a more realistic (intuitive) representation of flow
information, allowing to view both high and low velocity flow at the same time.
5.1.1.1.4 Coded Contrast Imaging (optional)

For details see: Section 5.1.4.7 "Coded Contrast Imaging" on page 5-16 .
5.1.1.1.5 Elastography (optional)

For details see: Section 5.1.4.8 "Elastography" on page 5-16 .
5.1.1.2 M-Mode
In M-mode, soft tissue structure is presented as scrolling display, with depth on the Y-axis and time on the X-
axis. It is used primarily for cardiac measurements such as value timing on septal wall thickness when
accurate timing information is required. M-mode is also known as T-M mode or time-motion mode.
Ultrasound echoes of different intensities are mapped to different gray scale values in the display. M-mode
displays time motion information of the ultrasound data derived from a stationary beam. Depth is arranged
along the vertical axis with time along the horizontal axis. M-mode is normally used in conjunction with a 2D
image for spatial reference. The 2D image has a graphical line (M-line) superimposed on the 2D image
indicating where the M-mode beam is located.
5.1.1.2.1 MCFM Mode (M Mode + Color Flow Mode)

Color Flow Mode and Color M Mode are Doppler modes intended to add color-coded qualitative information
concerning the relative velocity and direction of fluid motion within the 2D mode or M mode image. Color
Flow overlays color on the M mode trace using velocity and variance color maps. The Color Flow wedge
overlays the 2D mode image and M mode timeline.

5.1.1.3 Color Doppler Modes

Color Doppler is used to detect motion presented as a two-dimensional display. There are following
applications of this technique:
• Color Flow Mode (C) - used to visualize blood flow velocity and direction
• Power Doppler (PD) - used to visualize the spatial distribution of blood
• Bi-Directional Angio (HD-Flow) - used to visualize flow direction with spatial resolution and low artifact
visibility
• Tissue Doppler (TD) - used to visualize tissue motion direction and velocity
5.1.1.3.1 Color Flow Mode

A real-time two-dimensional cross-section image of blood flow is displayed. The 2D cross-section is
presented as a full color display, with various colors being used to represent blood flow (velocity, variance,
power and/or direction). Often, to provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-section is overlaid
on top of the grayscale cross-section of soft tissue structure (2D echo). For each pixel in the overlay, the
decision of whether to display color (Doppler), gray scale (echo) information or a blended combination is
based on the relative strength of return echoes from the soft tissue structures and from the red blood cells.
Blood velocity is the primary parameter used to determine the display colors, but power and variance may
also used. A high pass filter (wall filter) is used to remove the signals from stationary or slowly moving
structures. Tissue motion is discriminated from blood flow by assuming that blood is moving faster than the
surrounding tissue, although additional parameters may also be used to enhance the discrimination. Color
flow can be used in combination with 2D and Spectral Doppler modes as well as with 3D mode.
5.1.1.3.2 Power Doppler

A real-time two dimensional cross-section of blood flow is displayed. The 2D cross-section is presented as a
full color display, with various colors being used to represent the power in blood flow echoes. Often, to
provide spatial orientation, the full color blood flow cross-section is overlaid on top of the gray scale cross-
section of soft tissue structure (2D echo). For each pixel in the overlay, the decision of whether to display
color (Doppler power), gray scale (echo) information or a blended combination is based on the relative
strength of return echoes from the soft-tissue structures and from the red blood cells. A high pass filter (wall
filter) is used to remove the signals from stationary or slowly moving structures. Tissue motion is
discriminated from blood flow by assuming that blood is moving faster than the surrounding tissue, although
additional parameters may also be used to enhance the discrimination. The power in the remaining signal
after wall filtering is then averaged over time (persistence) to present a steady state image of blood flow
distribution. Power Doppler can be used in combination with 2D and Spectral Doppler modes as well as with
3D mode.
5.1.1.3.3 Bi-Directional Angio (HD-Flow Mode)

Directional Power Doppler is a Power Doppler mode incorporating the flow direction (much like Color
Doppler) into the displayed image. The focus of the settings for Directional Power Doppler is for high spatial
resolution and low artifact visibility, allowing vessels to be seen with less blooming and finer detail.
5.1.1.3.4 Tissue Doppler

The Tissue Color Doppler Imaging is used for color encoded evaluation of heart movements. The TD image
provides information about tissue motion direction and velocity.
5.1.1.4 Pulsed (PW) Doppler

PW Doppler processing is one of two spectral Doppler modalities, the other being CW Doppler. In spectral
Doppler, blood flow is presented as a scrolling display, with flow velocity on the Y-axis and time on the X-
axis. The presence of spectral broadening indicates turbulent flow, while the absence of spectral broadening
indicates laminar flow. PW Doppler provides real time spectral analysis of pulsed Doppler signals. This
information describes the Doppler shifted signal from the moving reflectors in the sample volume. PW
Doppler can be used alone but is normally used in conjunction with a 2D image with an M-line and sample
volume marker superimposed on the 2-D image indicating the position of the Doppler sample volume. The
sample volume size and location are specified by the operator. Sample volume can be overlaid by a flow
direction cursor which is aligned, by the operator, with the direction of flow in the vessel, thus determining the
Doppler angle. This allows the spectral display to be calibrated in flow velocity (m/sec.) as well as frequency
(Hz). PW Doppler also provides the capability of performing spectral analysis at a selectable depth and
sample volume size. PW Doppler can be used in combination with 2D and Color Flow modes.

5.1.1.5 3D Imaging
The Voluson E-Series Ultrasound System will be used to acquire multiple, sequential 2D images which can
be combined to reconstruct a three dimensional image. These 3D images are useful in visualizing three-
dimensional structures, and in understanding the spatial or temporal relationships between the images in the
2D sequence. The 3D image is presented using standard visualization techniques, such as surface or
volume rendering.
5.1.1.6 3D Data Collection and Reconstruction

2D gray scale images including Color Flow or Power Doppler information may be reconstructed. The
acquisition of volume data sets is performed by sweeping 2D-scans with special transducers (called 3D-
transducers) designed for the 2D-scans and the 3D-sweep.
2D ultrasound imaging modes are used to view a two dimensional cross-sections of parts of the body. For
example in 2D gray scale imaging, a 2 dimensional cross-section of a 3-dimensional soft-tissue structure
such as the heart is displayed in real time. Typically, the user of an ultrasound machine manipulates the
position and orientation of this 2D cross-section in real time during an ultrasound exam.
By changing the position of the cross-section, a variety of views of the underlying structure are obtained, and
these views can be used to understand a 3-dimensional structure in the body.
To complete survey a 3-dimensional structure in the body, it is necessary to collect 2D images which span a
volume containing the structure. One way is to sweep the imaging cross-section by translating it in a
direction perpendicular to the cross-section. Another example method is to rotate the cross section about a
line contained in the cross section. The Voluson E-Series Ultrasound System uses the automated so called
C-Scan for the motion perpendicular to automated B-scan. Once a representative set of 2D cross-sections
are obtained, standard reconstruction techniques can be used to construct other 2D cross-sections, or to
view the collection of the cross-sections as a 3D images.
5.1.1.7 3D Image Presentation

Several techniques can be used to aid the human observer in understanding the resulting 2D image as a
representation of a three-dimensional object. One is to rotate the volume of data, and present the resulting
sequence of 2D projections to the observer. The changing direction of observation helps the observer to
separate the features in the volume according to their distance from the observer.
5.1.1.8 3D Rendering
The 3D (volume) rendering is a calculation process to visualize certain 3D-structures of a scanned volume by
means of a 2D-image. The gray value for each pixel of the 2D-image is calculated from the voxels along the
corresponding projection path (analyzing beam) through the volume. The render (calculation) algorithm,
surface or transparent mode, determines how 3D-structures are visualized.
Figure 5-3 Principle: Volume Rendering
1 Voxel 3 Projection Way 5 2D - Display
2 Pixel 4 Volume - Block

5.1.2 Block diagram Voluson E-Series
Figure 5-4 Voluson E-Series - Block diagram

5.1.3 Data Flow Control Description
This section describes the functions of the boards vs. different operation modes.
• RFM - (RF-Interface & Beamformer) FE Mainboard
• RSX - (Beamformer Receiver/Transmitter) Extension Board
• RTV - Video Management Board
5.1.3.1 B-Mode
1. IF-FPGA
The RFM contains the Clock-Management and PRF-Generator. It generates (drives) Shot-Trigger for
the BF-FPGAs. Configures the BF-FPGAs of RFM and RSX with Tx-Frequ, Tx-Focus, Rx-Focus,
LineNo (lateral Position), Tx- Apodisation, RX-Apodisation, Multibeam, etc.
Furthermore it contains Multibeam-DeInterleave, Subtraction Filter (for HI-Mode, see Section 5.1.3.1.1
"Special B-Mode Techniques" on page 5-10 , DC-Canceler, Mixer (Part of Demodulator),
LowPassFilter and Decimation (Pixel rate Conversion).
After DC-cancelling the signal is mixed with RX-Frequency and brought to LF-Spectrum, where the
LowPassFilter cuts HF. Mixer and Magnitude-Calculator arrange Complex Demodulation, and
Logarithmic Amplifier arrange the conversion from High-Dynamic LinearSignal to the Low-Dynamik(e.g.
8Bit) Log-Signal. Several postprocessing steps (LineFilter, FrameFilter, ReSample, Edge Enhance)
enable smooth image quality while keeping contrast high.
a. Direct Memory Access (DMA) section
B-mode data from RFM is written via Signal Processor (SP) Channel 0 into SDRAM Fifo Buffer
memory. DMA Controller 0 transfers the data into PC main memory where scan conversion is
performed per software. Cine Mode: Reserved area in PC main memory is used.
2. BF-FPGAs
Each BF-FPGA handles Rx/Tx of 64 channels. It controls 16 Tx-pulsers and 8 AFE ICs (i.e.: 32 Tx-
pulsers and 16 AFE ICs each on RFM and RSX board).
The AFE consists of Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), Rx-TGC-Amplifier, Signal-ADC. Each pulser can
support 4 Tx-channels, each AFE can support 8 Rx-channels.
- Tx-channel: The BF-FPGA generates Tx-Freq through dividing 200MHz by 2,3,4,5,... and Tx-
Focus.
- Rx-channel: The clock distribution generates Sample-Clocks for the ADC (50 MHz). The BF-
FPGA manages Rx-Focus (Delay and Chain-Adder) and Apodization.
3. RTV - Video section
Video Information is provided by the PC on the DVI (Digital Visual Interface) output connector. The
signal is connected to RTV, where the analog VGA signals for the monitor and standard video timing
outputs are generated.
5.1.3.1.1 Special B-Mode Techniques

1. HI (Coded Harmonic Imaging): In one method of HI the RX-Frequency is doubled, so that the radial
resolution is increased due to the higher RX-Frequency. The second method of HI is pulse-inversion,
that is handled by software: 2 TX-Beams are shot to the same Tissue-location, one with positive, one
with negative polarity. The subtraction of both shots (Subtraction Filter) brings to bear the nonlinear-
echo-reflection-properties of the tissue (especially in usage of Contrast-medias), which is very useful
with extremely difficult-to-image patients.
2. FFC (Frequency and Focus Composite): 2 or more TX-Beams are shot to the same Tissue-location.
The Beams have different TX-foci. By means of Blending (adaption of Brightnesses) they are
composed to one whole RX-Line.
3. XBeam CRI (CrossBeam - Compound Resolution Imaging): Does not need any special functions of
RFM. Image is composed of more than one different-direction-steered images. PC-calculated.
4. VCI (Volume Contrast Imaging): Does not need any special functions of RFM. Image is composed of
more than 2 small angle neighbored images. PC-calculated. (Only possible with 4D-Probes).

5.1.3.2 M-Mode
1. IF-FPGA
see: Section 5.1.3.1 "B-Mode" on page 5-10
5.1.3.3 D-Mode (Pulsed Wave- and Continuous Wave Doppler)

1. IF-FPGA
- PRF-generator; see: Section 5.1.3.1 "B-Mode" on page 5-10
- After DC-cancelling the signal is mixed with RX-Frequency and brought to LF-Spectrum, where
the LowPassFilter cuts HF. Mixer and Magnitude-Calculator arrange Complex Demodulation.
a. DMA section
I/Q-Data is transferred to the PC where FFT and scan conversion is performed per software, i.e.
the sweep image is generated (scaling and interpolation between lines).
5.1.3.4 CFM-Mode (Color Flow Mode)

1. IF-FPGA
- PRF-generator; see: Section 5.1.3.1 "B-Mode" on page 5-10
- After DC-cancelling the signal is mixed with RX-Frequency and brought to LF-Spectrum, where
the LowPassFilter cuts HF. Mixer and Magnitude-Calculator arrange Complex Demodulation.
5.1.3.5 3D-Mode (Freezes after one volume sweep)

5.1.3.6 Real Time 4D-Mode (Nonstop Volume Rendering)

5.1.3.7 XBeam CRI-Mode (CrossBeam Compound Resolution Imaging)

5.1.3.8 VCI-Mode (Volume Contrast Imaging)

5.1.3.9 Extern-Video-Mode (Display Video from V-Rec)

1. IF-FPGA
Not used for Signal-Processing
Analog input from an external video source (YC or CVBS) is converted to a digital RGB data stream by
a video decoder. It is mixed with the DVI video output from PC in an overlay unit (Chroma keying
mechanism). Generation of analog VGA signals for the monitor and standard video timing outputs
follows this block.

5.1.4 Description of Software Options
To activate the (purchasable) software options:

3. On the right side of the screen select Administration and then click the Options tab.
For an overview of available options, refer to:

• EC300/EC310 (BT15/BT16): Table 5-1 on page 5-13
• EC320/EC330 (BT17/BT18): Table 5-2 on page 5-14

Table 5-1 Software Options at EC300/EC310 (BT15/BT16)
BT15 BT16
(EC300) (EC310)
VE10
VE10
VE6
VE8
VE6
VE8
HCat # Software Option Description
H48681FM Advanced 4D (incl. Real time 4D, RT-4D Biopsy, Advanced 4D X X X X X X

VCI "Basic" and TUI),
H48691KK HDlive HDlive 1) S* - 1) S* -
H48691XZ HDlive Silhouette HDlive Silhouette - 1) S* - 1) S*
H48681FN VOCAL II VOCAL II - Virtual Organ Computer-aided Analysis 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
H48681FP Advanced VCI (VCI OmniView) Advanced VCI 2) 2) 2) 2) 2) 2)
H48681FT Contrast Imaging Coded Contrast Imaging X X X X X X
H48681FW Sono VCAD heart SonoVCAD heart - Computer Assisted Heart 1) - - 1) - -

Diagnosis
H48681FX SonoAVC SonoAVC - Sono Automated Volume Count 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
H48681FY SonoVCAD labor SonoVCAD labor 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
H48681FZ Anatomical M-Mode Anatomical M-Mode (AMM) X X X X X X
H48681GD Advanced STIC (incl. Basic STIC, STIC M-Mode Advanced STIC (Spatio-Temporal Image - 2) 2) - 2) 2)
and STIC flow) + SonoVCAD heart Correlation)
H48681FS STIC "Basic" STIC “Basic” (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation) 2) - - 2) - -
H48681GB Elastography (incl. Elastography Analysis) Elastography X X X X X X
H48681TK V-SRI V-SRI Advanced - Speckle Reduction Imaging - - 3) - - 3)
H48691YA eM6C - E4D Activation (incl. eSTIC) eM6C - E4D Activation (Advanced Features for - - X - - X
Electronic 4D Matrix-Probe)
H48691NZ CW-Doppler CW - Continuous Wave Doppler X X X X X X
H48691XF SW DVR SW DVR - Software Digital Video Recording X X X X X X
H48691KG RLS Option Russian Language Support X X X X X X
Legend:
X Optional Feature (separately purchasable)
- not available
S Standard Feature, S* can be used in 3D-Mode, but for 4D-Modes the option “Advanced 4D” has to be active as well
1) this 3D/4D option can be used in 3D-Mode, but for 4D-Modes the option “Advanced 4D” has to be active as well
2) this 4D option is only available if the option “Advanced” 4D is active as well
3) only with probe RM6C, RIC5-9-D, RIC6-12-D
4) Optional Feature, requires software version EC320 Ext.4 (17.0.4) or higher
R restricted, not yet released in all countries

Table 5-2 Software Options at EC320/EC330 (BT17/BT18)
BT17 BT18
(EC320) (EC330)
VE10
VE10
VE6
VE8
VE6
VE8
HCat # Software Option Description
H48681FM Advanced 4D (incl. Real time 4D, RT-4D Biopsy, Advanced 4D X X X X X X

VCI "Basic" and TUI)
H48691XZ HDlive Silhouette and Studio HDlive Silhouette and HDlive Studio - 1) S* - - -
H48701WU HDlive Silhouette HDlive Silhouette - - - 1) S* S*
H48701WW HDlive Studio HDlive Studio - - - - 1) S*
H48681FN VOCAL II VOCAL II - Virtual Organ Computer-aided Analysis 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
H48681FP Advanced VCI (VCI OmniView) Advanced VCI 2) 2) 2) 2) 2) 2)
H48681FT Contrast Imaging Coded Contrast Imaging X X X X X X
H48681FW Sono VCAD heart SonoVCAD heart - Computer Assisted Heart 1) - - 1) - -

Diagnosis
H48681FX SonoAVC SonoAVC - Sono Automated Volume Count 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
H48681FY SonoVCAD labor SonoVCAD labor 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
H48681FZ Anatomical M-Mode Anatomical M-Mode (AMM) X X X X X X
H48681GD Advanced STIC (incl. Basic STIC, STIC M-Mode Advanced STIC (Spatio-Temporal Image - 2) 2) - 2) 2)
and STIC flow) + SonoVCAD heart Correlation)
H48681FS STIC "Basic" STIC “Basic” (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation) 2) - - 2) - -
H48681GB Elastography (incl. Elastography Analysis) Elastography X X X X X X
H48681TK V-SRI V-SRI Advanced - Speckle Reduction Imaging - - 3) - - 3)
H48701WS SonoMetrium SonoMetrium - - - X X X
H48691YA eM6C - E4D Activation (incl. eSTIC) eM6C - E4D Activation (Advanced Features for - - X - - X
Electronic 4D Matrix-Probe)
H48691NZ CW-Doppler CW - Continuous Wave Doppler X X X X X X
H48691XF SW DVR SW DVR - Software Digital Video Recording X X X - - -
H48701WR DVD and USB Recorder DVD and USB Recorder - - - X X X
H48710UX Disk Encryption (LTD) Disk Encryption 4) 4) 4) - - -
H48701WM Advanced Security Features (incl. Disk Encryption Advanced Security Features - - - X X X
and Whitelisting)
H48691KG RLS Option Russian Language Support X X X X X X
- IOTA LR2 IOTA (International Ovarian Tumor Analysis) R R R R R R
H48701WP IOTA Simple Rules IOTA (International Ovarian Tumor Analysis) - - - X X X
Legend:
X Optional Feature (separately purchasable)
- not available
S Standard Feature, S* can be used in 3D-Mode, but for 4D-Modes the option “Advanced 4D” has to be active as well
1) this 3D/4D option can be used in 3D-Mode, but for 4D-Modes the option “Advanced 4D” has to be active as well
2) this 4D option is only available if the option “Advanced” 4D is active as well
3) only with probe RM6C, RIC5-9-D, RIC6-12-D

4) Optional Feature, requires software version EC320 Ext.4 (17.0.4) or higher
R restricted, not yet released in all countries
5.1.4.1 Advanced 4D
5.1.4.1.1 Real Time 4D

Real Time 4D mode is obtained through continuous volume acquisition and parallel calculation of 3D
rendered images. In Real Time 4D mode the volume acquisition box is at the same time the render box. All
information in the volume box is used for the render process. In Real Time 4D mode a “frame rate” of up 40
volumes/second is possible. By freezing the acquired volumes, size can be adjusted, manipulated manually
as known from the Voluson 3D Mode.
5.1.4.1.2 Real Time 4D Biopsy

For minimal invasive procedures like biopsies, ultrasound is a widely used method to visualize and guide the
needle during puncture. The advantage in comparison with other imaging methods is the real-time display,
quick availability and easy access to any desired region of the patient. 4D biopsy allows for real time control
of the biopsy needle in 3D multi-planar display during the puncture. The user is able to see the region of
interest in three perpendicular planes (longitudinal, transversal and frontal section) and can guide the biopsy
needle accurately into the center of the lesion.
5.1.4.1.3 VCI - Volume Contrast Imaging

Volume Contrast Imaging utilizes 4D transducers to automatically scan multiple adjacent slices and delivers
a real-time display of the ROI. This image results from a special rendering mode consisting of texture and
transparency information. VCI improves the contrast resolution and therefore facilitates finding of diffuse
lesions in organs. VCI has more information (from multiple slices) and is of advantage in gaining contrast
due to improved signal/noise ratio.
Static VCI is a part of the VCI option, which allow to apply the contrast enhancing VCI method to 3D data
sets after the acquisition.
5.1.4.1.4 T.U.I. - Tomographic Ultrasound Imaging

TUI is a new visualization mode for 3D and 4D data sets. The data is presented as slices through the data
set which are parallel to each other. An overview image, which is orthogonal to the parallel slices, shows
which parts of the volume are displayed in the parallel planes. This method of visualization is consistent with
the way other medical systems such as CT or MRI, present the data to the user. The distance between the
different planes can be adjusted to the requirements of the given data set. In addition it is possible to set the
number of planes. The planes and the overview image can also be printed to a DICOM printer, for easier
comparison of the ultrasound data with CT and/or MRI data.
5.1.4.2 HDlive
Most current surface reconstructions use an illumination frontal to the rendered object. This can cause the
image to look flat. HDlive Rendering uses an illumination source that can be positioned by the user around
the rendered 3D object on a spherical surface. By highlighting structures from the side, the three-
dimensional impression is improved considerably.
Note "HDlive" is part of the “Advanced 4D” option for Voluson E8 systems. At Voluson E6 systems it is optional
(separately purchasable). At Voluson E10 systems it is not available.
5.1.4.3 HDlive Silhouette

HDlive Silhouette is an enhancement of the currently available HDlive Surface Rendering feature. The
position of the virtual light source may be altered to get a natural display with an optimized depth impression.
To improve the impression even more, Silhouette (emphasizes the contours of surface structures), Light
Brightness (adjusts the brightness of the light source) and Shadow Softness (varies the shadow softness/
contrast) can be adapted.

5.1.4.4 HDlive Studio

HDlive Studio offers three independent light sources with three different light types (directional, point, spot)
and contains a special render function to visualize the amniotic fluid. The "Light Menu" enables the user to
switch the different light sources on/off, to select light types, change positions of the light sources and to
define and use complete sets of adjustments with preset buttons.
The light source positions are indicated with the help of a graphical icon situated in the right lower corner of
the rendered 3D or 4D image.
5.1.4.5 VOCAL II - Virtual Organ Computer-aided Analysis

Diagnosis and therapy of cancer is one of the most important issues in medical care. The VOCAL II -
Imaging program allows completely new possibilities in cancer diagnosis, therapy planning and follow-up
therapy control.
VOCAL II offers additional functions:
• Manual or Semi automatic Contour detection of structures (such as tumor lesion, cyst, prostate, etc.)
and subsequent volume calculation. The accuracy of the process can be visually controlled by the
examiner in multi-planar display.
• Construction of a virtual shell around the contour of the lesion. The wall thickness of the shell can be
defined. The shell can be imagined as a layer of tissue around the lesion, where the tumor
vascularization takes place.
• Automatic calculation of the vascularization within the shell by 3D color histogram by comparing the
number of color voxels to the number of grayscale voxels.
5.1.4.6 Advanced VCI
5.1.4.6.1 VCI Omni View - Volume Contrast Imaging (any plane)

More flexibility with Any Plane, VCI plane is freely selectable. Any shape can be drawn. Volumes from older
BT’s can be loaded and edited with VCI Omni View without any limitations.
• Volumes can be edited in all other Visualization Modes.
• Dual Format is now also possible in Render Mode and Sectional Planes Mode.
• VCI slice thickness can be set to zero.
5.1.4.7 Coded Contrast Imaging

Injected contrast agents re-emit incident acoustic energy at a harmonic frequency much more efficiently than
the surrounding tissue. Blood containing the contrast agent stands out brightly against a dark background of
normal tissue. Possible clinical uses are to detect and characterize tumors of the liver, kidney and pancreas
and to enhance flow signals in the determination of stenosis or thrombus.
5.1.4.8 Elastography
Elastography refers to the measurement of elastic properties of tissues, based on the well-established
principle that malignant tissue is harder than benign tissue.
Elastography shows the spatial distribution of tissue elasticity properties in a region of interest by estimating
the strain before and after tissue distortion caused by external or internal forces. The strain estimation is
filtered and scaled to provide a smooth presentation when displayed.
During scanning in the elastography mode, the examiner manually slightly compresses the tissue using the
ultrasound probe. A strain correlation (strain is the deformation of the tissue by compression) is continuously
performed for visual perception on the monitor.

5.1.4.8.1 Elastography Analysis

A selectable sequence of Elastography images are analyzed within a ROI (range of interest). The Strain %
or the Elasticity Index is displayed as curves over the time.
The mean value of the Strain % is measured within 1 or more ROI’s and Ratios are calculated. “Generic
Elasto” measurements are located in the generic measurement menu and are only available if
“Elastography” is activated.
5.1.4.9 SonoVCAD heart - Computer Assisted Heart Diagnosis

VCAD is a technology that automatically generates a number of views of the fetal heart to make diagnosis
easier. At this time it can help to find the right and left outflow tract of the heart and the fetal stomach.
Note “SonoVCAD heart” is part of the “Advanced STIC” option for Voluson E8 and Voluson E10 systems. At
Voluson E6 systems it is optional (separately purchasable).
5.1.4.10 SonoAVC - Sono Automated Volume Count

This feature can automatically detect low echogenic objects (e.g., follicles) in a volume of an organ (e.g.,
ovary) and analyze their shape and volume. From the calculated volume an average diameter can be
calculated. It also lists the objects according to their size.
• Each object can be calculated automatically.
• A description name can be defined for each object up to 10 descriptions. With the “Add to Report”
button all values of the measured objects can be sent to the worksheet. Also the description name will
be sent.
• The description name can be edited in the worksheet.
• If the number button is activated, all objects are assigned a number inside the displayed object
according to the measurement index.
• Group function: All objects will be added to one volume. The color of all objects will be changed to red
and the measurement will show only one result.
5.1.4.11 SonoVCAD labor

Allows the user to measure fetal progression during the second stage of labor – fetal head progression,
rotation and direction. Visual evidence and objective data of the labor process are provided.
All SonoVCAD labor measurements (Head direction, Midline Angle, Progression Distance, Progression
Angle and associated acquisition time) are automatically added to the worksheet, as soon as they are
performed. Only one measurement result is available for each measurement type. If the measurement is
repeated, the old result is replaced by the new result.
If a volume is deleted, the according measurements are not deleted from the worksheet.
SonoVCAD labor measurement data can be transferred via DICOM SR.
5.1.4.12 Anatomical M-Mode (AMM)

Anatomical M-Mode displays a distance/time plot from a cursor line, which can be defined freely. The M-
Mode display changes according to the motion of the M cursor. In the Dual format, two defined distances can
be displayed at the same time.
AMM is available in grayscale and color modes (CF, HD Flow, TD)
• simultaneous Display of 2 M-Mode Cursors in 2D Mode
• each Cursor is freely rotatable
• can be done after Freeze and on reloaded Cine

5.1.4.13 Advanced STIC (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation)
5.1.4.13.1 STIC “Basic” (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation)

With this acquisition method the fetal heart or an artery can be visualized in 4D. It is not a Real Time 4D
technique, but a post processed 3D acquisition.
In order to archive a good result, try to adjust the size of the volume box and the sweep angle to be as small
as possible. The longer the acquisition time, the better the spatial resolution will be. A good STIC / STIC
+color data set shows a regular and synchronous pumping of the fetal heart or of an artery.
The user must be sure that there is minimal movement of the participating persons (e.g., mother and fetus),
and that the probe is held absolutely still throughout the acquisition period. Movement will cause a failure of
the acquisition. The acquired images are post processed to calculate a 4D Volume Cine sequence. Please
make sure that the borders of the fetal heart or the artery are smooth and there are no sudden
discontinuities. If the user (trained operator) clearly recognizes a disturbance during the acquisition period,
the acquisition has to be cancelled.
• STIC - Fetal Cardio is only available on RAB & RIC probes in the OB/GYN application.
• STIC - Vascular is only available on the RSP probe in the Peripheral Vascular application.
Note “STIC” is part of the “Advanced STIC” option for Voluson E8 and Voluson E10 systems. At Voluson E6
systems it is optional (separately purchasable).
5.1.4.13.2 STIC M-Mode

Creates a M-spectrum from a STIC acquisition (capture of a full fetal heart cycle in real-time saved as a
volume for later analysis). After activating STIC M-Mode the STIC cine is running and the STIC M-spectrum
will be shown. In STIC-M all M-Measurements are possible. Furthermore the M-cursor is available as a
freeform line type.
• can be done in A, B or C Plane and can be done postprocessing
• possibility to perform measurements for evaluation of ventricle contraction
• possibility to easily detect End Systole and End Diastole for ventricular measurements
5.1.4.13.3 STIC flow

Clinical application and advantage:
The STIC function, that is generally used to display high flow velocities at the heart, is now used to represent
slow flow (tumor blood circulation) of vessels over the time. One of the objectives is, to display ovarian
tumors (which are frequently found in GYN applications), to observe them over the time and consequently
visualize them in 4D and/or evaluate them via histogram.
Function:
Similar to STIC Cardio-acquisitions, a volume sweep is made of the lesion. Afterwards the computer displays
the heart rate and vessels in multiplanar view and/or visualizes it in 4D

5.1.4.14 SRI Advanced - Speckle Reduction Imaging

A type of image noise or interference is generally considered undesirable and can obscure the quality or
interpretation of B-mode images. Although somewhat associated with the underlying echogenicity of tissue
scatters, image speckle characteristics such as brightness, density or size have no apparent value in
determining tissue structure or related properties. The elimination of or significant reduction in speckle
improves the quality or diagnostic potential of the image. The method applied in the subject modification
utilizes a nonlinear diffusion filtering technique that permits effective speckle reduction in real time. The
speckle reduction filter is available to the user in all B-mode imaging, independent of the used probe.
5.1.4.15 V-SRI Advanced - Speckle Reduction Imaging

V-SRI is an enhancement of the existing SRI algorithms and improves specially the C-plane image. This new
algorithm (from Context Vision) is used in the A-, B-, C-planes and rendered images instead of the
conventional SRI.
Note The “V-SRI” option is only available at Voluson E10 systems with probe RM6C, RIC5-9-D and RIC6-12-D.
5.1.4.16 SonoMetrium
SonoMetrium allows automated detection and display of a rendered Uterine C-plane and thereby 3D
analysis of the endometrial cavity in application Gyn.
This option is only available for Voluson E-Series systems with software version EC330 (BT18).
5.1.4.17 eM6C - E4D Activation (Advanced Features for Electronic 4D Matrix-Probe)

After entering an encrypted Software Option string (password) it is possible to use the Electronic 4D Matix-
Probe eM6C with all the advanced features such as Bi-Plane Mode and eSTIC.
Note The “eM6C” option is only available at Voluson E10 systems.
5.1.4.17.1 eSTIC
The intended use and workflow of the eSTIC acquisition mode is the same as the standard STIC mode but
with the advantage of a faster acquisition time.
Note “eSTIC” is only available with probe eM6C.
5.1.4.18 CW - Continuous Wave Doppler

CW Doppler mode provides real time spectral analysis of CW Doppler signals. This information describes the
Doppler shifted signal from the moving reflectors in the CW Doppler beam. CW Doppler can be referenced
through a small pencil probe or phased array scan head, but it can also be used in conjunction with a 2D
image which has an M-line superimposed on the 2D image indicating the position of the Doppler sample
volume. For through-the-beamformer CW, this beam is steerable by the operator, and is done by adjusting
the location of the M-line. The CW Doppler beam, or M-mode line, can be steered allowing interrogation
along an operator-selected line within the image.
Note Additional hardware is required at EC300/EC310 (BT15/BT16) system!
5.1.4.19 SW DVR - Software Digital Video Recording

After entering an encrypted Software Option string (password) it is possible to record Ultrasound data on
DVD or an USB device. Videos are created in .mp4 file format.
5.1.4.20 DVD and USB Recorder

After entering an encrypted Software Option string (password) it is possible to record Ultrasound data on
DVD or an USB device. Videos are created in .mp4 file format.
This option is only available for Voluson E-Series systems with software version EC330 (BT18).

5.1.4.21 Disk Encryption

Disk Encryption enables an encryption to secure all Patient Data, Patient Images and corresponding
measurements. A password, an USB storage device with unlock key, or the recovery key is required to
unlock the device during the boot-up process.
Note Any data stored on internal HDDs D:\ partition is encrypted by using BitLocker configured with AES 256-bits
key length.
Caution
Without the Encryption Password or Recovery Key it will not be possible to access the Ultrasound device
including emergency mode, scanning, patient information, images, or local archive. GE has no access to this
information or the ability to undo encryption in the event that the Encryption Password and Recovery Key are
lost. The security and safety of the Encryption Password and Recovery Key is solely the user's responsibility.
Note The "Disk Encryption” option is only available for Voluson E-Series systems with software version EC320
(BT17, requires Ext.4 or higher). At Voluson E-Series systems with software version EC330 (BT18), Disk
Encryption is part of the Advanced Security Features option.
Note A Voluson E-Series systems without the option but with encrypted disk is unlockable.
5.1.4.22 Advanced Security Features

The "Advanced Security Features" option consists of two vulnerability protection features:
• "Disk Encryption" on page 5-20
• "Whitelisting" on page 5-20
5.1.4.22.1 Whitelisting
Whitelisting prevents the Voluson E-Series system from installing unwanted software. It monitors all
applications/services if they are known and accepted (white-listed). Any application/service that is not known
on the system creates an error message on the screen.
"Whitelisting” is only available for Voluson E-Series systems with software version EC330 (BT18). It is part of
the Advanced Security Features option.
5.1.4.23 IOTA (International Ovarian Tumor Analysis)

Caution
The IOTA model (LR2 or Simple Rules) should not be used without an independent clinical evaluation and is
not intended to be a screening test or to determine whether a patient should proceed to surgery. Incorrect
use of the IOTA model carries the risk of unnecessary testing, surgery, and/or delayed diagnosis.
If more than one IOTA option (i.e., IOTA LR2, IOTA Simple Rules) is available, it is possible to configure the
measure setup which worksheet is displayed.
IOTA LR2
The IOTA (International Ovarian Tumor Analysis) LR2 Worksheet contains an ovary measurement tool for
women with adnexal tumors that have been selected to undergo surgery. The LR2 model is based on
published literature and has been tested only on the stated population. The literature states that the LR2
model can help to estimate the probability of an adnexal mass of being malignant. The IOTA group has
evaluated other ways including an LR1 model in additional to the LR2 model.
Note IOTA states that use outside of the intended population can overestimate risk. Users are expected to study
the literature and reach their own professional conclusions regarding the clinical utility of the tool. The model
cannot replace experience in ultrasonography and cannot compensate for poor quality ultrasound
equipment.
The IOTA mathematical logistic regression model, LR2 is stated in literature as described in the Advanced
Reference Manual (H48701UU).
General Electric is passing on this IOTA LR2 worksheet for your convenience based on published literature
of one group, but makes no representation of its effectiveness in your practice. This calculation is not to be
used as the primary driver in diagnostic decision making on the probability of malignancy. It is secondary
information for a physician to use based on recent literature.

IOTA Simple Rules

Simple rules algorithm for ovarian tumor risk evaluation in addition to already cleared LR2 model.
The IOTA Simple Rules Worksheet contains a preoperative classification system for ovarian tumors
consisting of five features typical for benign tumors (B-features) and five features typical for malignant tumors
(M-features).
The "IOTA Simple Rules" option is only available for Voluson E-Series systems with software version EC330
(BT18).
5.1.5 Description of Hardware Options

Table 5-3 Hardware Options
HW-Options Description
1 CW-Doppler CW - Continuous Wave Doppler
2 ECG Digital Module ECG Preamplifier
3 WLAN Network Adapter Wireless Network Adapter (WLAN - Wireless Local Area Network)
4 Scan/Freeze Footswitch Scan/Freeze Footswitch
5 Cellular Modem Cellular Modem
5.1.5.1 CW - Continuous Wave Doppler

CW Doppler mode provides real time spectral analysis of CW Doppler signals. This information describes the
Doppler shifted signal from the moving reflectors in the CW Doppler beam. CW Doppler can be referenced
through a small pencil probe or phased array scan head, but it can also be used in conjunction with a 2D
image which has an M-line superimposed on the 2D image indicating the position of the Doppler sample
volume. For through-the-beamformer CW, this beam is steerable by the operator, and is done by adjusting
the location of the M-line. The CW Doppler beam, or M-mode line, can be steered allowing interrogation
along an operator-selected line within the image.
5.1.5.2 ECG Preamplifier

MAN (internal, digital version)
For details see Section 5.8.4 "ECG-preamplifier (MAN - optional)" on page 5-43 .
5.1.5.3 Wireless Network Adapter (WLAN - Wireless Local Area Network)

For details see Section 5.8.5 "Wireless Network Adapter" on page 5-43 .
5.1.5.4 Scan/Freeze Footswitch

For details see Section 5.8.6 "Footswitch" on page 5-43 .
5.1.5.5 Cellular Modem

For details see Section 5.8.7 "Cellular Modem" on page 5-43 .

5.1.6 Data Location
The Voluson E-Series Hard disk drive (HDD) is divided into 4 partitions:
C: System partition:
• Operating System (Windows 7 at EC300-EC320, Windows 10 at EC330) including all Windows
settings (IP-address, Network Name, etc.)
• US-Application Software (UISAPP)
• Global Service Platform Software
• Software Options
D: User partition:
• User Presets (Backup) database
• Images (Archive), Patient-ID´s and Reports database
• Service database
• System settings database
R: Rescue partition:
• Factory Images of C: Partition for System recovery after HDD (Windows) crash
• Printer Drivers
LINUX partition: (not visible in Windows)
• Linux operating system for rescue functionality
Distribution of partitions at 500 Gbyte HDD

Windows 7 at EC300-EC320 (BT15-BT17):
Windows 10 at EC330 (BT18):

5.2 FrontEnd Processor
Figure 5-5 FrontEnd - Block diagram

5.2.1 RTF - Probe Control Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-24
5.2.2 RSE - Pencil Probe Board (optional) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-24
5.2.3 RFM - (RF-Interface & Beamformer) FE Mainboard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-24
5.2.4 RSX - (Beamformer Receiver/Transmitter) Extension Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-24

5.2.1 RTF - Probe Control Board
Switches the Probe Connectors and recognizes Probes

• Probe Connectors:
- EC300/EC310 (BT15/BT16):
* 1 CW Pencil-Probe Connector (RSE-board)
* 3 Probe Connectors 408pin
* 1 Dummy-Probe Connector 408pin

- EC320/EC330 (BT17/BT18):
* 4 Probe Connectors 408pin
• Probe Select Relays

• Probe Recognition
5.2.2 RSE - Pencil Probe Board (optional)
This board is not applicable at BT17 (EC320, 17.x.x) and BT18 (EC330, 18.x.x) systems.
Adapter board for connection of CW pencil probes.
Note The RSE board is required for CW-Option.
5.2.3 RFM - (RF-Interface & Beamformer) FE Mainboard
• EC300/EC310 (BT15/BT16):
The FrontEnd Mainboard supports Tx/Rx for 128 channels only. To extend to 192 or 256 channels, the
RSX - (Beamformer Receiver/Transmitter) Extension board is required.
• EC320/EC330 (BT17/BT18):
The FrontEnd Mainboard supports Tx/Rx for 192/256 channels. It does not need RSX Extension board.
5.2.3.1 RFM Board - Interface FPGA

1. DMA logic
2. Beamformer Interface
3. RTF Control Interface
4. RTF FPGA Control Interface
5.2.3.2 RFM Board - Processing FPGA

1. Ultrasound Data Pre-Processing
2. System Control
3. Motor Control
5.2.4 RSX - (Beamformer Receiver/Transmitter) Extension Board
This board is not applicable at BT17 (EC320, 17.x.x) and BT18 (EC330, 18.x.x) systems.
Subset (for RFM) that is required to extend to 192 or 256 channels.
Note All components of RSX board are also present on RFM - (RF-Interface & Beamformer) FE Mainboard.

5.3 BackEnd Processor
Figure 5-6 BackEnd - Block diagram

5.3.1 PC-Motherboard - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26
5.3.2 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26
5.3.3 Graphic Card - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26
5.3.4 RTV - Video Management Board - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26
5.3.5 RTB - Distribution Board Bottom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-26

5.3.1 PC-Motherboard
Built in or external Components:

• On Board VGA and Graphic Card
• LAN
• USB 2.0
• USB 3.0
• Sound
• CPU: 3.1 GHz at 4 cores
Major Tasks:
• System Control
• 2D- / 3D- / 4D- Image processing and Rendering
• Control DVD drive (USB)
• Control User Interface (USB)
5.3.2 Hard Disk Drive (HDD)
The Hard Disk is the main storage device of the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system.
The Voluson E-Series hard disk drive is divided into 4 partitions.
For further details see Section 5.1.6 "Data Location" on page 5-22
5.3.3 Graphic Card
Graphic Card which supplies RTV (Video manager) board with digital video. It offers dynamic contrast
enhancement and color stretch video processing optimized on a scene by scene basis for spectacular
picture clarity.
5.3.4 RTV - Video Management Board
Distributes Video signal information coming from the Graphic Card to the DVI respectively HDMI connectors.
Converts DVI/HDMI inputs to S-Video output(s).
• DVI to HDMI input (RTV30) respectively HDMI to HDMI input (RTV35) connection to Graphic Card
• DVI output (RTV30) respectively VGA output (RTV35) for external device (only RGB signals used)
• HDMI output for external device
• S-Video output for external devices
• USB connector for board configuration
5.3.5 RTB - Distribution Board Bottom
Function of the Distribution Board Bottom (RTB):

• USB2.0 Interface, Board is connected to PC via USB cable
• 5 port USB2.0 Hub for connecting peripherals (e.g., optional ECG)
• Feed through DC-Power and Signals for the console (12V_ATX, 5V_ATX, 5VSB, PWR_On, Start_Key,
Loud speaker)
• Multiplexer and Amplifier for PC-Sound, Doppler Audio and VCR/DVD-Recorder

5.4 Internal I/O

Internal In/Out depends on
• the currently installed PC Motherboard
• the BT-version (BT15, BT16, BT17 or BT18)
Note The “Mainboard type” can be read out in the Setup - Administration - SYSTEM INFO page (see Figure 7-1
on page 7-3 ).

5.4.1 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT15): ADVANTECH + RTT/RTH6x - - - - - - - - - - - 5-28
5.4.2 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT15 / BT16): ADVANTECH + RTH50 - - - - - - - - - 5-29
5.4.3 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT15): KONTRON + RTT/RTH6x - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-30
5.4.4 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT15 / BT16): KONTRON + RTH50 - - - - - - - - - - - 5-31
5.4.7 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT18): KONTRON Micro-ATX - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-34

5.4.1 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT15): ADVANTECH + RTT/RTH6x
Figure 5-7 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series BT15 (EC300): PC-Motherboard Micro-ATX ADVANTECH + RTT/RTH6x

5.4.2 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT15 / BT16): ADVANTECH + RTH50
Figure 5-8 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series BT15/BT16 (EC300/EC310): PC-Motherboard Micro-ATX ADVANTECH + RTH50
5.4.3 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT15): KONTRON + RTT/RTH6x
Figure 5-9 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series BT15 (EC300): PC-Motherboard Flex-ATX KONTRON + RTT/RTH6x

5.4.4 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT15 / BT16): KONTRON + RTH50
Figure 5-10 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series BT15/BT16 (EC300/EC310): PC-Motherboard Flex-ATX KONTRON + RTH50
5.4.5 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT17): ADVANTECH Micro-ATX
Figure 5-11 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series BT17 (EC320): PC-Motherboard ADVANTECH Micro-ATX
5.4.6 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT18): ADVANTECH Micro-ATX
Figure 5-12 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series BT18 (EC330): PC-Motherboard ADVANTECH Micro-ATX

5.4.7 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series (BT18): KONTRON Micro-ATX
Figure 5-13 Internal I/O Voluson E-Series BT18 (EC330): PC-Motherboard KONTRON Micro-ATX

5.5 Control Console (User Interface)
Figure 5-14 Control Console (User Interface) - Block diagram
The Voluson E-Series control console (User Interface) consists of the following electronic sub-assemblies
and/or functional components:
• Display/Touch screen module:
- WXGA display - 1280 x 800 pixels
- Integrated USB to Video converter with USB2.0 High Speed Interface
- projected capacitive touch screen
• Console module:
- 7 port USB 2.0 Hub controller
- Contols (Encoder/Joycoder) with integrated rotary/push/flip function
- USB Trackball (2”) with dedicated buttons to emulate standard three button mouse
- USB standard alphanumeric keyboard
- USB extended keyboard with controller
- LED Indicators with wide range dimming
- LED to illuminate probe port connectors
• DC/DC Converter:
- Converts 12VDC input voltage to 5VDC and 3.3VDC output voltage for supplying User Interface
components

5.5.1 RTH - Distribution Board USB-Hub

5.5.1.1 RTH6x Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-36
5.5.1.2 RTH50 Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-36
5.5.1.1 RTH6x Function

• 7 port USB2.0 Hub
• 4 USB Ports for external use
• 1 USB to SATA Converter for DVD Drive
• 2 USB Ports not used
• Power distribution for Monitor
• Feed through for DC-Power for the DVD Drive and Fan
5.5.1.2 RTH50 Function

• 4 port USB3.0 Hub
• 2 USB3.0 Ports for external use
• 1 USB2.0 to SATA Converter for DVD Drive
• 1 USB3.0 Port to Monitor
• 1 USB3.0 only Port not used below Monitor Connector Plate
• Feed through for DC-Power for the DVD Drive
• Signal switching for UI Brake and Lift
• Feed through for DC-Power (12V_ATX, 5V_ATX, 5VSB) and Signals (PWR_On, Start_Key, Speaker,
Lifter control, UI_Brake)
5.5.2 RTT - Distribution Board Top
Function of the Distribution Board Top RTT:

• Feed through for DC-Power (12V_ATX, 5V_ATX, 5VSB) and Signals (PWR_On, Start_Key, Speaker,
Lifter control, UI_Brake)
• Power for RTH (Distribution Board Hub)
• Power for DVD-Drive
• Signal switching for UI Brake, Lift and Gel warmer
7
7 reserved for the future

5.5.3 Control Console (UI)
Figure 5-15 Voluson E-Series - Control Console
Table 5-4 Voluson E-Series - key codes
key code Description Functionality
1 Power/Standby ON/OFF ON/OFF Standby button of the system
2 DVD opens the DVD menu
3 Utilities opens the Utilities menu
4 Patient Data (PID) opens the Patient data entry menu
5 Probe opens the Probe program menu

6 Report opens the Patient report page
7 Archive (Review) opens the Patient archive and/or exam review mode
8 End Exam stores patient and measurement data and clears all temporary data
10 Acquisition Mode XTD invokes XTD-View (Extended View) function
11 Acquisition Mode BF invokes B-Flow function
17 Exit Exit current menu
18 Trackball pointer displays a pointer (arrow or hand shaped cursor)
20 Clear removes graphics, measurements and annotations
21 ABC (Text) activates the annotation function in order to add comments to an image
22 Measure / Calc opens the Measurement and Calculations menu
23 Bodymark activates the annotation function in order to add body patterns to an image
24 Acquisition Mode 4D invokes Real Time 4D Mode (continuous volume sweep)
25 Acquisition Mode 3D invokes 3D Volume Mode
26 Format Dual Dual-Screen format (vertical distribution)
27 Format Quad Quad-Screen format
28 Format Single Single-Screen format
29 P2 programmable key
31 Auto Automatic Optimization (optimizes the image based upon the actual BMode
image data)
35 Freeze Read/Write (Freeze/Run)
42 Encoder PW-Mode Pulsed Wave Doppler on/off (push), Gain (rotate)

rotation about X-axis in Volume Mode
43 Encoder M-Mode Motion Mode on/off (push), Gain (rotate)

rotation about Y-axis in Volume Mode
44 Encoder PD-Mode Power Doppler on/off (push), Gain (rotate)

rotation about Z-axis in Volume Mode
45 Encoder C-Mode Color Flow Mode on/off (push), Gain (rotate)

movement along Z-axis in Volume Mode
46 Encoder 2D-Mode 2D-Mode (B-Mode) on/off (push), Gain (rotate)
47 Joycoder Zoom Zoom Box on/off (push), Zoom Size (rotate)
48 Joycoder Focus Focal Zones (push), B-Image Angle (rotate)
59 Trackball button left left trackball key (function depends on currently selected mode)
60 Trackball button top top trackball key (function depends on currently selected mode)
61 Trackball button right right trackball key (function depends on currently selected mode)
62 Trackball button bottom bottom trackball key (function depends on currently selected mode)
63 UI Brake (Movement) Locks and releases the horizontal movement of the user interface
100 Trackball button 1 function depends on currently selected mode

106 Joycoder Depth - UP B-Image Depth up (flip)
107 Joycoder Depth - DOWN B-Image Depth down (flip)
110 Joycoder Focus - UP Focal Depth up (flip)
111 Joycoder Focus - DOWN Focal Depth down (flip)
114 Light (Lamp) Activates lamp (light)
115 Lift UP Height adjustment (lift up) of the user interface
116 Lift DOWN Height adjustment (lift down) of the user interface
200 Joycoder Display 1 - UP

Touch Panel rotary / push / flip control
201 Joycoder Display 1 - PUSH
(function depends on currently selected mode)
202 Joycoder Display 1 - DOWN




5.6 Monitor
For further details see Section 6.2.2 "Loading the Default Monitor Settings" on page 6-3

5.7 External I/O
Figure 5-16 External I/O connectors - on rear of system (GES)
Item Connector Name Description
1 HDMI OUT Connector for external monitor
2 VGA OUT Connector for external monitor
3 Network GES30: DICOM input/output, twisted pair RJ-45 10/100 megabit/s

GES35: DICOM input/output, twisted pair RJ-45 10/100/1000 megabit/s
4 USB USB 3.0 port
5 USB USB 2.0 port (GES30 only)
6 S-Video OUT S-Video OUT connector, PAL/NTSC (depending on system setup)
Figure 5-17 External I/O connectors - next to DVD drive
1 USB 2.0 port (RTT/RTH6x)

USB
2 USB 3.0 port (RTH50)
How to identify User Interface components RTH6x and RTH50

The color of the USB ports for external use (beside the DVD drive) enable quick differentiation between
RTH6x and RTH50.
Figure 5-18 RTH6x => "white" USB2.0 ports / RTH50 => "blue" USB3.0 ports

Figure 5-19 External I/O connectors - on the left/right side of the Monitor
1
USB USB 3.0 port
2
Note For further description of I/O connectors refer to Section 3.9 "External I/O Connectors" on page 3-50 .

5.8 Peripherals
5.8.1 Recording Tools
Note There are no recording tools available and released for the Voluson E-Series system.
5.8.2 Printers
Black & White Digital Printer

The B&W Digital Printer receives image data via the USB port. The print command is controlled by the keys
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 and/or P6 on the Voluson E-Series control console (depending on system configuration).
Color Digital Printer

The Color Digital Printer receives image data via the USB port. The print command is controlled by the keys
P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 and/or P6 on the Voluson E-Series control console (depending on system configuration).
Color Deskjet Printer

A Color Deskjet Printer is used to print out reports and exams, but in some cases also ultrasound images.
Usually it is controlled via Bluetooth Adapter.
Network Color Laser Printer

The Network Color Laser Printer is used to print out reports and exams, but in some cases also ultrasound
images. The printer can either be connected directly to the Voluson E-Series system, or to work within the
network environment (usually the hospital network).
5.8.3 DVD Drive
Caution
Laser radiation: Avoid exposure to the beam Class 3B laser product.
Class 3B laser radiation: When open avoid exposure to the beam.
DVD Drive
The DVD Drive (Writer) is used to backup images and reports. In addition, it is used as the main source of
software upgrades and other service utility operations. It is controlled by the BEP via USB port.
Software DVR
The SW-DVR (SoftWare Digital Video Recording) function is optional at EC300-EC320 (BT15-BT17)
systems and enables video recording to DVD media or USB devices.
Media supported for data burning Media supported for video recording
• DVD+R • DVD+R
• DVD-R • DVD-R
• DVD-RW • DVD-RW
• DVD+RW • DVD+RW
• CD-R • all Dual Layer formats
• CD-RW • USB stick or external USB HDD drive (FAT32 or NTFS system)
Note A minimum writing speed of 2 MByte/sec is required to ensure stable video recording on USB devices.
Lower writing speed can result in audio and/or video drop outs. The use of USB3.0 devices is recommended.
DVD and USB Recorder

The DVD and USB Recorder function is optional at EC330 (BT18) systems and enables video recording to
DVD media or USB devices.

5.8.4 ECG-preamplifier (MAN - optional)
The ECG-preamplifier is used for acquiring an ECG-signal to be displayed with the ultrasound image. This
optional peripheral serves for gaining an ECG-signal to mark the systolic and end diastolic moments in M-
Mode and Doppler evaluations.
The ECG-preamplifier must not be used for ECG-diagnostics. It is not intended for use as a cardiac monitor
and must not be used for an intra-operative application on the heart.
5.8.5 Wireless Network Adapter
The Voluson E-Series supports a Wireless Network USB Adapter based on industry standards to provide
easy-to-use and compatible high-speed wireless connectivity. For details regarding type and installation, see
Section 3.5.8 "Connecting the Wireless Network Adapter" on page 3-28 .
The Wireless Network USB Adapter provides a mobile network connection to the local area network.
5.8.6 Footswitch
The Footswitch is used for comfortable system control when no hand is free. To adjust function of the
Footswitch (Left/Middle/Right) see Section 3.7.1.8 on page 3-45 .
5.8.7 Cellular Modem
Connecting the Voluson E-Series to the Internet allows the user to send images via e-mail and/or MMS to
patients or physicians. Whenever no LAN or Wi-Fi Internet connection is available, it is possible to connect
the Voluson E-Series to the Internet by using the optional Cellular Modem. To use this feature the peripheral
Cellular Modem needs to be installed and a SIM card from your local service provider needs to be ordered.
For details regarding installation and configuration see Section 3.13.3 on page 3-64 .

5.9 Power Distribution
5.9.1 RSP - Power Supply Module
Figure 5-20 Power Supply Module - RSP
1 Circuit Breaker 5 Auxiliary Output
2 Fuses (2x T10A H/250V) 6 Protective Earth connection
3 connector for Main Power Cable 7 Equipotential connection
4 Lift system (12VDC)
5.9.1.1 Mechanical Concept and Overview

The AC Power's main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems with AC power and to galvanically
isolate the system from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an inrush current limiter
is implemented.
From the input voltage from the Power Supply (RSP) the AC/DC device generates all system supply
voltages, which are:
• FrontEnd voltages
• Standby voltages
• ATX motherboard supply
• Tx voltages
In addition the AC/DC device contains the digital motor amplifier.
5.9.1.2 Input Voltage Range

input voltage range: 100 - 240VAC; 50/60Hz
5.9.1.3 Auxiliary Output Voltage

nominal 115VAC
All DC-supply voltages for built-in peripherals are generated in the RSP- Power Supply Module.

5.10 Mechanical Descriptions
5.10.1 Physical Dimensions
Figure 5-21 Physical Dimensions

5.10.2 LCD Monitor
The Voluson E-Series system has a free adjustable LCD Flat panel monitor in relation to the user interface.
Monitor Arm MTD20 (DAEIL) Monitor Arm (Ergotron)
• tilt: + 40° / - 90° • tilt: + 30° / - 75°

• rotate: +/- 90° • rotate: +/- 90°
5.10.3 Control Console Positioning
The control console can be rotated, translated and adjusted in height.

• height adjustment: 20 cm (7.9 inch)
• translation adjustment: 20 cm (7.9 inch)
• rotation adjustment: +/- 40°
Figure 5-22 adjustable control console
5.10.3.1 Rotation/Translation of the Control Console
Press the Brake button inside of the handlebar opening to rotate/translate the console to the
desired position. Press the Brake button again in order to secure the console against
uncontrolled movement.
5.10.3.2 Height Adjustment (Elevation) of the Control Console
Height adjustment is done with the Lift UP / Lift DOWN button inside of the handlebar opening.
As long as a button is pressed, the control console can be lifted / lowered.
Caution
Make sure that nothing would be jammed while moving!

5.11 Air Flow Control
5.11.1 Air Flow Distribution
Through the filter grid on the back of the system (Main Air Inlet), air flow into the Voluson E-Series system.
• Air holes in the RSP power supply allow the air to pass through; the 3 fans inside the RSP suck in the
air and spread it through the beamformer.
• By means of the 2 Backend fans, air is blown through the GEB-box (along its internal components and
the PC- Motherboard).
The warm air exits the system through holes in the left side panel (Main Air Outlet).
A Main Air Inlet (filter grid)

B Main Air Outlet
Figure 5-23 Main Air Inlet/Outlet at Voluson E-Series

5.12 Service Platform
5.12.1 Introduction
InSite is the connectivity to the Voluson E-Series system that allows GE to deliver remote diagnostics
capability. InSite is your direct link with a GE Online Service Engineer or Applications Support Engineer, or a
Request for Service via the InSite link (GE icon) at the right bottom of the display screen.
The GE icon in the status bar change symbol and color depending on ongoing activity; see Table 7-3 on
page 7-13 .
5.12.2 Service Platform - Access and Security
The Service Platform has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the
tools that are authorized for their use.
There are different possibilities to access the Common Service Desktop and its available features:
• Local Access : via Setup - Administration - Service page
• Remote Access: This offers GE technicians the possibility to view the entire customer's desktop and
operation system. Remote access to the Voluson E-Series system requires permission and customer
input to run diagnostics.
5.12.2.1 Local Access

1. If not already in read mode, Freeze the image.
5. Enter the password « she » and click the Accept button to display the Service Tools page (see Figure
5-27 on page 5-50 ).
6. Click the CSD button.
7. As soon as the GEHC Service Home Page appears, select “Operator” from the pull-down menu, enter
the password <uls> and then click Okay.
Figure 5-24 Service Login
The Common Service Desktop (CSD) is started and the Home page - containing basic System Information -
appears. The navigation bar at the top of the screen allows to select different tools.
For more detailed information see Section 7.6 "Common Service Desktop (CSD)" on page 7-14 .

5.12.2.2 Remote Access

Note Remote access is ONLY possible if the Service Platform is properly configured (either by the user or a GE
technician at site). Operation see Section 3.13.8 "InSite Configuration" on page 3-70 .
This allows GE technicians to view the entire customer´s desktop and operation system. Using VCO (Virtual
Console Observation) a service technician or the OLC (OnLine Center) can access and modify all settings
and programs or run diagnostics on the customer's Voluson E-Series system.
Remote access to the Voluson E-Series system requires permission and customer input before a GE service
technician or OLC can access the customer's system remotely.
Disruptive Mode can be selected by the customer directly on the Voluson E-Series (see Section 7.5.2 on
page 7-13 ), or requested remotely by the service technician or OLC .
5.13 Common Service Desktop (CSD)

The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all ultrasound and cardiology
systems. The Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs.
Internationalization
The user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in English
only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface.
As soon as the Common Service Desktop (CSD) is started, the Service Home Page appears.
Figure 5-25 Common Service Desktop - Home
The navigation bar at the top of the screen allows to select from different tools for troubleshooting/
adjustment. For detailed description see Section 7.6 "Common Service Desktop (CSD)" on page 7-14 .

5.14 Service Page
5.14.1 Introduction
The Service Page contains specific software/hardware test modules, system setup,update, etc. for Voluson
E-Series systems only.
5.14.2 Service Page - Access and Security
The service page has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the tools
that are authorized for their use.
5.14.3 Service Page Login

5-27 on page 5-50 ).
Figure 5-26 Service Tools page
1 Additional Software Installation 6 TCP/IP Buffersize 11 Export System Data
2 Auto Tester 7 Common Service Desktop 12 Load Application Settings
3 Restore Software 8 Monitor Test 13 Restore Democases into Archive
4 FMI from DVD 9 Request for Service 14 Exit
5 Decrypt Disk 10 Delete all Patients
Please observe that the displayed screens may slightly differ from images shown in this manual. The
availability of some functions or features depend on the BT-version of your Voluson E-Series system.

5.14.3.1 Auto Tester

Autotester is a log function of customer activities. It records all user actions (scanning, Touch Panel entries,
performing Calculations, review of Patient Reports, etc.…). It is possible to safe (record) as file on HDD. But
also export to DVD/CD can be done to allow replay of the records on other units.
Note For intermittent problems this file can be requested from the Service Engineer or customer. It is possible to
burn this file on DVD/CD+R/RW.
Operation see Section 7.7 "How to use the Auto Tester program" on page 7-18 .
5.14.3.2 Additional Software Installation (ASI)

Click the ASI button to install additional software. The Software parts to be installed depend on the contents
of the System DVD that is used.
5.14.3.3 FMI from DVD

By means of the FMI from DVD button, the Systems C:\ image is partly or completely updated. The System
Software parts to be upgraded depend on contents of the used System DVD.
The first “Boot Device” in BIOS has to be Hard Disk Drive.
Note During “FMI from DVD” the used system configuration (incl. Full Backup) will be stored on R:\. If required, the
previously used System configuration (before FMI from DVD was performed) can be restored by activating
the “Rollback” function. Operation see: Section 5.15.3 on page 5-53 .
5.14.3.4 Restore Software

Click the Restore software button to perform an automatic restore of the system software from your hard
disk. The installation procedure starts with saving and recording the settings present on the system (silent
“Full Backup" and "Rollback”). During the software restore the system will restart several times.
Note Please make sure that ONLY the DVD writer is connected on the USB ports. Disconnect all other external
USB devices (such as printers, hubs, bluetooth, memory devices) as this might interfere with the recovery/
installation procedure.
Note Existing User Programs, 3D/4D Programs and Auto Text remain unaffected! Therefore it is not necessary to
perform any readout preparations.
5.14.3.5 Decrypt Disk

Note Security of patient data on the system will be reduced when encryption is turned off. Decryption will take a
considerable amount of time (one to several hours).
5.14.3.6 TCP/IP Buffersize

The TCP/IP Buffersize selects the amount of buffer memory used for DICOM transfers (both directions).
5.14.3.7 Common Service Desktop (CSD)

Access to the Common Service Desktop (CSD) by entering security level and password. Each user is only
granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use.
5.14.3.8 Request for Service (RFS)

Fill out the “Request For Service” form and then send the problem description to GE Service/Application
representatives. Operation see Section 7.2 "Request for Service (RFS)" on page 7-5 .

5.14.3.9 Delete all Patients

1. Click the Delete all Patients... button.
Following WARNING message appears on the screen.
Figure 5-27 Warning message
Warning
If you select the YES button, all patients data, studies, images and measure report data will be deleted
permanently from the hard disk and cannot be recovered!
5.14.3.10 Export System Data

Select the Export System Data button on the “Service Tools” page to Full Backup the System State. This
includes dump-files and text files, the full Service Database informations about probes, boards, Software,
Options and the Event Log File. Operation see Section 7.4.2.2 on page 7-11 .
5.14.3.11 Keyboard Layout

To change the keyboard layout to different languages. Operation see: Section 6.4 "Modification of Keyboard
Layout" on page 6-5 .
Note Reconfigure the layout of the keyboard is only useful by changing the concerned keys also; see: Section
8.13 "Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)" on page 8-24 .
5.14.3.12 Monitor Test

Select the Monitor Test button to perform color calibration. Operation see: Section 6.2.3 "Monitor Test" on
page 6-3 .
5.14.3.13 Restore Democases into Archive

The democases (stored on the rescue partition of the HDD) are added to the internal archive.
5.14.3.14 Load Application Settings

If the Tune version of the Application presets does not match the Application Software version, it is probably
that there are adverse affects on image quality (e.g., after reloading an old “Full Backup”).
Note When reloading these Application Settings, any existing User Programs, 3D/4D Programs and Auto Text
remain unaffected!
1. Click Load Application Settings on the “Service Tools” page (see Figure 5-27 on page 5-50 ).
2. Choose the media and then click Load.
Figure 5-28 Application Settings Load

3. Select the desired file and then click Ok.

Load procedure starts immediately including a reboot of the system.
Note If the ID of the Application Setting is not valid for the currently installed Application Software version, a
warning message appears during boot up sequence.
4. If warning message is displayed, confirm it with OK and then load appropriate Application Settings
(perform loading procedure as described in steps above).
5.15 Boot Screen Functions

Following LINUX supported functions are available as soon as the “Boot Screen” appears:
Voluson
GE-Service
Rollback
Memtest (Memory Check)
Figure 5-29 Boot screen

5.15.1 Voluson - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53
5.15.2 GE-Service - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53
5.15.3 Rollback - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-53
5.15.4 Memtest (Memory Check) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-54
After 3 sec. without pressing any key, the system will boot-up in windows (= Voluson item). If you missed
selection, retry again with Ctrl + Alt + Del.
5.15.1 Voluson
The System will boot-up in windows. The Ultrasound Application is started. For details see Section 3.4.1.1
"During a normal boot, you may observe" on page 3-11 .
5.15.2 GE-Service
This function MUST NOT be used by the customer!
5.15.3 Rollback
This function offers the possibility to simply restore the previously used system configuration (rollback), which
was stored on R:\ during “FMI from DVD”.
1. Turn system OFF and then back ON.
2. As soon as the “Boot Screen” appears (see: Figure 5-30 on page 5-53 ), press the [PgDn] (Arrow
down) key on the keyboard until the Rollback item is highlighted, then press Enter.

3. When the following WARNING message appears, press the [<-] (Arrow left) button to highlight OK and
then press Enter.
Figure 5-30 Warning message
After performing the rollback, the system reboots. The Ultrasound Application is started and finally the 2D
screen is displayed on the monitor.
5.15.4 Memtest (Memory Check)
1. Turn system OFF and then back ON.

2. As soon as the “Boot Screen” appears (see: Figure 5-30 on page 5-53 ), press the [PgDn] (Arrow
down) key on the keyboard until the Memtest item is highlighted, then press Enter.
After 3 sec. without pressing any key, the system will boot-up in windows (= Voluson item). If you missed
selection, retry again with Ctrl + Alt + Del.
The PC Memory Test starts automatically and takes about 2.5 hours. If there are errors they will be listed.
1 elapsed test time

2 list of errors
Figure 5-31 Memory check in LINUX
Note After one cycle (~ 2.5 hours) the memory check starts again. To interrupt the test, press the Esc key. If you
don't interrupt the memory test , it will perform never ending cycles of memory checks.
Note If after one cycle (about 2.5 hours), no error messages are listed, it can be assumed that the Back End
Processor including power supply is working properly.

Chapter 6
Service Adjustments
This chapter describes how to test and adjust the mechanical capabilities of a
system that may be out of specification. Although some tests may be optional
they should only be performed by qualified personnel.

6.1 Regulatory - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.2 LCD Monitor Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-2
6.3 Control Console Positioning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-4
6.4 Modification of Keyboard Layout - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6-5

Service Adjustments
6.1 Regulatory
Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present and
accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented.
6.2 LCD Monitor Adjustment

The Voluson E-Series system has a free adjustable LCD Flat panel monitor in relation to the user interface.
Monitor Arm MTD20 (DAEIL) Monitor Arm (Ergotron)
• tilt: + 40° / - 90° • tilt: + 30° / - 75°

• rotate: +/- 90° • rotate: +/- 90°
Incline the monitor Move back and forth Move up and down
Lock Height Adjustment
Move the upper monitor arm parallel to the lower arm and push it down (1), then lock it by turning the knob (2) counterclockwise.
Release by turning the knob clockwise.
Lock Arm Rotation
Rotate the arm to center position and turn the knob (1) clockwise till the rotation is locked. Release by turning the knob
counterclockwise.

Service Adjustments
6.2.1 Preparing for Transport
To ensure that no part of the monitor can be damaged when transporting or moving the system, the monitor
has to be in a secure position.
1. Lock all monitor parts.
2. Incline the monitor to horizontal position.
Figure 6-1 incline the monitor
The system can now be safely transported. Nevertheless be careful when transporting or moving the device.
6.2.2 Loading the Default Monitor Settings

2. In the “Utilities” menu touch the Monitor button to display the "Monitor Menu".
Figure 6-2 Monitor Menu
3. Touch the Semi-Dark Room button to load default monitor settings for your system.
6.2.3 Monitor Test

5-27 on page 5-50 ).
5. Select the Monitor Test button in the “Service Tools” menu.
6. The screen becomes white.
- WHITE is displayed without any tint (discolor) or colored pixels.
7. Press the right/left trackball key repeatedly to step through RED, GREEN, BLUE, BLACK and
GRAYSCALE.
- Each color is displayed correctly (without any tint or discolored pixels).
8. To exit the Monitor Test program, press ESC.

Service Adjustments
6.3 Control Console Positioning

The control console can be rotated, moved forward and backward and adjusted in height.
6.3.1 Translation/Rotation Adjustment
Press the Brake button inside of the handlebar opening to rotate/translate the console to the
desired position. Press the Brake button again in order to secure the console against
uncontrolled movement.
Figure 6-3 Buttons for Control Console Adjustment
1 Lift UP / Lift DOWN button for height adjustment of the control console
2 Brake button for locking and unlocking the control console
Caution
The system should not be moved with the control console (UI) extended. Do not put your hand between the
control console and the main unit when moving the control console to its centered and locked position:
Danger of injuries!

Service Adjustments
6.3.2 Height Adjustment (Elevation)
Height adjustment is done with the Lift UP / Lift DOWN button inside of the handlebar opening.
As long as a button is pressed, the control console can be lifted / lowered.
Caution
Make sure that nothing would be jammed while moving!
6.3.2.1 Moving the Console without booting up the System

If it is impossible to boot up the system, the user interface can be lowered and/or lifted by pressing 3 keys on
the control console.
2. Connect the main power cable to a hospital grade power outlet with the proper rated voltage.
3. Press 3 keys (see Figure 6-4 below) on the control console simultaneously to move it
- downwards: Patient ID key, End Exam key and Lift DOWN button
- upwards: Patient ID key, End Exam key and Lift UP button
Figure 6-4 keys to lower/lift the control console
Note Shipping the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system in its original packaging is only possible when control
console is centered and locked in position, the system is lowered to its minimum height and the monitor is
flapped down and locked (see Figure 6-1 on page 6-3 ).
6.4 Modification of Keyboard Layout
Modification of the Keyboard Layout is no more possible at systems with operating system Windows 10
(software version EC330, BT18).
Note Configuring the layout of the keyboard is only useful by changing the concerned keys also; see Section 8.13
"Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)" on page 8-24 .

5-27 on page 5-50 ).

Service Adjustments
5. Click on the Keyboard Layout button.
Keyboard Layout Modification procedure depends on the operating system (Windows 7 or Windows 10).
Procedure at Windows 7 (EC300-EC320)

1. Select the input language from the pull-down menu.
Figure 6-5 input language
Note If the desired language is not listed, click the Add button, choose the desired input language from the pull-
down menu, as shown in Figure 6-6 below, and then confirm with OK.
Figure 6-6 add input language

2. If not already done, select the default input language from the pull-down menu. The corresponding
keyboard layout is changed accordingly.
3. Click on Apply and then close the window with OK.
5. Reenter “Keyboard Layout”. This time Remove unused language(s).
6. Test the Keyboard function:
- Press the ABC key on the control console.
- Press some keys on the keyboard and verify the entered text.

Chapter 7
Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
This chapter describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help
maintain image quality and system operation. Basic host, system, and board level
diagnostics are run whenever power is applied. Some Service Tools may be run
at the application level.

7.1 Collect vital System Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-2
7.2 Request for Service (RFS) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-5
7.3 Check Point Voltages - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-7
7.4 Screen Captures and Logs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-9
7.5 Remote Access to the Service Platform - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12
7.6 Common Service Desktop (CSD) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-14
7.7 How to use the Auto Tester program - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-18
7.8 Troubleshooting Trees, Instructions and Tech Tips - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-20

7.1 Collect vital System Information

3. On the right side of the screen select Administration and then click the System Info tab.
The following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a
malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:
• System Type
• System Serial number (also visible on label on back of the system)
• Application Software version
• Backup version (File name, Date of Factory Settings, Tune version, etc.)
• additional information (e.g., Hardware ID, “Mainboard Type”, HW configuration, etc.)
Note All the above information can be found in the "System Info" page; see: Figure 7-1 on page 7-3 .

Figure 7-1 System Setup - Administration - SYSTEM INFO page
Note Move the scroll bars downwards to view additional information about the installed software/hardware.
Figure 7-1 System Setup - Administration - SYSTEM INFO page
1 Serial Number 7 Factory Settings: Date & Tune version
2 System Type 8 Hardware configuration (board versions)
3 Software Version 9 Mainboard Type (e.g. ADVANTECH ATX)
4 Application Software 10 Console version
5 Hardware ID 11 Operating System and its License Status
6 Backup File Name

7.1.1 Shortcuts List
Press the Ctrl + H key simultaneous to display the shortcuts list and a description of what they do.
Figure 7-2 Shortcuts list (Ctrl + H)
Table 7-1 list of shortcuts + description of what they do
Shortcut Description Shortcut Description
Ctrl + C copy text Alt + F6 export process logger snapshots (to

USB Drive, CD or network share)
Alt + D export system state (Full Backup and Alt + F7 start/stop process logger
Dump files) to D:\export
Ctrl+ Alt + D Factory use ONLY! This function is Ctrl + F8 Factory use ONLY! This function is
not intended for the user. not intended for the user.
Ctrl + H shortcuts list (see: Figure 7-2 above) Shift + F9 start remote socket control
Ctrl + Alt + I start/stop presentation mode Alt + F9 stop remote socket control
Alt + P stores screenshot on D:\export Shift + Ctrl + F11 Factory use ONLY! This function is
not intended for the user.
Ctrl + S User Program save Crtl + Alt + F11 Factory use ONLY! This function is
not intended for the user.
Shift + Ctrl + T Touch test Alt + Backspace undo typing
Ctrl + U User Programs Shift + Delete cut text
Ctrl + V paste, insert text from clipboard Shift + Insert insert text (paste)
Ctrl + X cut text Ctrl + Insert copy text
Ctrl + Z undo typing Print Screen Fast Export
Shift + Ctrl + F1 save Logfile snapshot Shift + Print Fast Export all
Screen
Alt + F5 create process logger snapshot

7.2 Request for Service (RFS)

Note Service Connectivity has to be checked out once before you can request for service. i.e., Service Platform
has to be configured properly; see Section 3.13.8 "InSite Configuration" on page 3-70 .
There are 2 possibilities to contact GE:
• by means of the GE “Remote Status Icon” that is displayed on the bottom of the screen
Move the cursor to the InSite link (GE icon) at the right bottom of the display
screen and press the left trackball key (= left-click). The “Contact GE” form (see
Figure 7-3 below) is displayed.
• via the System Setup "Service" page

5-27 on page 5-50 ).
5. Click the Service Tools button to display the Service Tools window.
6. Click the RFS button and fill out the displayed form. (Enter detailed problem description.)
Figure 7-3 Contact GE - Request for Service
Note Connection must be checked out! (1)

7. Click the Send button to send the problem description to GE Service/Application representatives.

A request confirmation screen is displayed.
Figure 7-4 Request submitted

8. Write down and keep the Reference Number (A) for follow up procedures, then click OK.
The request is saved in QUEUE for reviewing and/or resending.
Note If the service platform is not configured an Error message is displayed. The request is NOT sent!
Figure 7-5 Contact GE - Queue

7.3 Check Point Voltages
7.3.1 User Interface - Status LEDs
The LED within the start key (ON/OFF button) on the User Interface is used to signal the status of the
Voluson E-Series system.
The following states are implemented:
Orange System in standby mode.
Green System in normal operation mode.
FPGA_CONF_DONE = low
blinking
IF-FPGA not initialized -> probably FrontEnd (RFM board) or Power Supply
Orange <=> Green
(RSP) issue
NO light System is switched OFF (circuit breaker)
NO light probably Power Supply (RSP) defect
7.3.2 Power Supply (RSP) Status LEDs
On the backside of the ATX board near the fans 3 green status LEDs are mounted. These LEDs are used for
signaling the status of the Power Supply (RSP).
Figure 7-6 check green LEDs inside RSP
LED 3 Off: 12V_FE off

On: 12V_FE on
LED 4 Off: FPGA_CONF_DONE = low

On: FPGA_CONF_DONE = high
LED 5 Off: ATX supply off

On: ATX supply on

7.3.3 Boot Up Diagnostic Status LEDs
Boot up diagnostic LEDs behind the right side door should help to diagnose system issues easier.
1 5V Standby
2 Configuration done
3 PC Power OK
4 HDD status
Figure 7-7 LEDs behind right side door
Table 7-2 Status LED´s Overview
ON OFF
5V Standby (green) • 5V Standby voltage available from Power • 5V Standby voltage not available
supply (RSP) • No mains voltage, mains power cable not
• If in parallel the ON/OFF button of the console connected
is dark then the line up to the Console is • System is switched off (circuit breaker off)
interrupted (RSP -> RTB -> RTT -> RTU). • Power supply (RSP) defective
Configuration done • Configuration of the FrontEnd was successful • FrontEnd FPGA was not initialized correctly ->
(green) probably issue with RFM-Board
• In this state the ON/OFF button of the console
is blinking (orange <-> green)
• Further boot up is continued without FrontEnd
hardware.
PC Power OK (green) • PC was started, ATX supply voltages are • PC was not started correctly
switched on (the PC has got ATX-Power) • RSP could not send „Start PC“ Signal, PC did
not send „PS_ON“ signal
• All cables/connectors between Power supply
(RSP) and PC should be checked
• BackEnd (PC-Board) or Power supply (RSP)
could be defective
HDD Status (red) • Access to the hard disk (normally blinking) • No access to the hard disk
useful to observe hard disk activities • Depending on the status of the system software
hang-ups can be confirmed

7.4 Screen Captures and Logs

There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the screen so
it may be recovered by the OnLine Center. This is accomplished by saving the image(s):
1. to archive and export them (as jpg, bmp or tiff) to DVD/CD or external USB drive
2. as jpg and bmp to D:\export by pressing the Alt + P key on the alphanumeric keyboard
Note: Successive Alt + P keystrokes (max. 20) overwrite existing snapshots at destination HDD!
3. creates one snapshot (Alt-D.bmp) + “Full Backup” of the System state (fullbackup -> fb1) saved on D:
\export by pressing the Alt + D key on the alpha-numeric keyboard
7.4.1 Capturing a Screen
The following is the generic process to capture any screen from the Voluson E-Series system.
1. Navigate to, and display the image/screen/volume to be captured.
2. Press the P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 or P6 key (depending on system configuration) on the control console
and store the image onto the clipboard (frame on left side of the screen).
Note A short summary of P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 or P6 keys configuration is shown in the status area on the screen.
Figure 7-8 summary of keys configuration
3. Select the stored image(s) and export them to DVD drive, an external USB drive (optional) or mapped
Network drive (jpg, bmp, tiff or Volume file).

7.4.2 Export Log's and System Data
There are two possibilities to export system data (and log´s):

1. by pressing the Alt + D key to save a snapshot and “Full Backup” of the System state; see Section
7.4.2.1 on page 7-10
2. via the Export System Data button in the System Setup - Administration - Service page; see Section
7.4.2.2 on page 7-11
7.4.2.1 Export System Data (by pressing the ALT + D key)

Alt + D uses “Full Backup” to gather data from the system. In addition it creates one screen shot (Alt-D.bmp)
of the point in time when Alt + D was pressed. The main use is when R&D or OLC need detailed information
about the system (e.g., when experiencing strange behaviour or when the problem should be investigated by
R&D). It is not intended to replace or enhance the existing Full Backup functionality.
The Full Backup created by Alt + D is protected by a password that can be customized. Whenever
transmitting system state to R&D, do not forget to inform them about any password change.
Data can be stored on the hard disk (D:\export\fullbackup\fb1), or you can export them to DVD/CD, etc.
Including the D:\export folder, which contains dump files (for details see Section 7.4.2.2.1 on page 7-11 ),
Autotester script files, SMART logs, sniffer logs and screen shots (Alt + P).
Note Successive Alt + D keystrokes overwrite existing snapshots at destination (Internal) HDD.
1. Press the Alt + D key on the keyboard simultaneously.
Figure 7-9 "Alt-D" backup
2. Select whether you want to backup data with our without hardware diagnosis tests.
Please detach all probes if you want to execute hardware diagnosis, then click Yes.
Figure 7-10 System Configuration Save
3. Select the destination of the “System state” backup.

4. Select the Next button to start the backup process.
After saving the data, the Voluson E-Series reboots and the application starts again.

7.4.2.2 Export Log's and System Data (via Service Page)

5-27 on page 5-50 ).
5. Click on the Export System Data button to Full Backup the System state. This includes dump files and
text files, full Service Database informations about probes, boards, Software, Options and the Event
Log File.
7.4.2.2.1 Dump file

Every time an error message is produced, a dump file and a text file containing the error dump and the error
message are created in D:\export. Up to 20 dump files are stored there.
Figure 7-11 system has encountered a problem
After clicking on OK the system reboots automatically.

7.5 Remote Access to the Service Platform

7.5.1 General - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-12
7.5.2 How the Customer enables/disables Disruptive Mode and VCO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-13
7.5.1 General
This allows GE technicians to view the entire customer´s desktop and operation system. Using VCO (Virtual
Console Observation) a service technician or the OLC (OnLine Center) can access and modify all settings
and programs or run diagnostics on the customer's Voluson E-Series system.
When Voluson E-Series systems can be serviced remotely, service costs are minimized, and customers
benefit from decreased costs and decreased downtime for their systems.
Remote access to the Voluson E-Series system requires permission and customer input before a GE service
technician or OLC can access the customer's system remotely.
Disruptive Mode can be selected by the customer directly on the Voluson E-Series (see Section 7.5.2 on
page 7-13 ), or requested remotely by the service technician or OLC .

7.5.2 How the Customer enables/disables Disruptive Mode and VCO
1. If not already in read mode, Freeze the image.

2. Move the cursor to the InSite link (GE icon at the right bottom of the display screen).
3. Press the right trackball key (= right-click).
4. Select Connect Clinical Lifeline (see: Figure 7-12 below). This activates “Disruptive Mode” and “VCO”
for the application OLC to quickly assist the customer.
Figure 7-12 Connect Clinical Lifeline
5. Select Cancel respectively Disconnect to turn OFF “Disruptive Mode” and “VCO”.
Note Visual information about GE remote status is shown in the status area on the right bottom of the screen. At
EC330 (BT18) systems the trackball functions are displayed in the trackball status area of the screen.
Gray = Idle State Remote access is inactive.
EC330 only: Move the cursor over the GE icon to show trackball functions
• Contact : Section 7.2 "Request for Service (RFS)" on page 7-5
• Configuration: Section 3.13.8 "InSite Configuration" on page 3-70
• Menu: Displays the Remote Access (Disruptive Mode) menu
Yellow = Access Remote Access connection is active, but Disruptive Mode and Virtual Console
pending Observation (VCO) is not yet enabled.
Red = Disrupted Remote Access is active. All processes [UL_VNC and UL_CSD] are active. In this
State state the Voluson E-Series system should NOT be used clinically.
New Software Update Package is available for download and installation.

Gray + envelope
If a GE Service Technician requests Remote Access Permission

If a GE Service technician requests remote access to your Voluson E-Series system, following message
appears on the screen.
Figure 7-13 Insite User Session Message
To enable Disruptive Mode click OK.
Note If the customer does not wish to have diagnostics running at the time of the request, select Cancel. A
message is sent back to the OLC or FE that permission to change Disruptive Status is denied.

7.6 Common Service Desktop (CSD)

Whenever any hardware diagnostic tests have to be executed on site, the CSD must be accessed via the -
All Programs - Voluson -GE Field Engineer - Common Service Desktop.
The navigation bar at the top of the screen shows the top level menu choices.
Figure 7-14 Common Service Desktop - Home
Note As described in Section 5.13 on page 5-49 , the service platform uses a web-based user interface to provide
access to common service components. The Service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is
in English only. There is no multi-lingual capability.
7.6.1 Error Logs - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-14
7.6.2 Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.6.3 Image Quality - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.6.4 Calibration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.6.5 Configuration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-15
7.6.6 Utilities - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
7.6.7 Replacement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
7.6.8 PM - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
7.6.1 Error Logs
When the Error Logs page is selected, different log viewing options are available.
Figure 7-15 Common Service Desktop - Error Logs
Select the Log Viewer option in the left pane of the Error Logs page. Available logs are displayed in a
separate window.

7.6.2 Diagnostics
Figure 7-16 Common Service Desktop - Diagnostics
Note This page is not populated in this version.
7.6.3 Image Quality
Figure 7-17 Common Service Desktop - Image Quality
7.6.4 Calibration
Figure 7-18 Common Service Desktop - Calibration
7.6.5 Configuration
In the Configuration page, you can view and modify different device informations.
Figure 7-19 Common Service Desktop - Configuration

7.6.6 Utilities
The Utilities page contains a variety of Windows utility tools to indicate the status of the system, in addition to
various other tools.
Figure 7-20 Common Service Desktop - Utilities

7.6.6.1 Common Utilities - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-16
7.6.6.2 Scanner Utilities - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-17
7.6.6.1 Common Utilities
Event Log Viewer

Select the log you wish to view:
• Application link = an event log relative to application events
• System link = an event log relative to system events
• Log Name = enter the Log Name you want to view and click the View button
Disruptive Mode
Allows to enable or disable disruptive mode.
Disk Usage
All drives (real & virtual) mounted on the system will be shown in the right frame. Each drive will display the
total size in bytes and the total number of free bytes.
IP Configuration
Windows IP Configuration: The TCP/IP information for the device + all real and virtual networking interfaces
are displayed.
Network Status
All ports (listening & established) are displayed along with any external/foreign address that might be
connected to the device.
Windows Services
The currently active windows services (applications) are displayed.

User Accounts
Shows the internal account information that was provided and set up on the system by the OLC.
Shared Resources
Indicates the resources being shared by the system.
Disk Defragmenter
Shows how to execute a Disk Defragmentation.
Gather Logs Utility

This will gather up logs and presets. Logs are zipped up and located in (D:\export\Logs_xxxx.zip) for retrieval
by the OnLine Center.
Image Viewer Utility

A list of all images stored in D:\export is displayed. It is possible to display the Images.
Image Compress & Delete Utility

A list of all images stored in D:\export is displayed. It is possible to compress or delete the select the images.
The compressed files are added to (D:\export\xxxx.zip).
7.6.6.2 Scanner Utilities
Device Listener Service

This will analyze the USB connect/disconnect logs from the Device Listener Server. The output is displayed
on the screen.
Dicom Verify
This enables to verify DICOM devices.
7.6.7 Replacement
Figure 7-21 Common Service Desktop - Replacement
7.6.8 PM
Figure 7-22 Common Service Desktop - PM

7.7 How to use the Auto Tester program

5-27 on page 5-50 ).
5. Activate the “Auto Tester” program by clicking Start. The following message box appears.
Figure 7-23 Autotester activation
6. Click OK.
7. Press the Alt Gr key on the alphanumeric keyboard.
8. Activate the “Auto Tester” program by clicking the “Record” icon on the displayed screen.
Figure 7-24 Autotester record
9. Start scanning. You can scan normally and everything will be recorded to the program (up to several
hours).
Note It is important that you are recording the processes where the errors normally occur.
Stop the program by clicking on [Stop] shown on the screen, or by pressing the Alt Gr key
on the alphanumeric keyboard.

The following screen appears.
Figure 7-25 Autotester finished
10. Select the “Save” icon. The file will be saved in D:\Export\AutotesterScripts\*.*.
11. Press Alt + D to export system data and the needed logs. Operation see Section 7.4.2.1 "Export
System Data (by pressing the ALT + D key)" on page 7-10 .
Note The standalone recorded "Auto Tester" file makes only sense with the Alt + D log! To analyze the workflow
the exact date and time of occurrence needs to be documented!
12. If desired, save the script file also on DVD/CD. Therefore:
- Insert an empty DVD/CD+R/RW in the Drive and select the “Burn on CD” icon.
- Enter a Filename.
- After the DVD/CD write is finished click the OK button.
13. Close the “Auto Tester” program.
7.7.1 Limitation of the Auto Tester
The following information will not be recorded. Depending on the moment the Auto Tester is activated, this
must be provided by the customer or the field engineer.
• Which probe is in use and which probes are connected?
• Which Mode is activated?
• Which peripherals are connected (Dicom, Printer, etc..)?
Collected information from all steps above + exported system data and needed logs (Alt + D) can be sent to
the Make Center. With this information the Make Center can see how the customer is using the system and
reproduce potential failures.
Note Providing all information at once will help the Make Center find the root cause and speeds up finding a
solution for the customer.

7.8 Troubleshooting Trees, Instructions and Tech Tips

7.8.1 System does not boot up - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-21
7.8.2 Noise disturbs the Image - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-22
7.8.3 Trackball Malfunction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-25
7.8.4 Printer Malfunction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-26
7.8.5 Monitor Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-27
7.8.6 DVD/CD-Drive Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-28
7.8.7 Network Troubleshooting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-31
7.8.8 Activate Windows - Network Connectivity Issues - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-32
7.8.9 Tech Tips - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-33

7.8.1 System does not boot up
Figure 7-26 System does not start to boot up - Troubleshooting

7.8.2 Noise disturbs the Image
Figure 7-27 Noise disturbs the Image - Troubleshooting
1 Section 7.8.2.1 "How to analyze the EMC noise" on page 7-23

7.8.2.1 How to analyze the EMC noise

1. Switch on the Voluson E-Series system and choose settings which show EMC noise in the ultrasound
image.Typically the ultrasound probe must be contacted (hold in hand/apply to body) to observe EMC
noise.
2. Disconnect one by one all cords that are connected to the Voluson E-Series system like LAN/Ethernet,
VGA, DVI, S-Video, USB, ... on the ultrasound system-side and observe the EMC noise.
3. If EMC noise is still present after disconnecting all cables, then use the stand-alone Power Filter
(H48701EL) to power the Voluson E-Series system. Connect the Power Filter between AC mains and
the Voluson E-Series system.
Figure 7-28 Power Filter - Connection Scheme
Note Make sure, that:

- the Power Filter (1) is located behind (not under) the Voluson E-Series system.
- the Power Filter (1) is not close to any metallic devices.
- the AC mains power cable (3) is not located near/under the Voluson E-Series system.
- the AC mains power cable (3) is not located close to the short 1m Power Extension cord (2).
4. Switch on the Voluson E-Series system.

5. Activate the ultrasound probe and choose settings which show EMC noise in the ultrasound image to
check for EMC noise (EMC noise should be absent). If EMC noise is still present – then check again for
any other conducting connections to the Voluson E-Series; perform step 2.) again.
6. Connect one by one other cords to the Voluson E-Series system like LAN/Ethernet, VGA, DVI, S-
Video, USB, ... and check for EMC noise.
If a stand-alone UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) is available to power the Voluson E-Series
Connect the UPS between AC mains and the Voluson E-Series system in the same manner as shown in
Figure 7-28; - instead of the stand-alone Power Filter.
1. Switch on the Voluson E-Series system.
2. Activate the ultrasound probe and choose settings which show EMC noise in the ultrasound image to
check for EMC noise (EMC noise should be visible).
3. Disconnect one by one all cords that are connected to the Voluson E-Series system like LAN/Ethernet,
VGA, DVI, S-Video, USB, ... on the ultrasound system-side and observe the EMC noise.
4. If EMC noise is still present after disconnecting all cables, then disconnect the AC mains power cord
that supplies the UPS from the wall outlet socket.
If EMC noise is absent, then it is confirmed that the EMC noise source is in the power line of the wall
outlet socket.
5. If EMC noise is still present – then check again for any other conducting connections to the Voluson E-
Series; perform step 3.) again.
6. Connect one by one other cords to the Voluson E-Series system like LAN/Ethernet, VGA, DVI, S-
Video, USB, ... and check for EMC noise.

For reducing EMC noise consider following options
• use WLAN instead of LAN-cable

• use wireless video transmitter instead of VGA-cable, DVI-cable, S-Video-cable, ...
If EMC noise does not depend on whether the ultrasound probe is contacted
When the EMC noise does not depend on whether the ultrasound probe is contacted (hold in hand/apply to
body), then do the following:
1. Hold the ultrasound probe only at the cable and change the orientation of the ultrasound probe.
2. If the EMC noise changes by changing the orientation of the ultrasound probe then the EMC noise is
caused by a magnetic field in the room/building.
In such situations the Power Filter (H48701EL) cannot reduce the EMC noise.

7.8.3 Trackball Malfunction
Figure 7-29 Trackball Malfunction
Connect an USB-Mouse to one of the USB-Connectors of the Voluson E-Series system (the USB connectors
beside the DVD-Drive are recommended). So the system remains operable until the trackball problems are
solved.

7.8.4 Printer Malfunction
Figure 7-30 Printer Malfunction

7.8.5 Monitor Troubleshooting
Fault symptom Check these items
No image Check the power cord is properly connected.
Check the video cable is properly connected.
Check no pins of the video cable are bent.
Check if video is present on backplane.
Picture is fuzzy Adjust the picture contrast and picture brightness. Some SVGA cards having an
excessive video output level will cause a fuzzy picture at the maximum contrast
level.
Video test patterns are not clear, Replace the monitor.

bright, parallel or square
Note For further details see Section 6.2 "LCD Monitor Adjustment" on page 6-2 .

7.8.6 DVD/CD-Drive Tests

7.8.6.1 Export images from "Local Archive" to DVD/CD+R/RW - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-28
7.8.6.2 Record Spectral Doppler display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-30
7.8.6.1 Export images from "Local Archive" to DVD/CD+R/RW

1. Insert an empty, formatted DVD/CD+R/RW disc into the drive. At a DVR-Drive use a DVD+RW only!
2. Enter “Patient Archive” by pressing the Patient ID key on the control console.
Figure 7-31 Patient Archive - ARCHIVE
3. On the right side of the screen select Archive (1).

4. If not already selected, choose “Local Archive” from the “Source” pull-down menu (2).
5. Select an exam with images (3).

6. Export images of the selected exam to DVD/CD+R/RW
Figure 7-32 Export images to DVD/CD - *.4dv format
a. Click on Export.
b. If not already selected, choose “DVD/CD” resp. "DVD Rec" from the pull-down menu.
c. Enter "File name".
d. Select any Voluson Format (*.4dv) from the pull-down menu.
e. Click the Save button.
After successful export, perform an import of images

1. On the right side of the screen select Import.
2. Choose “DVD/CD” resp. "DVD Rec" from the “Source” pull-down menu.
3. Select the folder where the file was stored and the file name.
4. Click Open to display the images.
Limits: All images, which have been exported to DVD/CD+R/RW are visible.
Press the Eject key on the alphanumeric keyboard and remove the media from the drive.

7.8.6.2 Record Spectral Doppler display

Note The option SW DVR (Software Digital Video Recording) is required to perform this test.
1. Insert an empty, formatted DVD/CD+R/RW disc into the drive.
Note If you use an unformatted DVD+RW, recording is impossible! To format the DVD, press the DVD key and
then select the Format button.
2. Press the PW key on the control panel to start PW preparation mode.
3. Activate Doppler motion display by pressing the right/left trackball key.
4. Press the DVD key on the control console once to display the remote control menu.
Figure 7-33 Remote Control menu
5. In the remote menu touch the Record button to record a Doppler motion display (e.g., of the Carotid).
6. Touch the Stop button to stop recording.
7. Touch the Finalize button. The recorded motion sequence is stored on DVD.
8. Touch the Play button to play-back the recorded Doppler motion sequence.
With the Skip buttons the next/previous sequence can be selected.
Limits: The recorded Doppler motion sequence is running. The audio signal of the arterial flow can be heard in the
loudspeaker(s).

7.8.7 Network Troubleshooting
7.8.7.1 No Connection to the Network at all
Gray = Cable disconnected or no network signal on a connected cable.
Green = Cable connected to a network. Does not imply proper network settings.
1. Check that the network cable between the Voluson E-Series system and the wall network is connected
and well seated in both ends. (Use a network cable that is known to be OK.)
2. Connect a network cable between the system and a PC by either using a hub or a cross-over cable.
Try to ping from system to IP address on PC. If OK, hardware connection inside the system is OK.
7.8.7.2 GE remote service connection

Note Visual information about GE remote status is shown in the status area on the right bottom of the screen. At
EC330 (BT18) systems the trackball functions are displayed in the trackball status area of the screen.
Gray = Idle State Remote access is inactive.
EC330 only: Move the cursor over the GE icon to show trackball functions
• Contact : Section 7.2 "Request for Service (RFS)" on page 7-5
• Configuration: Section 3.13.8 "InSite Configuration" on page 3-70
• Menu: Displays the Remote Access (Disruptive Mode) menu
Yellow = Access Remote Access connection is active, but Disruptive Mode and Virtual Console
pending Observation (VCO) is not yet enabled.
Red = Disrupted Remote Access is active. All processes [UL_VNC and UL_CSD] are active. In this
State state the Voluson E-Series system should NOT be used clinically.
New Software Update Package is available for download and installation.

Gray + envelope

7.8.8 Activate Windows - Network Connectivity Issues
Issue: In case of network connectivity issues, it may not be possible to activate your Windows operating system on the
Voluson E-Series systems. Monitor screen display: Activate Windows. Go to Settings to activate Windows.
Note: When present, the "Activate Windows" message will not impact system performance in any way.
Cause: Activation servers of Microsoft are not reachable.
Solution: 1. Check Operating System License Status in Utilities - Setup - Administration - System Info tab.
a. Licensed -> Windows is properly activated.
b. Notification -> Windows is not activated. Proceed with troubleshooting steps.
Figure 7-34 Licence Status: NOTIFICATION => Windows is not activated

2. Make sure that the Voluson E-Series system is connected to the internet.
3. Contact your local IT department to make sure that inside your local network infrastructure activation servers of
Microsoft are reachable. If needed, contact your GE service technician for further support.

7.8.9 Tech Tips

7.8.9.1 Storing SonoView images to Voluson E-Series systems - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-33
7.8.9.1 Storing SonoView images to Voluson E-Series systems
Issue: Storing SonoView images from Voluson 730/Expert/Pro/ProV to Voluson E-Series systems.
Cause: Archive is different (no SonoView on Voluson E-Series systems).
Solution: 1. Perform SonoView backup on Voluson 730/Expert/Pro/ProV to external hard disk (USB) or DVD.
2. Import file "V730.mdb" from external hard disk (USB) or DVD to your Voluson E-Series system.
Procedure
1. Connect the external hard disk (USB) or insert the DVD with the SonoView backup to the Voluson E-
Series system.
2. Enter “Patient Archive” by pressing the Patient ID key on the control console.
Figure 7-35 Patient Archive -ARCHIVE
3. On the rigth side of the screen select Archive (1).

4. Click on Import (2). The "Open File" window appears.
5. If not already selected, choose the proper drive from the “Look In” pull-down menu (3).
6. Change the “File of type” field to V730Format (v730.mdb) (4).
7. Browse for the folder where the SonoView Backup was stored.
8. Select the file v730.mdb and then click on Open (5).


Chapter 8
Replacement Procedures
This chapter contains replacement procedures for different modules and their
subsystems.
Note The Manpower, time and Tools indicated in the Sub-sections include all requirements from
Preparations to Installation Procedures.
Warning: DO NOT touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking necessary ESD
precautions.
1. When installing boards, ESD may cause damage to a board. ALWAYS connect yourself, via
an arm-wrist strap, to the advised ESD connection point located on the rear of the system (to
the right of the power connector).
2. Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.
Warning
No covers or panels should be removed from the system (high-voltage risk). Service and repairs
must only be performed by authorized personal. Attempting do-it-yourself repairs invalidate
warranty and are an infringement to regulations and are inadmissible acc. to IEC 60601-1.
The Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) must not be disposed as
unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact the
manufacturer or other authorized disposal company for information concerning the
decommission of your equipment.


8.1 Returning/Shipping System, Probes and Repair Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-2
8.2 System Software - Installation/Upgrade procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-3
8.3 Software and Functional Checks after Installation/Upgrade procedure - - - - - - - - - - - 8-14
8.4 Image Settings Only - Loading Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-15
8.5 Full Backup (Full System Configuration) - Loading Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-15
8.6 Image Archive - Loading Procedure - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-15
8.7 Replacement or Activation of Options - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-16
8.8 Replacement of Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-17
8.9 Replacement of the Cable Holder - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-22
8.10 Replacement of the Probe Holder (Kit) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-22
8.11 Replacement of the Probe Holder for Endocavity probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-23
8.12 Replacement of the Trackball Ring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-23
8.13 Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-24
8.14 Replacement of the Caps for Encoders and/or Joycoders - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-25
8.15 Replacement of the Caps for Hardkeys - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-26
8.16 Replacement of Fuses at Power Supply Module (RSP) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-27
8.17 Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date - - - - - - - 8-28
8.1 Returning/Shipping System, Probes and Repair Parts

When returning or shipping the Voluson E-Series system in the original packaging:
• system must be lowered to its minimum height with monitor flapped down
• the control console has to be centered and locked in “unextended” position
Note For control console positioning see Section 6.3 on page 6-4 .
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GE policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GE
employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly
decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids
be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or and ultrasound probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people
who will receive or open this package.
Note The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items what were saturated and/or dripping with
human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care”
are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purpose and must be transported as a hazardous material.
Note The user/service staff should dispose of all the waste properly, per federal, state, and local waste disposal
regulations.
The Voluson E-Series system is not meant to be used for long-term storage of patient data or images. The
user is responsible for the data on the system and a regular backup is highly recommended.
If the system is sent for repair, please ensure that any patient information is backed up and erased from the
system before shipping. It is always possible during system failure and repair to lose patient data. GE is not
responsible for the loss of this data.
If PHI (Patient Healthcare Information) data needs to be sent to GE employees for service purposes, GE will
ascertain agreement from the customer. Patient information shall only be transferred by approved service
processes, tools and devices restricting access, protecting or encrypting data where required, and providing
traceability in the form of paper or electronic documents at each stage of the procedure while maintaining
compliance with cross-border restrictions of patient information transfers.

8.2 System Software - Installation/Upgrade procedure

Introduction
There are two possibilities to update the system software:
1. via the FMI from DVD button in the System Setup Service page
- Software parts to be upgraded (e.g., Ultrasound Application Software, Service Software, EUM,
MS patches, etc.) and installation time depend on contents of the used System DVD.
- If the currently installed software has to be upgraded to a newer version, a new software specific
"Permanent key" is required. Please contact your local distributor or GE service representative.
2. by downloading and installing a Software Update Package via active InSite connection
- Software parts to be upgraded (e.g., Ultrasound Application Software, Service Software, EUM,
MS patches, etc.) and installation time depend on contents of the SW update package.
- PRECONDITION: InSite connection has to be configured and checked out. Operation see:
Section 3.13.8 "InSite Configuration" on page 3-70 .
Caution
Disconnecting ALL external USB devices (except DVD drive) is NECESSARY. Re-installation of any
previously attached printer has to be done after the upgrade procedure.
Note Installing the Bluetooth Printer and its connection set is NOT possible by the user.
Manpower
One person ~ 1 hour (depends on contents of System DVD resp. SW update package, peripherals, etc.)
Tools
System DVD

8.2.1 Before the Installation/Upgrade Procedure
Before performing the Software Upgrade:

• perform an initial verification of the system and its functions
• check the current Application Software version and the installed Options as described in Section
8.2.1.1 on page 8-4
• if the currently installed software has to be upgraded by a newer version, calculate new software
specific “Permanent key” in OKOS. Please contact your local distributor or GE service representative to
get the necessary key.
Note It is NOT necessary to save Full System Configuration (Full Backup) prior to the upgrade. All existing User
Programs, 3D/4D Programs and Auto Text settings remain untouched!
8.2.1.1 Check vital System Setup data

3. On the right side of the screen select Administration and then click the System Info tab.
4. Check the currently installed Software/Hardware version of the Voluson E-Series system.
Figure 8-1 Version check: System Setup - Administration - System Info page
1 currently installed Ultrasound Application Software version
2 Date of Factory Settings

5. Select the Option tab to see which options are currently installed. Please print out the options page or
write down down the state of the options (P = permanent, I = inactive).
Note It is not necessary to note the Permanent Key; it is the state of the option that matters.
Figure 8-2 System Setup - Administration - Options page
1 D = Demo (Option is activated for demo and expires at date shown in the "Valid" column)
I = Inactive (Option is not activated)
P = Permanent (Option is permanently activated, i.e.purchased)
d = deactivated (Option is inactive)
2 Permanent Key
Note If the currently installed software has to be upgraded to a newer version, and the system is updated via the
FMI from DVD button, a new software specific “Permanent key" is required. Please contact your local
distributor or GE service representative.

8.2.2 System Software - Installation Procedure (FMI from DVD)
The system software installation procedure starts with saving and recording the settings present on the
system (silent “Rollback”). Then the new software is written to the hard disk using the System DVD.
Application Settings are automatically updated, to match with new Software version.
Existing User Programs, 3D/4D Programs and Auto Text remain unaffected! Afterwards the new software is
configured such that it is integrated again in its environment.
Note For more detailed information, see Section 5.14.3.3 "FMI from DVD" on page 5-51 .
1. Perform Preparations as described in Section 8.2.1 on page 8-4 .
2. If not already done, disconnect all external USB devices (except DVD drive).
3. Insert the System DVD into the drive.
4. Restart the system. (Turn system OFF and then back ON.)
Note If the system boots into LINUX, the “Boot priority order” in BIOS is incorrect. In this case, cancel the software
installation procedure (select Exit/Reboot by means of the [Arrow] keys (right, left, up, down) and the [Enter]
key on the keyboard) and then contact your service representative.
Figure 8-3 Service Tools
9. Click the FMI from DVD button for updating the System Software.
10. Verify that only the DVD drive is connected to the system, then click OK.
Figure 8-4 Verify that USB devices are disconnected, then click OK
11. To start update procedure click Yes.

The system saves Full Backup in silent mode on R:, then it reboots into LINUX. A silent “Rollback”
image from C:\ is stored on R:\. After executing all LINUX commands, the system reboots again.
Note If the currently installed software has to be upgraded to a newer version, a new software specific “Permanent
key is required.

12. Enter the appropriate “Permanent Key” (calculated in OKOS; http://3.187.187.9/OKOS), select OK and
confirm with Enter.
Figure 8-5 enter Permanent key
If the entered Permanent key is correct, following window appears, confirm with Enter.
Figure 8-6 confirm key
At EC310 the format of the Permanent key has been changed.
New Format from EC310 onwards: Previous Format still valid until EC300:
e.g., 63XQ-4DE4-Ek1D-A3CFT-JQ0C-YSFF e.g., 02148EBCA0069003EF6F980F
Characters are case sensitive !! Characters are not case sensitive.

Hyphens (-) must not be entered. They are
self-created.
13. Check disk is performed automatically - restart.
Figure 8-7 Check disk is performed automatically
14. 3 dots (one after the other) appear on the screen.

15. Booting auto ....
Figure 8-8 Boot screen - auto
16. Updating will take some time ....
Figure 8-9 Please wait ...
17. Please wait until all processes are finished (100 percent completed).
18. The system is rebooting into windows (Boot screen - Voluson).
Note An automated process was developed to install the required software parts, perform check disk, remap drive
letters and match settings. During this process the system might reboot several times!
Figure 8-10 automatic processes are running
19. Please wait until all processes are finished. Finally the 2D screen is displayed on the monitor.
20. Remove the System DVD from the DVD/CD+R/RW Drive drive.

21. If the Touch panel is not working after first boot up, please shutdown the system; then boot up again.
22. Reconnect the external devices, install all the printers and adjust the printer settings as described in
Section 3.6 "Printer Installation" on page 3-36 .
23. Check and match Printer Remote Control selection in the Setup - Connectivity - Button Configuration
page.
24. Confirm date and time setting in the Setup - General Settings - General page.
25. Perform Software and Functional checks as described in Section 8.3 on page 8-14 .

8.2.3 Software Update Package - Download/Installation Procedure
Overview
This icon (at right bottom of the screen) indicates that a new Software Update
Package is available for download and installation.
An InSite permanent user is required for automatic system error reporting to the digital service network; see
Section 3.13.8.1 "How to create an InSite permanent User" on page 3-71 .
The system software installation procedure starts with saving and recording the settings present on the
system (silent “Full Backup" and "Rollback”). Then the new software is written to the hard disk. Application
Settings are automatically updated, to match with new Software version.
Existing User Programs, 3D/4D Programs and Auto Text remain unaffected! Afterwards the new software is
configured such that it is integrated again in its environment.
Update Procedure
1. Remove any CD/DVD from the DVD drive.
2. Perform Preparations as described in Section 8.2.1 on page 8-4 .
3. If not already done, disconnect all external USB devices (except DVD drive).
4. Press the ON/OFF Standby button on the control console.
5. In the displayed screen click Download.
Figure 8-11 download SW update package
6. Download takes some time; please wait. (Download my be paused by means of the Pause button.)
7. When download is finished, click Install.
Figure 8-12 download finished - click Install
Note Installation may take up to one hour. DO NOT interrupt the installation!
If you want to install the new software later, click Exit. Installation can be resumed by clicking Install (in the
Shutdown window).

8. After clicking Install, the SW update procedure starts.

The system saves Full Backup in silent mode on R:, then it reboots into LINUX.
Figure 8-13 installation in progress
9. Check disk is performed automatically - restart.
Figure 8-14 Check disk is performed automatically
A silent “Rollback” image from C:\ is stored on R:\. After executing all LINUX commands, the system
reboots again.
10. 3 dots (one after the other) appear on the screen.
11. Booting auto ....
Figure 8-15 Boot screen - auto

12. Updating will take some time ....

First the image is saved to R:\ (Saving NTSF to image ....); then the image is restored from R:\
(Restoring NTFS from image ....).
Figure 8-16 Please wait ...
13. Please wait until all processes are finished (100 percent completed).
14. The system is rebooting into windows (Boot screen - Voluson).
Note An automated process was developed to install the required software parts, perform check disk, remap drive
letters and match settings. During this process the system might reboot several times!
Figure 8-17 automatic processes are running
15. Please wait until all processes are finished.

Finally the 2D screen with the "New Software Verification" report is displayed on the monitor.
Figure 8-18 New Software Verification
16. Reconnect the external devices, install all the printers and adjust the printer settings as described in
Section 3.6 "Printer Installation" on page 3-36 .
17. Check and match Printer Remote Control selection in the Setup - Connectivity - Button Configuration
page.
18. Confirm date and time setting in the Setup - General Settings - General page.
19. Perform a check of all modes and features listed. (Move the cursor over the feature name to get
information how to check.)
20. When all features are OK enter your signature and then click Send; see: Figure 8-18 above.
Note If one feature gets "Failed", rollback the installation (restore the previously used system configuration). For
more detailed information, see Section 5.15.3 on page 5-53 .

8.3 Software and Functional Checks after Installation/Upgrade procedure

3. On the right side of the screen select Administration and then click the Options tab.
4. Verify the correct settings of the Options page; see: Figure 8-2 on page 8-5 . If necessary, customize
the settings according to the printout.
5. Click the System Info tab.
Figure 8-19 System Setup - Administration - System Info page
1 Ultrasound Application Software version 3 Tune version of Application presets
2 Backup File Name
6. Check the Application Software version.

7. Check that the Tune version of the Application presets match the Application Software version.
Note It is neither required nor advisable to reload a previously stored “Full Backup” after a software upgrade that
was performed by means of the FMI from DVD button! If the Tune version does not match the Application
Software version, a warning message appears whenever booting up the system. In this case, it is essential
to load the proper Application Settings (image presets), adapted for the installed software version. Refer to:
Section 5.14.3.14 "Load Application Settings" on page 5-52 .
8. Perform basic functional checks to ensure system is functioning normally.
9. Check Service Connectivity; if required, perform InSite Checkout. i.e., Service platform has to be
configured properly; see Section 7.6.5 "Configuration" on page 7-15 .

8.4 Image Settings Only - Loading Procedure

Introduction
The image settings contain:
• 2D Factory and 2D User Presets
• 3D/4D Factory and 3D/4D User Presets
• Annotation Presets
• Scan Assistant Configuration
• Measure Configuration
• Biopsy Lines
Loading Procedure
see: Section 4.4.2 "Load Small Backup (Scan Settings)" on page 4-12
8.5 Full Backup (Full System Configuration) - Loading Procedure

Introduction
The Full Backup contains following data:
• User Settings (databases and files containing User Programs, 2D/3D/4D Presets, gray curves etc.)
• System Settings (general "Setup" settings such as Language, Time/Date format, Button configuration,
Annotation settings, Biopsy lines, Peripheral data, Video Norm, Archive configuration, etc.)
• Measure Configuration (user specific measure setup settings)
• User Authentication Data (User Authentication Configuration (user names, group names), LDAP
configuration, audit trail configuration,...)
• Patient Archive (database containing patient demographic exam data and measurements) - no images
• V830 Settings (Options resp. Permanent Key that is specific for enabled software options and Demo
Key)
• Image Transfer Configuration (DICOM configuration e.g., DICOM servers, AE Title, Station Name, etc.)
• Network Configuration (Network settings: IP address, Network Profiles, e-mail configuration, network
printer, network drives, computer name)
• Service Platform (state of the Service Software)
Loading Procedure
see: Section 4.4.4 "Load Full System Configuration (Full Backup)" on page 4-17
8.6 Image Archive - Loading Procedure

Introduction
A backup of the Image Archive contains the Patient Archive (database containing patient demographic data
and measurements) + images.
Loading Procedure
see: Section 4.4.6.2 "Load Image Archive" on page 4-22

8.7 Replacement or Activation of Options

Note For a list of available SW options and detailed description, refer to Section 5.1.4 "Description of Software
Options" on page 5-12
8.7.1 How to activate Options by means of a "Demo Key" or a "Permanent Key"

3. On the right side of the screen select Administration and then click the Option tab.
Figure 8-20 Setup - Administration - Options page (e.g., Voluson E10)
1 D = Demo (Option is activated for demo and expires at date shown in the "Valid" column)
I = Inactive (Option is not activated)
P = Permanent (Option is permanently activated, i.e.purchased)
d = deactivated (Option is inactive)
2 Permanent Key
4. Position the cursor inside the input field desired and press the right/left trackball key.
5. If one exists, clear/edit the current Permanent Key.
6. Enter the encrypted Permanent Key with the keyboard and click on Submit. (Code will be checked.)
7. Click the Save&Exit button.
Note After activating a Permanent Key, restart (turn off and on) the Voluson E-Series system.
At EC310 the format of the Permanent key has been changed.
New Format from EC310 onwards: Previous Format still valid until EC300:
e.g., 63XQ-4DE4-Ek1D-A3CFT-JQ0C-YSFF e.g., 02148EBCA0069003EF6F980F
Characters are case sensitive !! Characters are not case sensitive.

Hyphens (-) must not be entered. They are
self-created.

8.8 Replacement of Covers

8.8.1 Replacement of the Footrest Cover & Wheel Axis Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-17
8.8.2 Replacement of the Front Frame - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-18
8.8.3 Replacement of the Air Filter Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-19
8.8.1 Replacement of the Footrest Cover & Wheel Axis Cover
Manpower
One person, 1 minute
Tools
none
Preparations
8.8.1.1 Footrest Cover & Wheel Axis Cover - Removal Procedure

1. For unlocking, turn the 4 quick release devices below the footrest 90°.
Figure 8-21 turn quick release devices 90° and remove the footrest cover
2. Remove the Footrest Cover & Wheel Axis Cover.
8.8.1.2 Footrest Cover & Wheel Axis Cover - Installation Procedure

1. Place the (new) Footrest Cover & Wheel Axis Cover on the original position.
2. For locking, turn the 4 quick release devices below the footrest 90°.

8.8.2 Replacement of the Front Frame
Manpower
One person, 5 minutes
Tools
none
Preparations
8.8.2.1 Front Frame - Removal Procedure

1. Gently remove the Voluson covering (A) and the rectangular covering strip (B).
Figure 8-22 remove covering strips
8.8.2.2 Front Frame - Installation Procedure

1. Stick the rectangular covering strip and the Voluson covering back on the Front Cover.

8.8.3 Replacement of the Air Filter Cover
Manpower
Tools
none
Preparations
8.8.3.1 Air Filter Cover - Removal Procedure

1. Pull the Air Filter Cover up.
Figure 8-23 pull the Air Filter Cover up
8.8.3.2 Air Filter Cover - Installation Procedure

1. Place the (new) Air Filter Cover on its original position.

8.8.3.3 Replacement of the Printer Flap
Manpower
Tools
Phillips screwdriver PH1 and PH2
Preparations
8.8.3.3.1 Printer Flap - Removal Procedure

1. Open the Side Cover Doors on both sides of the system.
2. Use a screwdriver and press the hinges inside.
Figure 8-24 press the hinges inside with a screwdriver

3. Pull out the Printer Flap (A).
8.8.3.3.2 Printer Flap - Installation Procedure

1. Place the (new) Printer Flap on its original position.
Note Make sure to hear the hinges snap.

8.8.3.4 Mounting/Replacing the Printer Box
Manpower
Tools
Preparations
2. Remove the Printer Flap as described in Section 8.8.3.3.1 on page 8-20 .
3. Remove the Voluson covering and rectangular covering strip (Front Frame) as described in Section
8.8.2.1 on page 8-18 .
8.8.3.4.1 Printer Box - Installation Procedure

1. Place the (new) Printer Box on its original position.
Note Make sure to hear the hinges snap.
Figure 8-25 mount Printer Box

8.9 Replacement of the Cable Holder

Manpower
Tools
8.9.1 Cable Holder - Replacement Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws below the control console and then remove the Cable Holder.
Figure 8-26 loosen 2 screws and remove cable

holder
2. Place the new Cable Holder at its original position and fasten it with 2 screws.
8.10 Replacement of the Probe Holder (Kit)

Manpower
Tools
none
8.10.1 Probe Holder (Kit) - Replacement Procedure
1. Simply pinch the clip and then pull out the Probe Holder to be replaced.
Figure 8-27 remove the probe holder
2. Insert the new Probe Holder from the kit.

8.11 Replacement of the Probe Holder for Endocavity probes

Manpower
Tools
8.11.1 Probe Holder (endocavity) - Replacement Procedure
1. Loosen 3 screws and then remove the Probe Holder for Endocavity probes.
Figure 8-28 loosen screws and then remove probe holder
2. Place the new Probe Holder at its original position and fasten it with 3 screws.
8.12 Replacement of the Trackball Ring

Manpower
Tools
none
8.12.1 Trackball Ring - Replacement Procedure
1. Remove the Trackball Ring by turning it counterclockwise (red arrow).
Figure 8-29 Trackball with Trackball

“fixation” ring
2. Mount the Trackball Ring by turning it clockwise (blue arrow).

8.13 Replacement of Key Caps (by special native language keys)

Note The table in Section 9.8 "Options and Upgrades" on page 9-28 shows the available Key Cap Kits. Keys to
be removed depend on the (special native) language kit.
Manpower
Tools
small-sized slotted screwdriver or tweezers
Preparations
8.13.1 Key Caps - Removal Procedure
1. Place a small slotted screwdriver between the Key Cap to be removed and its neighboring Key Cap.
2. Gently lift the Key Cap, until it is completely loosened from its base.
Figure 8-30 key cap replacement
3. Remove the Key Cap.
8.13.2 Key Caps - Installation Procedure
1. Carefully place the appropriate Key Cap in position on the keyboard, taking care to place the plastic
alignment pin in the correct position so that the Key Cap is the right way up and reads correctly.
2. Push the Key Cap down until it snaps into position.
3. Power On/Boot Up the system as described in Section 4.2.1 on page 4-3 .
4. Setup the Keyboard Language Layout as described in Section 6.4 on page 6-5 and then type with the
keyboard to check the function of each key.

8.14 Replacement of the Caps for Encoders and/or Joycoders

Manpower
Tools
none (poss. small-sized slotted screwdriver or tweezers)
8.14.1 Caps for Encoders and/or Joycoders - Replacement Procedure
1. Remove the caps for Encoders and/or Joycoders.
Note Do not loose integrated metal spring in each cap.
Figure 8-31 remove caps
2. Mount the caps for Encoders and/or Joycoders.

8.15 Replacement of the Caps for Hardkeys

Note Replacement procedure depends on key caps that have to be replaced!
• If just the circle key caps have to be replaced, refer to: Section 8.15.1 on page 8-26
• If trackball buttons or mode key slices have to be replaced too, please contact your local distributor or
GE service representative
8.15.1 Replacement of Circle Key Caps only
Manpower
One person, approx. 1 minute/cap
Tools
small-sized slotted screwdriver or tweezers
8.15.1.1 Circle Key Caps - Replacement Procedure

1. By means of a small slotted screwdriver, carefully push against the Circle Key Cap.
2. Lift the cap, until it is completely loosened from its base.
Figure 8-32 push against the circle cap and lift it
3. Place the new Key Cap down until it snaps into position.

8.16 Replacement of Fuses at Power Supply Module (RSP)

Manpower
Tools
small-sized slotted screwdriver
Preparations
8.16.1 Fuses at Power Supply Module (RSP) - Replacement Procedure
1. Open the fuse protection at the power inlet block (1) with a small-sized slotted screwdriver.
Figure 8-33 exchange fuses
2. Remove the fuse holder and exchange fuses.

8.17 Replacing optional Peripherals / How to mount Peripherals at a later date

Note Normally auxiliary devices and peripherals come pre-installed with the Voluson E-Series system.
Manpower
One person, 30 - 60 minutes (depending on peripherals)
Tools
slotted screwdriver
Preparations
8.17.1 Mounting/Replacing a Secondary "Patient" Monitor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8-29
Caution
Warning

8.17.1 Mounting/Replacing a Secondary "Patient" Monitor
Note A Secondary Monitor is NOT intended for diagnostic use. It is an additional device used to allow the patient
to watch the proceedings.
8.17.1.1 Preparing the Isolation Transformer
Figure 8-34 Isolation Transformer kit for Secondary Monitor
Caution
For changing the input/output voltage or fuses the isolation transformer should not be connected. The wrong
fuses and position of the input/output voltage selector may cause major damage on connected peripherals.
1. Before using the Isolation Transformer you must check the input/output voltage settings to meet the
ratings of the line power available in your location or country.
2. For changing the input/output voltage, remove the label by means of a small socket wrench.
3. Switch both voltage selectors (input as well as output voltage) to 115V or 230V. Consider that changing
the input/output voltage also requires to change the fuses!
Figure 8-35 change input/output voltage
4. For changing the fuses, open the fuse protection at the power inlet block with a small screwdriver,
remove the fuse holder and exchange fuses.
115V (100-130V) -> 4AT

230V (220-240V) -> 2AT
Figure 8-36 exchange

fuses
5. Assure that the connected loads can be operated with the chosen voltage.

8.17.1.2 Connection of a Secondary Monitor and Isolation Transformer

Note DO NOT connect a Secondary Monitor to the Voluson E-Series via USB cable. Use the supplied VGA cable.
Caution
Caution
The transformer must be out of the reach of the patient. However, it needs to be within cable length from the
monitor and a socket. The transformer is IPX 0. There is no protection against ingress of liquids!
Caution
All necessary modifications to wall and buildings must be performed by a professional to avoid structural
damage and electrical hazard.
Note For connection scheme see: Figure 3-22 on page 3-30 .

1. Plug the VGA cable (from Secondary Monitor) to the VGA Out connector on the external I/O connector
panel (GES) on the rear of the system.
2. Place the isolation transformer on the floor or mount it on the wall.
3. Plug the Power cable (from Secondary Monitor) to the isolation transformer. The Power cable of the
transformer itself connect to a wall socket.
4. Use this power switch to power on the Transformer.
Note Wait ~ 1 minute before turning on your monitor.

5. Press the main power switch on the Secondary Monitor.
6. Power On/Boot Up the system as described in Section 4.2.1 on page 4-3 .
7. Compare the picture on the newly installed monitor with the picture on the Voluson E-Series monitor.
8. Measure Leakage Currents according to IEC 60601-1.
Note If you need to change the configuration of the newly installed monitor, please, refer to the manual of the
Secondary Monitor, which is enclosed in the Wall mount kit.
Note The monitor needs to be switched of separately at the main power switch of the monitor.

Chapter 9
Renewal Parts
This chapter gives an overview of replacement parts available for the Voluson E-
Series system.

9.1 List of Abbreviations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-2
9.2 Parts List Groups - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3
9.3 Housing - Mechanical Hardware Parts & Covers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-4
9.4 User Interface - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-9
9.5 Monitor + Monitor Replacement Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-17
9.6 Main Power Modules - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-20
9.7 Main Board Module - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-20
9.8 Options and Upgrades - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-28
9.9 Miscellaneous Cables - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-30
9.10 Optional Peripherals and Accessories - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-37
9.11 System Manuals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-44
9.12 Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-49
9.13 Biopsy Needle Guides - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-57

Renewal Parts
9.1 List of Abbreviations

AC Alternating Current
ADC Analog to Digital Converter
APM Asset Performance Tool
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
Assy Assembly
BEP BackEnd Processor
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRU Customer Replaceable Unit
CSD Common Service Desktop
DAC Digital to Analog Converter
DC Direct Current
DSP Digital Signal Processing
DVI Digital Visual Interface
ePAT Probe Assessment Tool (Probe Diagnostics)
EUM Electronic User Manual
FE FrontEnd
FRU Y = Replacement part / N = Non Stock part
GGF Beamformer Module
HDD Hard Disk Drive
Int Internal
I/O Input/Output
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
MAN ECG Module
PCI Peripheral Component Interconnect
PWA Printed Wire Assembly
RAM Random Access Memory
RFM (RF-Interface & Beamformer) FE Mainboard
RSE Pencil Probe Board (CW-Doppler)
RSP Power Supply Module
RSX (Beamformer Receiver/Transmitter) Extension Board for FE Mainboard (RFM)
RTB Distribution Board Bottom
RTF Probe Control Board
RTH Distribution Board USB-Hub
RTT Distribution Board Top
RTU Control Console
RTV Video Converter Board
SMBus System Management Bus
UI User Interface
UIS Ultrasound Application Software
Vet Veterinary / Animal use
WPA PSK WiFi Protected Access Pre-Shared Key

Note: PSK is also referred to as "Personal" encryption standard.

Renewal Parts
9.2 Parts List Groups
Figure 9-1 Console Views
Table 9-1 Mechanical and user accessible parts
Item Part Group Name Description
100 - "Housing - Mechanical Hardware Parts & Covers" on page 9-4 Housing Covers (except UI and Monitor), Caster
Wheels, Handle
200 - "User Interface" on page 9-9 Console (keyboard, trackball, display, special knobs
and switches) Loudspeakers, Disk Drive, Probe
holder, Console Covers, etc.
300 - "Monitor + Monitor Replacement Parts" on page 9-17 Monitor + Monitor Replacement Parts
400 - "Main Power Modules" on page 9-20 Power Supply Module
500 - Main Board Module .

- "FrontEnd (US-Part) Components" on page 9-21 Ultrasound (FrontEnd) Components
- "BackEnd (PC-Part) Components" on page 9-24 PC-Part (BackEnd) Components
600 - "Options and Upgrades" on page 9-28 Software Options and Upgrades
700 - "Miscellaneous Cables" on page 9-30
800 - Optional Peripherals and Accessories .

- "Printers" on page 9-37 DVD recorder and Cable Kits
- "Drives and additional Devices" on page 9-39 B/W Printer, Color Printer, DeskJet Printer
- "Optional Equipment" on page 9-42 USB Stick, HDD Drive, WLAN, etc.
Secondary Patient Monitor, etc.
"System Manuals" on page 9-44
900 - Probes
- "2D-Probes - Curved Array Probes" on page 9-49
- "2D-Probes - Linear Array Probes" on page 9-51
- "2D-Probes - Phased Array Probes" on page 9-52
- "Real-Time 4D Volume Probes" on page 9-53
- "CW-Doppler - Pencil Probes" on page 9-56
950 - "Biopsy Needle Guides" on page 9-57

Renewal Parts
9.3 Housing - Mechanical Hardware Parts & Covers

Table 9-2 Housing - Mechanical Hardware Parts & Covers
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
101 Top Cover KTZ303564 Top Cover EC300 1 N Y
102 Side Cover incl. Door (left) KTZ303548 Side Cover left (incl. Door for probe cables) EC300 1 N Y
103 Side Cover incl. Door (right) KTZ303554 Side Cover right (incl. Door for probe cables) EC300 1 N Y
104 Cable Hook KTZ303615 Cable Hook, EC300 2 N Y

Renewal Parts
105 Front Cover KTZ303559 Front Cover EC300 incl. Plug Support 1 N Y
106 Front Cover 2 KTZ304042 1 N Y
107 Front Frame KTZ303557 Front Frame (Voluson covering + rectangular covering 1 Y Y
strip) EC300
108 Printer Flap incl. Hinges KTZ303815 Printer Flap (incl. Hinges) EC300 1 N Y
109 Printer Box Extension (for KTZ303932 Additional Printer Box for Color Printer A6, EC300 1 N Y
Color Printer)

Renewal Parts
110 Footrest KTZ303565 Footrest EC300 1 Y Y
111 Wheel Axis Cover KTZ303567 Wheel Axis Cover EC300 1 Y Y
112 Back Cover KTZ303569 Back Cover (Back Door) EC300 1 N Y
113 Handle Base KTZ303568 Handle Base EC300, replaced by KTZ304045 (Handle 1 N Y
complete)
114 Handle Bar KTZ303570 Handle Bar EC300, replaced by KTZ304045 (Handle 1 N Y
complete)

Renewal Parts
115 Handle complete EC300 KTZ304045 Handle complete (Handle Bar + Handle Base) EC300, 1 N Y
replaces KTZ303568 + KTZ303570
116 Air Filter Cover KTZ303826 Air Filter Cover EC300 1 Y Y
117 Air-Flow parts KTZ304078 Air-Flow parts 1 N Y
118 Power Supply Cover KTZ303563 Power Supply Cover EC300 1 N Y

Renewal Parts
119 Caster front ("Steinco") KTZ303911 Caster front (lockable, 2 pcs.) EC300 2 N Y
120 Caster back ("Steinco") KTZ303912 Caster back EC300 1 N Y
121 Caster back, lockable KTZ303913 Caster back (lockable) EC300 1 N Y

("Steinco")
122 Caster front universal KTZ304057 Caster front, 2 pcs. (lockable) incl. hexagon bolts, 2 N Y
("Tente") washers, lock-nuts and quick fastener
123 Caster back universal KTZ304058 Caster back, 2 pcs. (1 pcs. is lockable) incl. hexagon 1/1 N Y
("Tente") bolts, washers and lock-nuts
124 Lifting Column, 12V KTZ302806 Lifting Column, 12V 1 N Y
Note DO NOT mix "Steinco" and new universal "Tente" Casters. Please identify the used Casters before ordering!

Renewal Parts
9.4 User Interface

Table 9-3 User Interface
201 Cable Holder KTZ134656 Probe Cable Holder (1 pcs.) for Voluson E-Series 2 N Y
202 Probe Holder Set KTZ303933 Probe holder Set RTU100 (Probe holder inlet left/right, 1 Y Y
Gel holder inlet and holder for Endocavity probe left)
203 Probe Holder right KTZ304030 Probe Holder for Endocavity probe right) 1 N Y
204 Back Cover Set KTZ304031 Back Cover Set RTU100 1 N Y
1 Monitor Plug Cover

2 Monitor Adapter Cover
3 Top Housing Cover

Renewal Parts
205 Bumper Set KTZ303585 Bumper Set RTU100 1 N Y
206 Edge Protector Set KTZ303934 Edge Protector Set RTU100 1 N Y
207 Caps Alphanumeric Keyboard KTZ303965 Caps Alphanumeric Keyboard RTU100, English 1 Y Y
208 Hardkey Set RTU100 KTZ303936 Hardkey Set RTU100 1 Y Y
209 Hardkey Set RTU110 KTZ304070 Hardkey Set RTU110 1 Y Y

Renewal Parts
210 Caps for Encoder and KTZ303937 Caps for Encoder and Joycoder RTU100 5/7 Y Y
Joycoder
211 Bottom Housing RTU100 KTZ303583 Bottom Housing RTU100 1 N Y
212 RTU100 Console KTZ303935 RTU100 Console EC300 1 N Y
213 RTU110 Console KTZ304071 RTU110 Console EC320 1 N Y

Renewal Parts
214 Top Cover RTU100 KTZ303938 Top Cover RTU100; incl. 3 Voluson logo stickers 1 N Y
215 Trackball Kit KTZ303939 Trackball Kit RTU100 1 N Y
216 Trackball Ring KTZ303940 Trackball Ring RTU100 (2 pcs.) 1 Y Y
217 Encoder Mechanic KTZ303941 Encoder Mechanic RTU100 (5 pcs.) 5 N Y
218 Joycoder Mechanic KTZ303942 Joycoder Mechanic RTU100 (7 pcs.) 7 N Y

Renewal Parts
219 Console Cable Set KTZ303943 Console Cable Set RTU100 1 N Y
220 Disk Drive3 DVD+(R)W - KTZ303258 DVD+(R)W Writer internal (no own cabinet) 1 N Y
SATA
221 RTH6b.Px - Distribution USB- KTZ304007 RTH6x - Distribution Board USB-Hub 1 N Y

Hub Board
222 RTT3.P3 - Distribution Board KTZ280290 RTT3 - Distribution Board Top 1 N Y

Top

Renewal Parts
223 RTH50 - Distribution Board KTZ304040 RTH50 - Distribution Board "complete" 1 N Y
224 USB3.0 Cable RTU100 KTZ304048 Cable USB3.0 (from RTH50 to external USB connectors 2 N Y
beside DVD Drive at Top Console) 2 pcs.
225 USB3.0 Hub - 1 Port KTZ304012 USB3.0 Hub (1 Port) RTU100 1 N Y
226 Loudspeaker Top Console KTZ208132 Loudspeaker on User Interface (1 pcs.) 2 N Y
227 Fan User Interface KTZ220645 Fan User Interface 1 N Y
228 Console Alphanumeric KTZ303944 Console Alphanumeric Keyboard RTU100 1 N Y

Keyboard

Renewal Parts
229 Console Main Board KTZ303945 Console Main Board RTU100 1 N Y
230 Console Sub Board KTZ303946 Console Sub Board RTU100 1 N Y
231 Labels UI, VE6, VE8, VE10 KTZ304103 Labels for User Interface (Voluson logo stickers, 3 pcs. 1 Y Y
each for VE6, VE8 and VE10)
232 Console Touchscreen KTZ303947 Console Touchscreen complete RTU100 1 N Y

complete
233 Console Touch with Housing KTZ303948 Console Touch with Housing RTU100; without any 1 N Y
electronics

Renewal Parts
234 Display-Joycoder Board KTZ303949 Display-Joycoder Board RTU100 1 N Y
235 Front Key Board KTZ303950 Front Key Board RTU100 1 N Y
236 Front Key Board with cable KTZ303966 Front Key Board with cable RTU100 1 N Y

Renewal Parts
9.5 Monitor + Monitor Replacement Parts

Table 9-4 Monitor + Monitor Replacement Parts
301 Monitor OLED 22" (MDM300) KTZ304059 22" Color Image OLED Monitor complete 1 N Y
complete
302 Monitor Back Cover Set KTZ304102 Monitor Back Cover Set MDM3xx (22" OLED Monitor 1 Y Y
MDM3xx
8 only)
303 Monitor Arm (Ergotron) - 22" KTZ304101 Monitor Arm (Ergotron) for 22” OLED Monitor 1 N Y
OLED
8 Monitor Back Cover depends on the currently installed "OLED" Monitor Arm type (MDT30 or Ergotron). If the Monitor Arm is replaced by the other Monitor Arm type, the
Monitor Back Cover needs to be exchanged too (i.e., ordered separately, KTZ304102).

Renewal Parts
304 Monitor Arm (Daeil) MDT30 - KTZ304069 MDT30 Monitor Arm (Daeil) for 22” OLED Monitor 1 N Y
22" OLED
305 Monitor Color LCD 23” KTZ303839 23” Color Image LCD Monitor complete 1 N Y
(MDM200) complete
306 Monitor Color LCD 23” KTZ304047 1 N Y

(MDM210) complete
307 Monitor Housing Set KTZ303951 Monitor Housing Set for 23" LCD Monitor 1 N Y
308 Monitor Back Cover Set KTZ304090 Monitor Back Cover Set MDM2xx (23" LCD Monitor only) 1 Y Y
9
MDM2xx
9 Monitor Back Cover depends on the currently installed Monitor Arm type (MDT20 or Ergotron). If the Monitor Arm is replaced by the other Monitor Arm type, the Monitor
Back Cover needs to be exchanged too (i.e., ordered separately, KTZ304090).

Renewal Parts
309 Monitor Arm (Daeil) MDT20 - KTZ303879 MDT20 Monitor Arm (DAEIL) with trapezoidal mounting 1 N Y
23" LCD plate for 23” LCD Monitor
310 Monitor Arm (Ergotron) - 23" KTZ304089 Monitor Arm (Ergotron) for 23” LCD Monitor 1 N Y
LCD
311 Monitor Cable Set MDT20 KTZ303952 MDT20 Monitor Cable Set for 23” LCD Monitor (1x Cable 1 N Y
USB3.0, 1x Cable DVI to HDMI, 1x Mini DIN Monitor
Power Cable)
312 Monitor Cable USB3.0 KTZ304034 MDT20 Monitor Cable USB3.0 (2 pcs.) 2 N Y
MDT20

Renewal Parts
9.6 Main Power Modules

Table 9-5 Main Power Modules
401 RSP3-3c - Power Supply KTZ303892 Power Supply Module (RSP) 1 N Y

EC300
403 Fuse Set KTZ280043 Fuses for Power Supply (T1.25A, T1.6A, T10A and T15A; - Y Y
10 pcs. each = 40)
9.7 Main Board Module

9.7.1 FrontEnd (US-Part) Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-21
9.7.2 BackEnd (PC-Part) Components - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-24

Renewal Parts
9.7.1 FrontEnd (US-Part) Components
Table 9-6 FrontEnd (US-Part) Components
501 RTF100-EC300 Probe KTZ303953 Probe Control Assembly (Voluson E6 only 1 N Y

Control Board
502 RTF200-EC300 Probe KTZ303954 Probe Control Assembly (Voluson E8 only 1 N Y

Control Board
503 RTF300-EC300 Probe KTZ303955 Probe Control Assembly ( Voluson E10, compatible to all 1 N Y
Control Board versions
504 RTF340-EC320 Probe KTZ304072 Probe Control Assembly ( Voluson E6 and Voluson E8 1 N Y
Control Board

Renewal Parts
505 RTF441-EC320 Probe KTZ304082 Probe Control Assembly ( compatible to all versions 1 N Y
Control Board
506 RSE10 Pencil Probe Board KTZ302856 Pencil Probe Board 1 N Y
507 RFM201 FE-Mainboard KTZ303916 FE-Mainboard; without MUX 1 N Y

without MUX
508 RFM221 FE-Mainboard + KTZ303915 FE-Mainboard + CW-steerable; without MUX 1 N Y

CW-steerable; without MUX
509 RFM323-EC320 FE- KTZ304073 FE-Mainboard + CW-steerable without MUX, Voluson E6 1 N Y

Mainboard without MUX and Voluson E8

Renewal Parts
510 RFM423-EC320 FE- KTZ304074 FE-Mainboard + CW-steerable without MUX, compatible 1 N Y

Mainboard without MUX to all versions
511 RSX10 - Extension Board for KTZ303250 Extension Board for FE-Mainboard RFM 1 N Y
RFM
512 RSX110 - Extension Board KTZ303759 Extension Board for FE-Mainboard RFM (Voluson E6 only 1 N Y
for RFM
513 RSX20 - Extension Board for KTZ303054 Extension Board for FE-Mainboard RFM + CW-steerable 1 N Y
RFM + CW-steerable
514 RSX120 - Extension Board KTZ303760 Extension Board for FE-Mainboard RFM + CW-steerable 1 N Y
for RFM + CW-steerable (Voluson E6 only

Renewal Parts
9.7.2 BackEnd (PC-Part) Components
Table 9-7 BackEnd (PC-Part) Components
551 Graphic Card 5 EC300, KTZ304029 Graphic Card for PC-Motherboard 1 N Y

GTX750
552 Graphic Card 6, EC320 KTZ304076 Graphic Card for PC-Motherboard 1 N Y

GTX950
553 Graphic Card 7 EC3x0, KTZ304106 Graphic Card for PC-Motherboard 1 N Y

GTX1050
554 Battery Lithium CR2032 (3V) KTZ208791 Lithium Battery CR2032 (3V) for PC-Motherboard 1 N Y
555 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) KTZ302446 Hard disk drive SATA 500 Gbyte (Western Digital or 1 N Y
Hitachi) System/Boot DVD (see: Table 9-8 on page 9-
28 ) is required

Renewal Parts
556 Fan Set (2 fan) for PC - KTZ134698 Fan for PC-box (2 fan) - BackEnd 1 N Y
BackEnd
557 Back End Processor (BEP) KTZ303830 Kit contains ATX Motherboard "ADVANTECH", CPU 1 N Y
Kit, EC300 (BT15/BT16), incl. cooler, RAM, Fan(s), housing + internal cables
housing and cables premounted
558 Back End Processor (BEP) KTZ304075 Kit contains ATX Motherboard "ADVANTECH", CPU 1 N Y
Kit, EC320 (BT17), incl. cooler, RAM, Fan(s), housing + internal cables
housing and cables premounted

Renewal Parts
559 Back End Processor (BEP) KTZ304107 Kit contains Motherboard, CPU cooler, RAM, Fan(s), 1 N Y
Kit, EC330 (BT18), incl. housing + internal cables premounted
housing and cables
560 PC-Cover plate for GES35 KTZ304108 PC-Cover plate for GES35 (I/O panel and Video 1 N Y
Converter Board)
561 RTB50.P1 - Distribution KTZ303930 Distribution Board Bottom 1 N Y

Board Bottom

Renewal Parts
562 RTV30 - Video Management KTZ303517 Video Management Board 1 N Y

Board
563 GES30 - External I/O KTZ303754 External Rear Panel incl. VGA, USB, Network and S- 1 N Y
Connection Panel Video cables to the Voluson E-Series system (internal)
564 GES35 - I/O Panel and Video KTZ304105 External I/O Panel and Video Converter Board (RTV35) 1 N Y
Converter Board (RTV35) incl. HDMI, VGA, USB, Network and S-Video connector

Renewal Parts
9.8 Options and Upgrades

Table 9-8 Software Options and Upgrades
601 System/Boot DVD EC330 KTZ304119 bootable DVD for System HDD recovery 1 Y Y
(BT18 - Ext.0, 18.0.0) Contents: SP with newest MS patches, Linux rescue
partition, System C: Image (Windows 10), UISApp,
Backup, EUM, Database Repair Tool, etc.
Note: Refer to SN79009, which is the best source for the
latest revision.
System/Boot DVD EC320 KTZ304100 partition, System C: Image (Windows 7), UISApp,
(BT17 - Ext.3, 17.0.3) Backup, EUM, Database Repair Tool, etc.
System/Boot DVD EC320 KTZ304094 latest revision.
(BT17 - Ext.2, 17.0.2)
System/Boot DVD EC320 KTZ304092

(BT17 - Ext.1, 17.0.1)

(BT17 - Ext.0, 17.0.0)
(BT16 - Ext.1, 16.0.1)

(BT16 - Ext.0, 16.0.0)
(BT15 - Ext.4, 15.0.4)

(BT15 - Ext.3, 15.0.3)

(BT15 - Ext.2, 15.0.2)

(BT15 - Ext.1, 15.0.1)
605 Upgrade Kit: Voluson E- H48691ZG BT16 Upgrade kit (incl. System DVD, System Manuals, - N N
Series BT15 to BT16 etc.)
606 Upgrade Kit: Voluson E- H48701MS BT17 Upgrade kit (incl. Hardware components, System - N N
Series BT15 to BT17 DVD, System Manuals, etc.)
607 Upgrade Kit: Voluson E- H48701GW BT17 Upgrade kit (incl. Hardware components, System - N N
608 Upgrade Kit: Voluson E- H48701WC BT18 Upgrade kit (incl. Hardware components, System - N N
609 Upgrade Kit: Voluson E10 H48701EC OLED Monitor Upgrade kit (incl. Monitor OLED 22" - N N
OLED Monitor MDM300, Monitor Arm for OLED, Upgrade Manual)
610 CW Doppler (SW) H48691NZ encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
611 Advanced 4D H48681FM encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N

Renewal Parts
612 VOCAL II - Volume H48681FN encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N

Calculation
613 Advanced VCI - Volume H48681FP encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
Contrast Imaging
614 STIC “Basic” - Spatio- H48681FS encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
Temporal Image Correlation
615 Coded Contrast Imaging - H48681FT encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
Contrast Media
616 SonoVCAD - Heart H48681FW encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
617 SonoAVC - Sono Automated H48681FX encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
Volume Count
618 SonoVCAD labor H48681FY encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
619 Anatomical M-Mode H48681FZ encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
620 Advanced STIC * - Spatio- H48681GD encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
Temporal Image Correlation
621 Elastography H48681GB encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
622 V-SRI H48681TK encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
623 HDLive (Europe and Latin H48691KK encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
America only)
624 HDLive Silhouette (BT15- H48691XZ encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
BT17)
625 HDLive Silhouette H48701WU encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
626 HDLive Studio H48701WW encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
627 SonoMetrium H48701WS encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
628 IOTA Simple Rules H48701WP encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
629 eM6C (Electronic 4D Probe) H48691YA encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
E4D Advanced Features
630 Full Disk Encryption H48701UX encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
631 Advanced Security Features H48701WM encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
632 SW DVR (Software Digital H48691XF encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
Video Recorder)
633 DVD and USB Recorder H48701WR encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
634 RLS Option (Russian H48691KG encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
Language Support)
635 4D View Package (PC H48691KL encrypted Software Option string (password) - N N
software)
636 Swedish Key Cap Kit KTZ303956 kit includes special native language keys - Y Y
637 Danish Key Cap Kit KTZ303957 kit includes special native language keys - Y Y
638 Norwegian Key Cap Kit KTZ303958 kit includes special native language keys - Y Y
639 Finnish Key Cap Kit KTZ303959 kit includes special native language keys - Y Y
640 Spanish Key Cap Kit KTZ303960 kit includes special native language keys - Y Y
641 French Key Cap Kit KTZ303961 kit includes special native language keys - Y Y
642 German Key Cap Kit KTZ303962 kit includes special native language keys - Y Y
643 Italian Key Cap Kit KTZ303963 kit includes special native language keys - Y Y
644 Russian Key Cap Kit KTZ303964 kit includes special native language keys - Y Y

Renewal Parts
645 Swiss Key Cap Kit KTZ304060 kit includes special native language keys - Y Y
646 South Slavic Key Cap Kit KTZ304086 kit includes special native language keys - Y Y
Note A sales order has to be obtained for item 605 - 635!

Software Options (item 602 - 618): Once the order has been processed, the option string can be either
entered by the customer, FE or Applications support.
Note For more detailed description of Software options and their functions, see: Section 5.1.4 "Description of
Software Options" on page 5-12 .
Note Not every feature is released in every country. Please contact Sales & Marketing in your region for
information on feature availability.
9.9 Miscellaneous Cables

Table 9-9 Miscellaneous Cables
701 SATA Data Cable for HD- KTZ300244 SATA Data Cable for HD-Drive 1 N Y
Drive
702 PCI-E Connection Cable KTZ303121 PCI-E Connection from FrontEnd to BackEnd Cable 1 N Y
(FEP - BEP)
703 Cable Stereo Jack - Cinch KTZ280285 Cable from PC-Sound-StereoJack to DVD Shelf 2 N Y
RoHS

Renewal Parts
704 KVX1 Network Cable - RoHS KTZ280284 Network Cable from external rear panel (GES) to the 1 N Y
Voluson E-Series (internal) rear panel
705 Cable DVI (M) to HDMI (M) KTZ303895 Cable DVI (M) to HDMI (M), 30 cm 1 N Y
706 Cable HDMI (M) to HDMI (M) KTZ304110 Cable HDMI (M) to HDMI (M) 1 N Y
707 Monitor Cable Set MDT20 KTZ303952 MDT20 Monitor Cable Set for 23” LCD Monitor (1x Cable 1 N Y
USB3.0, 1x Cable DVI to HDMI, 1x Mini DIN Monitor
Power Cable)
708 Monitor Cable USB3.0 KTZ304034 MDT20 Monitor Cable USB3.0 (2 pcs.) 2 N Y
MDT20

Renewal Parts
709 Power Cord - Europe 230V KTZ220388 Power Cord Europe 230V/240V used at Mains Input - Y Y
Connector C14 (10A type)
710 Power Cord - USA (Hops. KTZ220389 Power Cord USA Hospital Grade used at Mains Input - Y Y
grade) Connector C14 (10A type)
711 Power Cord - Japan (Hops. KTZ220390 Power Cord Japan Hospital Grade used at Mains Input - Y Y
grade) Connector C14 (10A type)
712 Power Cord - China KTZ220391 Power Cord China used at Mains Input Connector C14 - Y Y
(10A type)
713 Power Cord - Australia KTZ220392 Power Cord Australia used at Mains Input Connector C14 - Y Y
(10A type)
714 Power Cord - India RoHS KTZ280289 Power Cord India used at Mains Input Connector C14 - Y Y
(10A type)

Renewal Parts
715 Power Cord - United KTZ220476 Power Cord United Kingdom (UK) 240V used at Mains - Y Y
Kingdom (UK) Input Connector C14 (10A type)
716 Power Cord - South Africa KTZ220477 Power Cord South Africa used at Mains Input Connector - Y Y
C14 (10A type)
717 Power Cord - Argentina KTZ220478 Power Cord Argentina used at Mains Input Connector - Y Y
C14 (10A type)
718 Power Cord - Israel KTZ220479 Power Cord Israel used at Mains Input Connector C14 - Y Y
(10A type)
719 Power Cord - Switzerland KTZ220480 Power Cord Switzerland used at Mains Input Connector - Y Y
C14 (10A type)

Renewal Parts
720 Power Cord - Denmark KTZ220481 Power Cord Denmark used at Mains Input Connector C14 - Y Y
(10A type) 2 pcs.
721 Power Cord - Brazil KTZ280185 Power Cord Brazil used at Mains Input Connector C14 - Y Y
(10A type)
722 Power Cord - Extension KTZ301990 Power Cord Extension for C13 connector (2m) - Y Y

Renewal Parts
723 Console Cable Set RTU100 KTZ303943 Console Cable Set RTU100 1 N Y
1 cable LVDS
2 cable Backplane -> Display
3 cable USB-A -> USB-mini
4 cable Main <-> Satellite
5 cable Main -> Backplane
6 cable USB-A <-> USB-B, white
7 cable USB-A <-> USB-B, black
8 cable UI main power D-SUB
9 cable Trackball
10 cable earth connection, 50mm
11 cable Frontkey <-> Main
12 cable USB Main PCB <-> AN PCB (USB)
13 cable Main -> Light
14 cable Display/Joycoder PCBA -> Main (JST PA)
15 cable earth connection, 100mm
724 USB3.0 Cable RTU100 KTZ304048 Cable USB3.0 (from RTH50 to external USB connectors 2 N Y
beside DVD Drive at Top Console) 2 pcs.

Renewal Parts
725 GES30 External I/O KTZ303754 External Rear Panel incl. VGA, USB, Network and S- 1 N Y
Connection Panel Video cables to the Voluson E-Series system (internal)
726 Cable Harness 3 EC3xx KTZ304077 Cable Harness 3 (Grounding, Console, Monitor DVI, 1 N Y
USB3.0, USB UI and USB Hub cable), cable tube, tie-
wraps, etc.
727 2nd HDD Power Cable KTZ280126 S-ATA Power Y-splitter cable for data transfer from old to - N Y
new HDD
728 SATA Data Cable for DVD- KTZ303261 SATA Data cable for DVD-Drive 1 N Y
Drive
729 SATA Power Cable for DVD- KTZ303260 SATA Power cable for DVD-Drive 1 N Y
Drive Note: Only used when RTH6x is installed.

Renewal Parts
730 USB Cable for ECG module KTZ303296 USB cable for ECG module 1 N Y
731 ECG patient cable KTZ303297 ECG patient cable, IEC Type - Y Y
9.10 Optional Peripherals and Accessories

9.10.1 Printers - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-37
9.10.2 Drives and additional Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-39
9.10.3 Optional Equipment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-42
9.10.1 Printers
Table 9-10 Optional Peripherals and Accessories - Printers
811 Digital BW Video Printer (e.g., KTZ220507 Digital B/W Video Printer, USB-Port - N Y
Sony UP-D898MD) H48651ML
812 Digital Color Printer ( Sony 5389822 Digital Color Printer, A6, USB-Port - N Y
UP-D25MD) H46831B

Renewal Parts
813 DeskJet Color Printer KTZ300182 DeskJet Color Line Printer Bluetooth incl. Ink, Bluetooth - N Y
Bluetooth (HP Officejet 100) H48661MT Adapter(s) + power cable US and EU
814 Printer Box Extension (for KTZ303932 Additional Printer Box for Color Printer A6, incl. mounting - N N
Color Printer) H48691WX plates and screws
815 Color Laser Printer (HP 5456780 Color Laser Printer for 220V systems - N Y
LaserJet M451) H48701EZ
816 Color Laser Printer (HP 5438549 Color Laser Printer for 110V systems - N Y
LaserJet M451) H48701FA

Renewal Parts
817 Color Laser Printer (HP 066E8922 Color Laser Printer for 220V systems - N Y
LaserJet M452dn)
Color Laser Printer (HP KTZ304096 - N Y

LaserJet M452nw), Wi-Fi H48701EZ
Direct
818 Color Laser Printer (HP 066E8923 Color Laser Printer for 110V systems - N Y
LaserJet M452dn)
Color Laser Printer (HP KTZ304097 - N Y

LaserJet M452nw), Wi-Fi H48701FA
Direct
Note Illustrations may not correspond to the actual product!
9.10.2 Drives and additional Devices

Table 9-11 Optional Peripherals and Accessories - Drives and additional Devices
821 LAN Optical Isolation Box EP200132 LAN Patient Isolation Box - N Y
H45021EC
822 Gigabit Network Isolator KTZ303975 Gigabit Network Isolator - N Y

H48691RK
823 Cellular Modem KTZ304025 Cellular Modem (SIM Card Connection) incl. power supply - N Y
H48691WL and USB cable

Renewal Parts
824 USB Stick 2411544 USB Flash Memory Stick - Y Y

H48651TB
825 Wireless Network Interface KTZ196269 Wireless Network Interface (“Netgear” WG111v3 WLAN - Y Y
H48671DT Adapter)
obsolete, please order PNo 5737413 except for systems
located in Brazil and (South)Korea
826 USB-WLAN Stick Japan KTZ280076 USB-WLAN Stick Japan - Y Y

H48681TR obsolete, please order PNo 5737413
827 USB-WLAN Adapter A6210 5737413 USB-WLAN Adapter A6210 ("Netgear") - Y Y

H44932LH
828 Barcode Scanner KTZ304087 Barcode Scanner, USB - Y Y

H48701JH

Renewal Parts
829 ECG-preamplifier (MAN30) KTZ304009 consists of ECG-preamplifier and patient connection cable - N Y
H48691LN
830 ECG patient cable KTZ303297 ECG patient cable, IEC Type - Y Y

Renewal Parts
9.10.3 Optional Equipment

Table 9-12 Optional Peripherals and Accessories - Optional Equipment
831 Isolation Transformer kit H48671WN Isolation Transformer kit for Secondary Monitor incl. - - N
power cord set for US, EU and ROW (rest of world),
monitor power cable, fuses, documentation, etc.
832 Isolation Transformer KTZ220714 Isolation Transformer without cables, etc. - Y Y
833 Fuses for Isolation KTZ196333 Fuses for Isolation Transformer (2AT, 4AT; 10 pcs. each - Y Y
Transformer = 20)
834 RIC-Holder KTZ225469 Probe holder used for Real-time 4D endocavity probes - Y Y
(RIC) during disinfection process
835 Footswitch 3 buttons 5380960 Footswitch 3 buttons - Y Y

H48681WS

Renewal Parts
836 UPS (Uninterruptible Power H48691PD Medical-grade UPS protection with built-in line-interactive - - N
Supply) for 100-130V AC voltage regulation (corrects brownouts as low as 82V and
countries overvoltages as high as 142V back to normal 120V
levels).
837 UPS (Uninterruptible Power H48691PE Medical-grade UPS protection with built-in line-interactive - - N
Supply) for 220-240V AC voltage regulation (corrects brownouts as low as 155V
countries and overvoltages as high as 274V back to normal 230V
levels).
838 Power Filter KTZ304093 Power Filter to eliminate EMC noise (filter incl. cables) - - N
H48701EL
839 VET-Label-Kit KTZ304117 Lables for Veterinay systems (Veterinary Use label 1 pcs., - - Y
H48701WX Not for Human Use label 1 pcs., VET label 2 pcs.)

Renewal Parts
9.11 System Manuals

9.11.1 System Manuals for EC300
Service Manuals
Part Name Part No. - Voluson E8 Part No. - Voluson E6 Part No. - Voluson E10
Service Manual 5539550APB 5539550APB 5539550APB
User Manuals
Basic User Manual - English H48691TE H48691RU H48691UP
Basic User Manual - German H48691TF H48691RW H48691UR
Basic User Manual - Spanish H48691TG H48691RX H48691US
Basic User Manual - Italian H48691TH H48691RY H48691UT
Basic User Manual - French H48691TJ H48691RZ H48691UU
Basic User Manual - Portuguese (Brazil) H48691TK H48691SA H48691HP
Basic User Manual - Portuguese (European) H48691TL H48691SB H48691GA
Basic User Manual - Danish H48691TM H48691SC H48691WR
Basic User Manual - Dutch H48691TN H48691SD H48691WS
Basic User Manual - Finnish H48691TP H48691SE H48691GD
Basic User Manual - Greek H48691TR H48691SF H48691GE
Basic User Manual - Norwegian H48691TS H48691SG H48691GF
Basic User Manual - Polish H48691TT H48691SH H48691UW
Basic User Manual - Russian H48691TU H48691SJ H48691WT
Basic User Manual - Swedish H48691TW H48691SK H48691WU
Basic User Manual - Turkish H48691TX H48691SL H48691GK
Basic User Manual - Czech H48691TY H48691SM H48691WW
Basic User Manual - Hungarian H48691TZ H48691SN H48691GM
Basic User Manual - Latvian H48691UA H48691SP H48691GN
Basic User Manual - Lithuanian H48691UB H48691SR H48691GP
Basic User Manual - Estonian H48691UC H48691SS H48691GR
Basic User Manual - Slovakian H48691UD H48691ST H48691GS
Basic User Manual - Romanian H48691UE H48691SU H48691GT
Basic User Manual - Bulgarian H48691UF H48691SW H48691GU
Basic User Manual - Croatian H48691UG H48691SX H48691GW
Basic User Manual - Serbian H48691UH H48691SY H48691GX
Basic User Manual - Japanese H48691UJ H48691SZ H48691UX

Renewal Parts
Basic User Manual - Korean H48691UK H48691TA H48691GZ
Basic User Manual - Chinese H48691UL H48691TB H48691HN
Basic User Manual - Indonesian H48691UM H48691TC H48691HA
Basic User Manual - Slovenian H48691UN H48691TD H48691HB
Advanced Reference Manual - English H48691UY H48691UY H48691UY
Advanced Reference Manual - French H48691XG H48691XG H48691XG
Advanced Acoustic Output References - English 5504378 5504378 5504379
Service Manuals
User Manuals
Basic User Manual - English H48691ZJ H48701AZ H48701CK
Basic User Manual - German H48691ZK H48701BA H48701CL
Basic User Manual - Spanish H48691ZL H48701BB H48701CM
Basic User Manual - Italian H48691ZM H48701BC H48701CN
Basic User Manual - French H48691ZN H48701BD H48701CP
Basic User Manual - Portuguese H48691ZP H48701BE H48701CR
Basic User Manual - Danish H48691ZS H48701BG H48701CT
Basic User Manual - Dutch H48691ZT H48701BH H48701CU
Basic User Manual - Finnish H48691ZU H48701BJ H48701CW
Basic User Manual - Greek H48691ZW H48701BK H48701CX
Basic User Manual - Norwegian H48691ZX H48701BL H48701CY
Basic User Manual - Polish H48691ZY H48701BM H48701CZ
Basic User Manual - Russian H48691ZZ H48701BN H48701DA
Basic User Manual - Swedish H486701AA H48701BP H48701DB
Basic User Manual - Turkish H48701AB H48701BR H48701DC
Basic User Manual - Czech H48701AC H48701BS H48701DD
Basic User Manual - Hungarian H48701AD H48701BT H48701DE
Basic User Manual - Latvian H48701AE H48701BU H48701DF
Basic User Manual - Lithuanian H48701AF H48701BW H48701DG
Basic User Manual - Estonian H48701AG H48701BX H48701DH
Basic User Manual - Slovakian H48701AH H48701BY H48701DJ
Basic User Manual - Romanian H48701AJ H48701BZ H48701DK
Basic User Manual - Bulgarian H48701AK H48701CA H48701DL
Basic User Manual - Croatian H48701AL H48701CB H48701DM

Renewal Parts
Basic User Manual - Serbian H48701AM H48701CC H48701DN
Basic User Manual - Japanese H48701AN H48701CD H48701DP
Basic User Manual - Korean H48701AP H48701CE H48701DR
Basic User Manual - Chinese H48701AR H48701CF H48701DS
Basic User Manual - Indonesian H48701AS H48701CG H48701DT
Basic User Manual - Slovenian H48701AT H48701CH H48701DU
Basic User Manual - Ukrainian H48701DW H48701DY H48701EA
Basic User Manual - Kazakh H48701DX H48701DZ H48701EB
Advanced Reference Manual - English H48701AU H48701AU H48701AU
Advanced Reference Manual - French H48701AW H48701AW H48701AW
Advanced Acoustic Output References - French 5720757 5720757 5720757
Service Manuals
User Manuals
Basic User Manual - English H48701GR H48701GS H48701GP
Basic User Manual - German H48701JK H48701KY H48701GY
Basic User Manual - Spanish H48701JL H48701KZ H48701GZ
Basic User Manual - Italian H48701JM H48701LA H48701HA
Basic User Manual - French H48701JN H48701LB H48701HB
Basic User Manual - Portuguese H48701JP H48701LC H48701HC
Basic User Manual - Danish H48701JR H48701LD H48701HD
Basic User Manual - Dutch H48701JS H48701LE H48701HE
Basic User Manual - Finnish H48701JT H48701LF H48701HF
Basic User Manual - Greek H48701JU H48701LG H48701HG
Basic User Manual - Norwegian H48701JW H48701LH H48701HH
Basic User Manual - Polish H48701JX H48701LJ H48701HJ
Basic User Manual - Russian H48701JY H48701LK H48701HK
Basic User Manual - Swedish H486701JZ H48701LL H48701HL
Basic User Manual - Turkish H48701KA H48701LM H48701HM
Basic User Manual - Czech H48701KB H48701LN H48701HN
Basic User Manual - Hungarian H48701KC H48701LP H48701HP
Basic User Manual - Latvian H48701KD H48701LR H48701HR
Basic User Manual - Lithuanian H48701KE H48701LS H48701HS

Renewal Parts
Basic User Manual - Estonian H48701KF H48701LT H48701HT
Basic User Manual - Slovakian H48701KG H48701LU H48701HU
Basic User Manual - Romanian H48701KH H48701LW H48701HW
Basic User Manual - Bulgarian H48701KJ H48701LX H48701HX
Basic User Manual - Croatian H48701KL H48701LY H48701HY
Basic User Manual - Serbian H48701KM H48701LZ H48701HZ
Basic User Manual - Japanese H48701KN H48701MA H48701JA
Basic User Manual - Korean H48701KP H48701MB H48701JB
Basic User Manual - Chinese H48701KR H48701MC H48701JC
Basic User Manual - Indonesian H48701KS H48701MD H48701JD
Basic User Manual - Slovenian H48701KT H48701ME H48701JE
Basic User Manual - Ukrainian H48701KU H48701MF H48701JF
Basic User Manual - Kazakh H48701KW H48701MG H48701JG
Advanced Reference Manual - English H48701MK H48701MK H48701MK
Advanced Reference Manual - French H48701ML H48701ML H48701ML
Service Manuals
User Manuals
Basic User Manual - English H48701RU H48701PA H48701TG
Basic User Manual - German H48701RW H48701PB H48701TH
Basic User Manual - Spanish H48701RX H48701PC H48701TJ
Basic User Manual - Italian H48701RY H48701PD H48701TK
Basic User Manual - French H48701RZ H48701PE H48701TL
Basic User Manual - Portuguese H48701SA H48701PF H48701TM
Basic User Manual - Danish H48701SB H48701PG H48701TN
Basic User Manual - Dutch H48701SC H48701PH H48701TP
Basic User Manual - Finnish H48701SD H48701PJ H48701TR
Basic User Manual - Greek H48701SE H48701PK H48701TS
Basic User Manual - Norwegian H48701SF H48701PL H48701TT
Basic User Manual - Polish H48701SG H48701PM H48701TU
Basic User Manual - Russian H48701SH H48701PN H48701TW
Basic User Manual - Swedish H486701SJ H48701PP H48701TX

Renewal Parts
Basic User Manual - Turkish H48701SK H48701PR H48701TY
Basic User Manual - Czech H48701SL H48701PS H48701TZ
Basic User Manual - Hungarian H48701SM H48701PT H48701UA
Basic User Manual - Latvian H48701SN H48701PU H48701UB
Basic User Manual - Lithuanian H48701SP H48701PW H48701UC
Basic User Manual - Estonian H48701SR H48701PX H48701UD
Basic User Manual - Slovakian H48701SS H48701PY H48701UE
Basic User Manual - Romanian H48701ST H48701PZ H48701UF
Basic User Manual - Bulgarian H48701SU H48701RA H48701UG
Basic User Manual - Croatian H48701SW H48701RB H48701UH
Basic User Manual - Serbian H48701SX H48701RC H48701UJ
Basic User Manual - Japanese H48701SY H48701RD H48701UK
Basic User Manual - Korean H48701SZ H48701RE H48701UL
Basic User Manual - Chinese H48701TA H48701RF H48701UM
Basic User Manual - Indonesian H48701TB H48701RG H48701UN
Basic User Manual - Slovenian H48701TC H48701RH H48701UP
Basic User Manual - Ukrainian H48701TD H48701RJ H48701UR
Basic User Manual - Kazakh H48701TE H48701RK H48701US
Basic User Manual - Vietnamese H48701TF H48701RT H48701UT
AIUM Statement H48681AN H48681AN H48681AN
Advanced Reference Manual - English H48701UU H48701UU H48701UU
Advanced Reference Manual - French H48701UW H48701UW H48701UW

Renewal Parts
9.12 Probes
9.12.1 2D-Probes - Curved Array Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-49
9.12.2 2D-Probes - Linear Array Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-51
9.12.3 2D-Probes - Phased Array Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-52
9.12.4 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-53
9.12.5 CW-Doppler - Pencil Probes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-56
Note Please observe that some probes are not applicable on all Voluson E-Series systems (depending on system
type and/or configuration).
9.12.1 2D-Probes - Curved Array Probes

Table 9-13 2D Curved Array Transducers
900 4C-D 5162351 broadband curved array transducer, 2.0 - 5.0 MHz, 128 - Y Y
H4001BC Elements Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics,
Gynecology
901 C1-5-D 5304539 broadband curved array transducer, 2.0 - 5.0 MHz, 192 - Y Y
H40452LE Elements Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics,
Gynecology, Fetal Cardio
902 C2-9-D 5499605 broadband curved array transducer, xx - xx MHz, xxx - Y Y

H40462LN Elements Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics,
Gynecology, Fetal Cardio, Pediatrics

Renewal Parts
903 C4-8-D 5336339 broadband curved array transducer, 2.0 - 8.0 MHz, 192 - Y Y
H48681AS Elements Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics,
Gynecology, Fetal Cardio, Pediatrics
904 IC5-9-D 5212417 endocavity broadband curved array transducer, 4.0 - 9.0 - Y Y
H40442LK MHz, 192 Elements, field of view: max. 175° Applications:
Obstetrics, Gynecology, Urology

Renewal Parts
9.12.2 2D-Probes - Linear Array Probes

Table 9-14 2D Linear Array Transducers
910 11L-D 5410800 broadband linear array transducer, 4.0 - 10.0 MHz, 192 - Y Y
H40432LN Elements, electronically steerable Applications: Small
Parts, Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics, Orthopedics
911 9L-D 5499510 broadband linear array transducer, 3.0 - 8.0 MHz, 192 - Y Y
H40442LM Elements, electronically steerable Applications: Small
Parts, Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics, Orthopedics
912 ML6-15D 5271060 1,25D Matrix linear array transducer, 4.0 - 13.0 MHz, 336 - Y Y
H40452LG Elements / 3 rows (= 1008) Applications: Small-Part
(Breast), Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics, Orthopedics
(Musculoskeletal), Neonatal, Urology

Renewal Parts
9.12.3 2D-Probes - Phased Array Probes

Table 9-15 2D Phased Array Transducers
920 3SP-D KTZ280293 broadband phased array transducer, 1.0 - 5.0 MHz, 64 - Y Y
H48681AZ Elements Applications: Abdominal, Obstetrics,
Cardiology, Pediatrics, Neurology
921 S4-10-D 5394804 broadband phased array transducer, 4.0 - 9.0 MHz, 128 - Y Y
H45302LA Elements Applications: Small Parts, Cardiology,
Pediatrics
922 M5Sc-D 5446030 Matrix Single crystal phased array transducer, 1.5 - 4.6 - Y Y
H44901AE MHz, 80 Elements / 3 rows (= 270) Applications:
Obstetrics, Cardiology, Fetal Cardio, Pediatrics, Cephalic

Renewal Parts
9.12.4 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes

Table 9-16 Real-Time 4D Volume Probes
930 RAB2-5-D KTZ303980 Real-time 4D broadband electronic curved-array - Y Y

H48651MN transducer 1.0 - 4.0 MHz, 192 Elements Applications:
Abdominal, Obstetrics, Gynecology, Interventional
Radiology
931 RAB6-D KTZ303986 UltraLight Real-time 4D broadband electronic curved- - Y Y

H48681MG array transducer 2.3 - 7.3 MHz, 192 Elements
Applications: Abdominal, OB, Gyn, Pediatrics, Urology,
Interventional Radiology
932 RM6C* KTZ303993 1,5D Abdominal Matrix Array Real-time 4D broadband - Y Y

H48671ZG electronic transducer 2.0 - 6.0 MHz, 192 Elements / 5
rows (= 960) Applications: Abdominal, OB, Gyn,
Pediatrics, Urology, Interventional Radiology
933 eM6C* KTZ302457 1,5D Abdominal Matrix Array Real-time 4D broadband - Y Y

H48681MJ electronic transducer, 128 azimuthal x 64 elevation
elements (= 8192) Applications: Abdominal Obstetrics,
Gynecology/Fertility, Pediatrics
Note eM6C probes with SNo 190096KR8 onwards

require software version EC300 Ext.4 (15.0.4) or
higher.

Renewal Parts
934 eM6C G2* KTZ304083 1,5D Abdominal Matrix Array Real-time 4D broadband - Y Y
H48701ES electronic transducer, 128 azimuthal x 64 elevation
elements (= 8192) Applications: Abdominal Obstetrics,
Gynecology/Fertility, Pediatrics
935 RIC5-9-D KTZ303987 Real-time 4D endocavity broadband electronic curved - Y Y

H48651MS array transducer 4.0 - 9.0 MHz, 192 Elements, field of
view: max. 175° Applications: Gynecology/Fertility,
Obstetrics, Urology
936 RIC6-12-D* KTZ303991 Real-time 4D endocavity broadband electronic curved - Y Y

H48651NA array transducer 5.0 - 13.0 MHz, 256 Elements, field of
view: max. 190° Applications: Gynecology/Fertility,
Obstetrics, Urology

Renewal Parts
937 RSP6-16-D KTZ303997 Real-time 4D broadband electronic linear array transducer - Y Y

H48651MR 6.0 - 18.0 MHz, 192 Elements Applications: Small Parts,
Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics, Urology, Orthopedics
938 RNA5-9-D KTZ303994 Real-time 4D neonatal broadband electronic curved array - Y Y

H48651MY transducer 3.0 - 9.0 MHz, 192 Elements, field of view:
max. 144° Applications: Abdominal, Small Parts,
Obstetrics, Cardiology, Pediatrics
Note Probes marked with an asterisk (*) are not applicable at Voluson E6 systems.
Note The Electronic Matrix probe "eM6C" is only applicable at Voluson E10 systems.
The probe RNA5-9-D is not applicable at Voluson E-Series BT16 (EC310, SW 16.x.x), BT17 (EC320, SW
17.x.x) and BT18 (EC330, SW 18.x.x) systems.

Renewal Parts
9.12.5 CW-Doppler - Pencil Probes

Table 9-17 CW-Doppler - Pencil Probes
945 P2D KTZ280051 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler pencil probe with a - Y Y
H4830JE center frequency of 2.0 MHz (no B-image), 2 Elements
Applications: Cardiology (suprasternal), Peripheral
Vascular, Neurology
946 P6D KTZ280050 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler pencil probe with a - Y Y
H4830JG center frequency of 6.0 MHz (no B-image), 2 Elements
Applications: Cardiology, Peripheral Vascular, Pediatrics
CW-Doppler Pencil Probes are not applicable at Voluson E-Series BT16 (EC310, SW 16.x.x), BT17 (EC320,
SW 17.x.x) and BT18 (EC330, SW 18.x.x) systems.

Renewal Parts
9.13 Biopsy Needle Guides

Table 9-18 2D Curved Array Transducers
950 ****** E8385MJ disposable Biopsy needle guide for probe IC5-9-D needle - - N
(disposable) diameter: 16-18GA (gauge); 1.2 - 1.6 mm
951 ****** H40412LN reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe IC5-9-D needle - - N
(reusable) diameter: < 1.65 mm
952 PEC63 H46721R reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RIC5-9-D / - - N
RIC6-12-D needle diameter: < 1.8 mm
953 RIC Single-angle bracket H48681GF disposable Biopsy needle guide for probe RIC5-9-D / - - N
RIC6-12-D needle diameter: 16-18GA (gauge); 1.2 - 1.6
954 RIC Single-angle bracket + H48691Z mm - - N
Latex Cover
955 PEC74 H48621Y reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RAB2-5-D needle - - N
diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm
956 RAB Single-angle bracket H46701AE Non Sterile Single Angle Bracket needle guide for probe - - N
RAB2-5-D needle diameter: 8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); >
0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm

Renewal Parts
957 eM6C Biopsy Starter Kit H48681MK Biopsy Starter Kit for Matrix probe eM6C needle diameter: - - N
8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); > 0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm
958 eM6C G2 Biopsy Starter Kit H48701MP Biopsy Starter Kit for Matrix probe eM6C G2 needle - - N
diameter: 8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); > 0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm
959 PEC75 H46721W reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RSP6-16-D - - N
needle diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm
960 RSP Single-angle bracket H46701AD Non Sterile Single Angle Bracket needle guide for probe - - N
RSP6-16-D needle diameter: 8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); >
0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm
961 PEC76 H48651DG reusable Biopsy needle guide for probe RNA5-9-D needle - - N
diameter: < 1 mm, 1.4 mm, 2.2 mm
962 RNA Single-angle bracket H46701AF Non Sterile Single Angle Bracket needle guide for probe - - N
RNA5-9-D needle diameter: 8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); >
0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm

Renewal Parts
963 RAB6 Biopsy Starter Kit H48681ML Biopsy Starter Kit for UltraLight probe RAB6-D needle - - N
diameter: 8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); > 0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm
964 4C Multi-angle bracket E8385NA Non Sterile Multi Angle Bracket needle guide starter kit for - - N
probe 4C-D needle diameter: 8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); >
0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm
965 C1-5-D Biopsy guide H40432LE Non Sterile Multi Angle Bracket needle guide for probe - - N
C1-5-D needle diameter: 8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); > 0.6
mm - < 2.1 mm
966 C2-9-D Biopsy guide H4913BA Non Sterile Multi Angle Bracket needle guide for probe - - N
mm - < 2.1 mm
967 C4-8-D Biopsy guide H48681AT Non Sterile Multi Angle Bracket needle guide for probe - - N
mm - < 2.1 mm
968 12L-RS Multi-angle bracket H40432LC Non Sterile Multi Angle Bracket needle guide for probe - - N
11L-D needle diameter: 8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); > 0.6
mm - < 2.1 mm

Renewal Parts
969 9L Multi-angle bracket H4906BK Non Sterile Multi Angle Bracket needle guide for probe - - N
9L-D needle diameter: 8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); > 0.6
mm - < 2.1 mm
970 ML6-15D Biopsy kit H40432LJ Non Sterile Multi Angle Bracket needle guide for probe - - N
ML6-15-D needle diameter: 8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); >
0.6 mm - < 2.1 mm
971 3SP Multi-angle bracket H46222LC Non Sterile Multi Angle Bracket needle guide for probe - - N
3SP-D needle diameter: 8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); > 0.6
mm - < 2.1 mm
972 M5S-D Multi-angle bracket H45561FC Non Sterile Multi Angle Bracket needle guide for probe - - N
M5Sc-D needle diameter: 8.5FR, 14-23GA (gauge); > 0.6
mm - < 2.1 mm

Chapter 10
Care and Maintenance
This chapter describes Care and Maintenance on the Voluson E-Series system
and its peripherals. These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the
Voluson E-Series systems performance. Read this chapter completely and
familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task.

10.1 Why do Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2
10.2 Maintenance Task Schedule - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-2
10.3 Tools required - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-4
10.4 System Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-5
10.5 Using a Phantom - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-9
10.6 Electrical Safety Tests - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-10
10.7 When there's too much Leakage Current... - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-23
10.8 Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 10-24
Caution: Practice good ESD prevention.

Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and even when disconnecting/connecting
cables.
Warning
Be sure to disconnect the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system power plug and switch off the main
circuit breaker before you remove any parts. Be cautious whenever power is still on and covers are
removed.
Caution
Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON.
Caution
The system requires all covers. Do not operate the Voluson E-Series system unless all board
covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good
system performance and cooling purposes. When covers are removed, EMI may be present.
Caution
To ensure the mutual protection and safety of GE service personnel and our customers, all
equipment and work areas must be clean and free of any hazardous contaminants before a service
engineer starts a repair. This includes, but is not limited to, decontamination and/or sterilization,
depending on the application or use of the medical device.

10.1 Why do Maintenance
10.1.1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections
It has been determined by engineering that your Voluson E-Series system does not have any high wear
components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are mandatory. However,
some Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and/or inspections at a different
frequency than listed in this manual.
10.1.2 Keeping Records
It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of periodic and corrective
maintenance. The Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check form provides the customer with documentation that
the ultrasound system is maintained on a periodic basis.
A copy of the Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check form should be kept in the same room or near the
Voluson E-Series ultrasound system.
10.1.3 Quality Assurance
In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it is the
customer's responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each system. The program must
be directed by a medical physicist, the supervising radiologist/physician or an appropriate designee.
Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period so
that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken.
Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on
the site.
Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a
quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.
10.2 Maintenance Task Schedule
10.2.1 How often should Care and Maintenance Tasks be performed?
The Customer Care Schedule (see: Table 10-1 on page 10-3 ) specifies how often your Voluson E-Series
should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.
Note It is the customer's responsibility to ensure that the Voluson E-Series care & maintenance is performed as
scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance.
Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your Voluson E-Series ultrasound system
and can best provide competent, efficient service. Contact GE for coverage information and/or price for
service.
The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Customer Care Schedule assumes that
you use your Voluson E-Series for an average patient load (10 per day) and not use it as a primary mobile
system which is transported between diagnostic facilities.
Note If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the
maintenance frequencies.
Abbreviations used in the Customer Care Schedule Table 10-1:
• D = Daily
• W = Weekly
• M = Monthly
• A = Annually

Table 10-1 customer care schedule
Item Service at indicated Time D W M A Notes
Air Filter Grid Remove the filter grid and clean the air filter grid with • more frequently depending on your
vacuum cleaner from outside. environment
Air Filter Grid Remove filter grid, back top cover and back cover and • more frequently depending on your
clean the housing from inside. (vacuum cleaner and environment
soft brush)
AC Mains Cable Inspect AC mains cable • mobile systems check weekly
Cables and Connectors Check if all cables are fixed and well seated at the • also after corrective maintenance
correct position and if there is no mechanical damage
visible.
User Interface Clean alphanumerical keyboard, functional keys, • Be careful not to get the cloth too wet
digital potentiometers. (vacuum cleaner, lukewarm so that moisture does not enter the
soap water on a soft, damp cloth) loudspeakers or other keys!
LCD Monitor, Touch Clean LCD monitor surface, Touch Panel and probe • Be careful not to get the cloth too wet
Panel and Probe holder holder with a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, so that moisture does not enter the
damp cloth. entire system.
Mechanical parts Clean and inspect the mechanical function of wheels, • mobile systems check daily
casters, brakes and swivel locks as well as side door,
foot rest, front and rear handle, and monitor holder.
Remove dust and coupling gel.
Control Console Check translation/rotation and height adjustment • more frequently at mobile systems
movement (elevation)
Trackball Check Check proper operation (cursor movement X, Y • If failure occurs go to trackball
direction) cleaning.
Trackball Cleaning Remove trackball ring; open the trackball housing and •
take out the trackball (see Section 7.8.3 on page 7-
25 ). Clean the trackball (and X,Y axes) with soft
tissue and screwdriver shaft.
Disk Drives (Data Test image filing (Archive) import and export data • •* * save the image filing data weekly or
Backup) capability (DVD/CD Drive) at least monthly on DVD/CD
depending on the number of
examinations
Safe Probe Operation Clean probes and probe cables and check acoustic •* * or before each use
lens housing (cracks) and probe cables. In case of
mechanical damage, don't use them! Danger: Safety
risk for operator and patient.
Probe Air bubbles To detect air bubbles in filling liquid, shake the probe
carefully and check for abnormal noise.
Probe Connectors Remove dust/dirt of all probe connectors. Clean with •

vacuum cleaner if dust is visible.
Ultrasound system • Also after corrective maintenance or

Leakage Current Checks as required by your facilities QA
program.
Peripheral Leakage • Also after corrective maintenance or

Current Checks as required by your facilities QA
program.
Surface Probe Leakage • Also after corrective maintenance or

Current Checks as required by your facilities QA
program.
Endocavity Probe • Also after corrective maintenance or

Leakage Current Checks as required by your facilities QA
program.

Item Service at indicated Time D W M A Notes
Measurement Accuracy • Also after corrective maintenance or

Checks as required by your facilities QA
program.
Probe/Phantom Checks Check gain changes, vary the focus and check • Also after corrective maintenance or
reaction on screen. as required by your facilities QA
NOTE! The use of a Phantom is not required during program.
Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part
of their Quality Assurance Program tests.
Functional Checks of all • Also after corrective maintenance or

probes Section 10.4.2 on as required by your facilities QA
page 10-5 program.
10.3 Tools required
10.3.1 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment used for Maintenance
Note Electrical leakage testing may be accomplished with any calibrated Electrical Safety Analyzer tool compliant
with AAMI/ESI 1993 or IEC 60601 or AS/NZS 3551 or IEC 62353 or other relevant national regulation.
Table 10-2 overview of supplies and equipment used for maintenance
Tools Comments
Digital Volt Meter (DVM) minimum 5% accuracy, 3.5 digit and 200 Ohm range required
Anti Static Kit including anti-static mat, wrist strap, cables and conductive ground cord
Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner •
QIQ Phantom NOTE! The use of a Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer
may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.
CD-RW Media (minimum quad speed)
DVD+RW Disc Media blank blank 4,7GB DVD+RW disc
B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet see printer user manual for requirements
Color Printer Cleaning Sheet see printer user manual for requirements
Disposable Cloves •

10.4 System Maintenance
10.4.1 Preliminary Checks
The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the Voluson E-Series user documentation
whenever necessary.
Table 10-3 system checks
Step Item Description
1 Ask and Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.
2 Power up • Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on.
• Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed.
3 Probes Verify that the ultrasound system properly recognizes all probes.
4 Displays Verify proper display on the LCD monitor and Touch Panel (when present).
5 Presets “Full Backup” all customer presets onto appropriate media (see: Section 4.4.3 "Save Full System
Configuration (Full Backup)" on page 4-15 ).
6 Image Archive Backup the Image Archive onto appropriate media (see: Section 4.4.6.1 "Save Image Archive" on
page 4-20 ).
10.4.2 Functional Checks
The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the Voluson E-Series user documentation
whenever necessary.
10.4.2.1 Ultrasound System Checks

Table 10-4 ultrasound system functional checks
1 B Mode Verify basic B Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic ultrasound system controls that affect this mode
of operation.
2 M Mode Verify basic M Mode operation. Check the basic ultrasound system controls that affect this mode of
operation.
3 C Mode Verify basic CFM Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic ultrasound system controls that
affect this mode of operation.
4 PD Mode Verify basic PD Mode (Power Doppler Mode) operation. Check the basic ultrasound system controls
that affect this mode of operation.
5 Doppler Modes Verify basic Doppler Mode operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic ultrasound system
controls that affect this mode of operation.
6 3D Mode Verify basic 3D Mode operation. Check the basic ultrasound system controls that affect this mode of
operation.
7 RealTime 4D Mode Verify basic RealTime 4D Mode operation. Check the basic ultrasound system controls that affect this
(optional) mode of operation.
8 *Applicable Verify the basic operation of all optional modes. Check the basic system controls that affect each
Software Options option`s operation.
9 Keyboard Test Perform the Keyboard Test Procedure to verify that all keyboard controls are OK.
10 LCD Monitor Verify basic LCD Monitor display functions.
11 Touch Panel Verify basic Touch Panel display functions.
12 Peripherals see: Section 10.4.2.2 "Peripheral/Option Checks" on page 10-6
Note * Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration.

10.4.2.2 Peripheral/Option Checks

If any peripherals or options are not part of the ultrasound system configuration, the check can be omitted.
Refer to Section 3.8 "On-board optional Peripherals" on page 3-49 for a list of approved peripherals.
Table 10-5 approved peripheral/hardware option functional checks
1 Media Verify media drive(s) read/write properly. Clean if necessary.
2 B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
3 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
4 Color Deskjet Verify hardcopy output of the Deskjet (Bluetooth) printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
(Bluetooth) Printer
5 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device.
6 Footswitch Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary.
7 ECG Verify basic operation with customer.
8 Cellular Modem Verify basic operation.
10.4.2.3 Mains Cable Inspection

Table 10-6 mains cable inspection, as appropriate
1 Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and ultrasound system.
2 Inspect Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind.
3 Verify Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that
no strands may cause a short circuit.
4 Verify Inlet connector retainer is functional.

10.4.3 Physical Inspection
Table 10-7 physical checks
1 Labeling Verify that all ultrasound system labeling is present and in readable condition.
2 Covers Where applicable, verify all covers are secured in place and are properly aligned with other covers.
Replace any covers that are damaged.
3 Control Console Inspect the control console and keyboard. Record any damaged or missing items. (Replace faulty
and Keyboard components, as required).
4 Control Console • Where applicable, verify ease of control console movement in all acceptable directions.
Movement • Where applicable, ensure that it latches in position as required.
5 Control Console Check proper operation of all control console.

Lighting
6 LCD Monitor Inspect the LCD Display for scratches and bad pixels. Verify proper operation of Contrast and
Brightness controls. Where applicable, confirm that the LCD arm allows:
• swivelling the screen to the left and to the right
• folding the screen to the locked position
• release and adjustment backwards and forwards
• can be adjusted in the up/down positions
Note: LCD Arm movement may vary and is not applicable to all ultrasound systems.
7 Monitor Light Check for proper operation of any monitor lights, if available.
8 Cables and Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay
Connectors special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs.
9 Shielding & Covers Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place.
Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems during scanning.
10 Probe Holders Where applicable, inspect the Probe Holders for cracks or damage.
11 Power and System Check for proper operation of all Power and System Status Indicators.
Status Indicators
12 External I/O Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good.
13 Wheels and Brakes • Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the system from
moving, and release mechanism.
• Check all wheel locks and wheel swivel locks for proper operation.
14 Battery Where applicable, check that the battery is not damaged, does not leak, does not emit an odor, and is
not deformed or discolored. Observe all warnings and cautions for battery handling, recharging,
storing, and/or disposal.
10.4.4 Cleaning
The Basic User Manual of the Voluson E-Series system provides a complete description of system/probe
care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection.
Note It is the responsibility of the user to decide which cleaning procedures are necessary to ensure a safe
working environment.
Warning
• Before cleaning the Voluson E-Series system switch it off and disconnect from AC mains.
• Electric parts must be protected from liquids that drip or seep into the system.
• Electrical contacts and connectors must not be cleaned.
• Do not use high-proof alcohol for cleaning. Only use cleaning/disinfecting agents listed in the Basic
User Manual of the Voluson E-Series system.

10.4.4.1 General Cleaning

Frequent and diligent cleaning of the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system reduces the risk of spreading
infection from person to person, and also helps to maintain a clean work environment.
Table 10-8 general cleaning
1 Console Use cleaning agent on a soft, non-abrasive, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful
not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console. Caution: DO NOT allow any
liquid to drip or seep into the system.
2 LCD Monitor + Clean LCD Monitor surface and Touch Panel with cleaning agent on a soft, non-abrasive, damp cloth.
Touch Panel Caution: DO NOT spray any liquid directly onto Voluson E-Series covers, Monitor, keyboard, etc.
10.4.5 Probe Maintenance
10.4.5.1 Probe related Checks

Table 10-9 probe related checks
1 Probes Thoroughly check the ultrasound system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector
sockets if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins.
2 Probes Verify that the ultrasound system properly recognizes all probes.
3 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
10.4.5.2 Basic Probe Care

The Voluson E-Series system user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete
description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar
with the proper care of GE probes.
Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. Review the Basic User Manual of Voluson
E-Series for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment
damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty.
Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used.

Do a visual check of the probe pins and ultrasound system sockets before plugging in a probe.
10.4.5.3 Basic Probe Cleaning and/or Disinfection

Refer to the Basic User Manual of the Voluson E-Series system for details on cleaning and disinfection.
Caution
To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made of
nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions.
Caution
Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probes warranty. Do not soak
or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the Voluson E-Series Basic User Manual and/or care card.
Doing so could result in irreparable damage to the probe.
Caution
Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.

Caution
Follow the Care Card instructions supplied with each probe (inside the probe boxes) for disinfectants and
gels that are compatible with the surface material of the probes.
Note For the latest list of compatible cleaning solutions and disinfectants refer to: http://www.gehealthcare.com/
transducers.
Please be aware of the NEVER place or store a probe When disinfecting a probe,
sensitive probe head. TAKE on its scan head! ensure that there is sufficient
EXTREME CARE! space between the probe and
the container bottom!
10.4.5.4 Disinfection by means of the RIC-Holder

Especially for Real-time 4D endocavity probes (RIC), it is necessary to take extreme care when transporting
the system with the probe attached, or during the disinfection process. Inadequate handling may lead to
dead elements, shocked head mechanics, etc.
The RIC-Holder (especially developed for RIC Real-time 4D endocavity probes) guarantees that the
sensitive probe head does not hit the bottom of the container during the disinfection procedure.
Note Instructions are supplied with each RIC-Holder (KTZ225469).
10.5 Using a Phantom

The use of a Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their
Quality Assurance Program tests.

10.6 Electrical Safety Tests
10.6.1 Safety Test Overview
Warning
Energy Control and Power Lockout for Voluson E-Series:
When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:
1. Follow LOTO (Lockout/Tagout) procedures.
2. Turn off the breaker.
3. Unplug the Voluson E-Series system.
4. Maintain control of the Voluson E-Series system power plug.
5. Wait for at least 30 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.
Ultrasound system components may be energized.
The electrical safety tests in this section are based on IEC60601 standard including national deviations for
Health Care Facilities and IEC 62353 Medical electrical equipment – Recurrent test and test after repair of
medical electrical equipment. These standards provide guidance on evaluating electrical safety of medical
devices which are placed into service and are intended for use in planned maintenance (PM) or testing
following service or repair activities. They differ somewhat from the standards that are used for design
verification and manufacturing tests (e.g., IEC 60601-1 including national deviations) which require a
controlled test environment and can place unnecessary stress on the ultrasound system.
These tests may refer to specific safety analyzer equipment as an example. Always refer to the safety
analyzer's user manual that will be used to perform the tests.
Prior to initiating any electrical test, the system must be visually inspected. Perform following visual checks:
• Check for missing or loose enclosure covers that could allow access to internal live parts.
• Examine the mains cord, mains plug and appliance inlet for damaged insulation and adequacy of strain
relief and cable clamps.
• Locate and examine all associated probes. Inspect the cables and strain relief at each end. Inspect the
probe enclosure and lens for cracks, holes and similar defects.
Caution
For all instructions in this section: In case of using an UPS (uninterruptable power supply) the terms outlet,
wall outlet, AC wall outlet or power outlet refer to the AC wall outlet to which the UPS power input is
connected to. In case of further available AC (or DC) power outlets at the same used UPS these must
remain unused; i.e. not connected to any other devices.
Warning
Users must ensure that safety inspections are performed whenever damage is suspected and on a regular
basis in accordance with local authorities and facility procedures. DO NOT use the Voluson E-Series system
or individual probes which fail any portion of the safety test.
Warning
To minimize the risk and to avoid an electric shock, only trained persons are allowed to perform the electric
safety inspections and tests.
Caution
Compare all safety-test results with safety-test results of previously performed safety tests (e.g., last year
ect). In case of unexplainable abrupt changes of safety-test results consult experienced authorized service
personnel or GE for further analysis.
Caution
To avoid electrical shock, the Voluson E-Series system under test must not be connected to other electrical
equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The system under test must not be contacted by
users or patients while performing these tests.
Caution: Possible risk of infection.

Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components that have been in patient contact.
Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures before handling the equipment.

10.6.2 Leakage Current Limits
The following acceptance limits and test conditions are summarized from IEC 60601 including national
deviations and IEC 62353 and in some cases are lower than that specified by the standards.
Table 10-10 leakage current limits
Leakage Current Test System Power Grounding/PE Conductor Limit mA Limit μA
Earth Leakage On and Off N/A 0.5 500
Chassis/Enclosure Leakage On and Off Closed 0.1 100

Open 0.5 500
Type BF Applied Parts On (transmit) Closed 0.1 100

Open 0.5 500
Type CF Applied Parts On (transmit) Closed 0.01 10

Open 0.05 50
Type BF Applied Parts (sink leakage, On and Off Closed 5.0 5000
mains voltage on applied part)
Type CF Applied Parts (sink leakage, On and Off Closed 0.05 50

mains voltage on applied part)
Values based on IEC 60601
Note Open Grounding is also known as “Lift Ground”.
Table 10-11 ISO and Mains Applied limits*
Probe Type Measurement
BF 5.0 mA (5000 μA)
CF 0.05 mA (50 μA)
* ISO and Mains Applied refers to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the
applied part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient is in contact with
mains voltage.
Note Electrical leakage testing may be accomplished with any calibrated Electrical Safety Analyzer tool compliant
with AAMI/ESI 1993 or IEC 60601 or AS/NZS 3551 or IEC 62353 or other relevant national regulation.

Table 10-12 equipment type and test definitions
Applied Parts (AP) Parts or accessories that contact the patient to perform their function. For ultrasound equipment, this
includes transducers and ECG leads and e-TRAX Needle Sensor.
Type BF Type BF Applied Part (man in the box) symbol is in accordance with IEC 60417-5333.
e.g., ultrasound probes which are marked with the 'man in box' BF symbol
Type BF Type BF defibrillation proof Applied Part (man in the box with paddle) symbol is in
Defibrillator-proof accordance with IEC 60417-5334.
e.g., ECG electrodes which are marked with the 'man in box with paddle' BF symbol
Type CF Type CF Applied Part (heart in the box) symbol is in accordance with IEC 60417-5335.
e.g., intraoperative probes for direct cardiac contact, isolated ECG connections and e-TRAX
Needle Sensor, so marked with the 'heart in box' CF symbol
Type CF Type CF defibrillation proof Applied Part (heart in the box with paddle) symbol is in
Defibrillator-proof accordance with IEC 60417-5336.
e.g., intraoperative probes for direct cardiac contact, isolated ECG connections and e-TRAX
Needle Sensor, so marked with the 'heart in box with paddle' CF symbol
Sink Leakage The current resulting from the application of mains voltage to the applied part. This test is required for Type
BF and CF applied parts.
10.6.3 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada
Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet tester
and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported to the
hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.
Figure 10-1 Typical Alternate Outlet Tester
1 Correct Wiring 3 Reversed Polarity 5 Hot and Ground Reversed
2 Open Ground Wire 4 Open Neutral Wire 6 Open Hot Wire
Note No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the Grounding
(protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be
suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.

10.6.4 Grounding Continuity
Danger : Electric Shock Hazard!

The patient or operator MUST NOT come into contact with the equipment during this test.
Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case. The
ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC60601-1-1 and/or
IEC62353.
Figure 10-2 Ground Continuity Test
1 Ultrasound System 3 Ohmmeter
2 Ground Pin 4 accessible Metal Parts such as:

• Potential equilibrium connector
• Monitor housing
• Probe connector
Caution
Lacquer is an isolation barrier! Measure only on blank accessible metal parts.

10.6.5 Chassis Leakage Current Test
Warning: Electric Shock Hazard!

When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, DO NOT touch the Voluson E-Series system!
Caution: Equipment damage possibility!

Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the Voluson E-Series system is powered ON.
Power off the Voluson E-Series system, allow the stored energy to bleed down, and turn the circuit breaker
off BEFORE switching the "POLARITY" switch and/or the "NEUTRAL" switch on the leakage meter to avoid
possible power supply damage.
10.6.5.1 Definition
This test, also known as Enclosure Leakage current test, measures the current that would flow through a
grounded person who touches the accessible conductive parts of the equipment during normal and fault
conditions.
The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis.
The meter is connected to parts of the equipment, easily contacted by the user or patient.
Record the highest reading.
10.6.5.2 Generic Procedure

The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from
accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made under the test conditions
specified in:
• Table 10-10 on page 10-11 , as applicable.
Record the highest reading of current.
1. Connect the Safety analyzer to an AC wall outlet.
2. Plug the equipment under test into the receptacle on the panel of the meter.
3. Connect the meter to an accessible metal surface (see: Table 10-13) of the Voluson E-Series using the
cable provided with the meter.
4. Select the "Chassis" or "Enclosure Leakage" function on the meter.
5. Test opening and closing the ground with the Voluson E-Series system on and off.
Note For more information, refer to the safety analyzer's user manual that will be used to perform the test.
The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in:
• Table 10-10 on page 10-11 , as Chassis/Enclosure Leakage.

Follow the test conditions described for respective test points shown in the table below.
Table 10-13 chassis leakage current test condition
Test Condition Test Point (image)
1 Potential equilibrium connector (rear of system, on power supply

RSP)
2 Monitor housing (mounting screw for LCD Monitor housing, rear of

monitor)
3 Probe connector (probe mounting receptacle on front of system)
10.6.5.3 Data Sheet for Enclosure/Chassis Leakage Current

Table 10-14 shows a typical format for recording the enclosure/chassis leakage current. Measurements
should be recorded from multiple locations for each set of test conditions.
The actual location of the test probe may vary by system.
Record all data and keep the record of the results with other hard copies of maintenance data.
Table 10-14 Typical Data Format for recording Enclosure/Chassis Leakage Current
Unit under Test: Date of Test:
Test Conditions Measurement/Test Point Location
System Power Grounding/PE Limit μA Potential Monitor housing Probe connector

equilibrium
connector
off closed 100
off open 500
on closed 100
on open 500
off closed (reversed polarity) 100
off open (reversed polarity) 500
on closed (reversed polarity) 100
on open (reversed polarity) 500

10.6.6 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage-Lead to Ground

Never switch the Polarity when the Voluson E-Series system is powered ON. Be sure to turn the Voluson E-
Series system power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch.
10.6.6.1 Definition
This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The meter
simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching some other
grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity
normal and reversed, and with the Voluson E-Series ultrasound system on and off.
For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst
case condition.
10.6.6.2 Generic Procedure

3. Connect the ECG cable to the Voluson E-Series system and the patient leads to the analyzer.
4. Select the "Patient Lead Leakage" function on the meter.
Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in:
For each combination, the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst
case condition.
Figure 10-3 Set Up for test of Earth Leakage Current, UL60601-1/IEC60601-1
1 Voluson E-Series ultrasound system
2 Mains power cable
3 Accessible Metal Parts (chassis - non-earth ground, unprotected surface)
4 ECG patient cable
5 Electrical safety analyzer
6 AC wall outlet

10.6.7 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage-Lead to Lead
This test is also known as Patient Auxiliary Current.

Select and test each of the ECG lead positions (except ALL) on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power
and ground condition combinations found in:
Record the highest leakage current measured.
10.6.7.1 Lead to Lead Leakage Test Record

Table 10-15 shows a typical format for recording the patient lead to lead leakage current.
Measurements should be recorded from each lead combination under each set of test conditions specified
in:
Table 10-15 Typical Data Format for recording Patient Lead to Lead Leakage
Test Conditions Patient Lead or Combination Measured
System Power Grounding/PE Limit μA RA to LA LA to LL LL to RA (RA+LA+LL) to

GND
off closed 10
off open 50
on closed 10
on open 50
Note Values in italics font are given as examples only.

10.6.8 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test
Select the ALL position on the LEAD selector since the test is performed with mains applied to all ECG leads
at the same time.
Caution
Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock hazard, the system
being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO TEST switch is depressed.
10.6.8.1 Isolated Lead (Sink) Leakage Test Record

Table 10-16 shows a typical format for recording the isolated patient lead sink leakage current.
Measurements should be recorded for full lead combination under each set of test conditions specified in:
• Table 10-11 on page 10-11
5. Test with closed ground with the Voluson E-Series system on and off.
Table 10-16 Typical Data Format for recording Isolated Patient Lead (sink) Leakage
Test Conditions Patient Lead
System Power Grounding/PE Limit μA RA+LA+LL
on closed 50
off closed 50

10.6.9 Probe (Source) Leakage Current Test
Warning
Do not use the probe if the insulating material has been punctured or otherwise compromised. Integrity of the
insulation material and patient safety can be verified by safety testing according to IEC60601-1.
10.6.9.1 Definition
This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who is
being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.
Note Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage
currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test
lead placement. It is abnormal if no leakage current is measured. If no leakage current is detected, check the
configuration of the test equipment.
10.6.9.2 Generic Procedure on Probe Leakage Current

The most common method of measuring probe leakage is to partly immerse the probe into a saline bath
while the probe is connected to the ultrasound system and active. This method measures the actual leakage
current resulting from the probe RF drive.
Measurements should be made under the test conditions specified in:
• Table 10-10 on page 10-11 , as applicable for every probe.
For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition.
Note Saline water pod should be insulated from floor and earth ground.
The Saline solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free ions to the water, making it conductive.
Normal saline solution is 0.9% salt and 99.1% water. If ready-mixed saline solution is not available, a mixture
of 1 quart or 1 liter water with 9 or more grams of table salt, mixed thoroughly, will substitute.
Figure 10-4 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current
1 Ultrasound System 4 Ground Switch 7 Isolator
2 Tester 5 Polarity Reversing Switch 8 Ultrasound Probe
3 Neutral Switch 6 Meter 9 Saline Probe
lead placement. It is abnormal if no leakage current is measured. If no leakage current is detected, check the
configuration of the test equipment.

The ultrasound probes imaging area is immersed in the Saline solution along with a grounding probe from
the test meter to complete the current path.
This test is also known as Patient Leakage Current.
1. Turn the Voluson E-Series system OFF.
3. Set the Safety analyzer's function switch to "Chassis" or "Enclosure Leakage".
4. Plug the Voluson E-Series system's power cord into the test meter.
5. Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe) into the test meter's “CHASSIS” connector.
6. Connect the ultrasound probe to be tested to the Voluson E-Series system.
7. Immerse the saline probe in the saline solution.
8. Immerse the Voluson E-Series probe´s face (imaging area of the probe) into the saline solution.
Caution
To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid beyond the level
indicated shown below.
Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid or any part of the system under test while doing the test.

Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the Voluson E-Series system is powered ON.
Power off the Voluson E-Series system, allow the stored energy to bleed down, and turn the circuit breaker
off BEFORE switching the "POLARITY" switch and/or the "NEUTRAL" switch on the leakage meter to avoid
possible power supply damage.
a. Power ON the Voluson E-Series.
b. After the Voluson E-Series system has completed the boot process, select the probe to be tested
so it is the active probe.
c. Depress the "LIFT GROUND" rocker switch and record the highest current reading.
d. Follow the test conditions and test limits described in
* Table 10-10 on page 10-11 , as applicable for every probe.
10. Record the highest current reading.
The test passes when all readings measure less than the stated limits.

The actual location of the test probe may vary by system. Measurements should be recorded for each probe
under the set of test conditions.
Table 10-17 Typical Data Format for recording Probe (source) Leakage Current
Test Conditions Probe as measured in Saline Bath
System Power Grounding/PE Limit μA 4C-D 11L-D RIC5-9-D RM6C
off closed 100
off open 500
on closed 100
on open 500

10.6.9.3 Isolated Probe (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test

Warning
Do not use the probe if the insulating material has been punctured or otherwise compromised. Integrity of the
insulation material and patient safety can be verified by safety testing according to IEC60601-1.
Caution
Line voltage is applied to the ultrasound probe during this test. To avoid possible electric shock hazard, the
system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO TEST switch is
depressed.
Measurements should be recorded for full lead combination under each set of test conditions specified in:
• Table 10-11 on page 10-11
3. Connect the ultrasound probe to be tested to the Voluson E-Series system.
4. Immerse the saline probe in the saline solution.
5. Immerse the Voluson E-Series probe´s face (imaging area of the probe) into the saline solution.
7. Test with closed ground with the Voluson E-Series system on and off.
Table 10-18 Typical Data Format for recording Isolated Probe (sink) Leakage
Test Conditions Probe as measured in Saline Bath
System Power Grounding/PE Limit μA 4C-D 11L-D RIC5-9-D RM6C
off closed 5000
on closed 5000

10.7 When there's too much Leakage Current...
10.7.1 AC/DC fails
Where applicable, check the AC/DC adapter and its cable. Replace a new one if any portion is defective.
10.7.2 Chassis fails
Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed, or
intermittent. Replace any defective part.
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor
connections, or damage.
Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or owner to
correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used instead.
Note No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding wire are
reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the
outlet wiring should be visually inspected. If reversed wiring is observed, it is the customers responsibility to
have the condition corrected by qualified personnel.
10.7.3 Probe fails
Test another probe to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the system.
lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from inter-
cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate space on the check list.
Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the system. If excessive
leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor connections, and ground
continuity.
If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.
10.7.4 Peripheral fails
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
10.7.5 Still fails
If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones, one at a
time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.
In case of using an UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply), perform the tests in the “Electrical Safety tests”
section without using the UPS (i.e. directly connect the Voluson E-Series system to the AC wall outlet). If this
leads to a pass result, the specific UPS must no longer be used.
10.7.6 New Voluson E-Series system
If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new Voluson E-Series system and if situation can not be
corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the problem. Remove Voluson E-Series system from
operation.
10.7.7 ECG fails
Inspect cables for damage or poor connections.

10.8 Ultrasound Equipment Quality Check

Contact your GE Service Representative to perform Equipment and Image Quality Checks.

GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG
Tiefenbach 15
4871 Zipf
Austria
www.gehealthcare.com

Voluson E-Series BT15-BT18 (EC300-EC330) Service Manual - SM - 5539550APB - 6

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Voluson E-Series BT15-BT18 (EC300-EC330) Service Manual - SM - 5539550APB - 6

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P R E L I M I N A R Y (NOVEMBER 4, 2013)

Voluson E-Series BT15 / BT16 / BT17 / BT18

Document Number: 5539550APB

Revision Date Reason for change

1 May 2014 Preliminary Release

2 August 2014 Initial Release

3 May 2015 General Update and Improvement, new parts

4 August 2015 Implementation of EC310 (BT16)

5 July 2016 Implementation of EC320 (BT17), general update

6 August 2017 Implementation of EC330 (BT18), general update

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

3.5 Connection of Auxiliary Devices - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3-14

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

4.4.3 Save Full System Configuration (Full Backup) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4-15

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

5.11 Air Flow Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5-47

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

7.8.8 Activate Windows - Network Connectivity Issues - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7-32

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

9.11.4 System Manuals for EC330 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-47

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

Content in this chapter

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

1.1 Important Precautions

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

Certified electrical contractor statement - For USA only

Omissions & errors

Mail the information to: GE Healthcare Austria GmbH & Co OG

Service safety considerations

1.2 Legal Notes

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

1.3 Purpose of this Service Manual

Table 1-1 Contents in this service manual

Chapter Number and Title Description

Chapter 1 – Introduction Contains a content summary and warnings.

Chapter 2 – Site Preparation Contains pre-installation requirements.

Chapter 3 – Setup Instructions Contains setup and installation procedures.

Chapter 6 – Service Adjustments Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments.

Chapter 7 – Diagnostics/Troubleshooting Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related routines.

Chapter 9 – Renewal Parts Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts.

Chapter 10 – Care and Maintenance Provides periodic maintenance procedures.

1.3.1 Typical Users of the "Basic" Service Manual

• GE service personnel (setup, maintenance, etc.)

Voluson E-Series Service Manual

1.3.2 Models covered by this Manual

Table 1-2 Voluson E6 - model designations

Part Number Description BT version

H48691RL Voluson E6 BT15

H48691XH Voluson E6 incl. CW BT15

H48691ZF Voluson E6 BT16

H48701KX Voluson E6 BT17

H48701WB Voluson E6 BT18

Table 1-3 Voluson E8 - model designations

Part Number Description BT version

H48691RM Voluson E8 BT15